Skip to main content

Full text of "Brahmajijnasa or an inquiry into philosophical basis of Theism. Translated from the original Bengali, with supplementary chapters"

See other formats


:00 


loo 

=  00 

=  oo 


•CD 


CO 


: 


SHASTRI  INDO-CANADIAN  INSTITUTE 

156  Golf  Links, 

New  Delhi -3,  India 


s 


S'S'i^lBf 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2008  with  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.Ofg/details/brahmajijnasaori00tattuoft 


BRAHMAJIJNASA 


OR 


An  Inquiry  into  fclie  Philosophical  Basis  of  Theism 


BY  THE  SAME  AUTHOR 

1.  The  Vedanta  and  its  Eelation    to  Modern 

Thought :  Twelve   lectures   on   the   religion   and  philo- 
sophy of  the  L'panishads  and  the  Vedanta  Sutras.    Rs.  2-4. 

2.  The  Philosophy  of  Brahmaism :  Twelve  lectures 
on  Brahma  doctrine,  scidhan  and  social  ideals.     Rs.  2-8. 

3-  Krishna  and  the  Gita :  Twelve  lectures  on  the 
authorship,  philosophy  and  religion  of  the  Bhagavadgita. 
Rs.     2-8. 

4.  Brahmasadhan  or  Endeavours  after  the  Life 
Divine:  Twelve  lectures  on  spiritual  life.     Re.  1-8. 

j^*"  To   be   had   of   the   author  at  210/3/2,  Comwallis 
Street,  Calcutta.     For  other  works  please  see  the  end. 


BRAHMAJIJNASA 

OR 

An  Inquiry  into  the  Philosophical  Basis  of  Theism 


f  Translated  from  the  original  Bengali,  with 

supplementary  chapters 


BY 

SITANATH  TATTVABHUSHAN 

Headmaster,  Kesav  Academy ;   Sometime  Lecturer  in 
Philosophy,  City  College,  Calcutta 


Rs.  1-8  or  2s. 


Tass 

nib 

KUNTALINE  PRESS 

61,  BowBAZAR  Street,  Calcutta; 
Printed  &  published  by  P.  C.  Dass. 


PREFACE 

Bvahmajijndsd  in  Bengali  was  first  published 
m  1888.  A  revised  edition,  in  which  many- 
additions  and  alterations  were  made,  but  the 
central  doctrine  remained    unchanged,    came    out 


Errata — On  p.   ii,  1.  19,  read  '  authors  '  tor  '  author  s,'  and  01 
p.  iii,  1.  21,  read  "  first  and  second  "'  for  "  second  and  third.' 


whom  he  is  proud  to  count  Raja  Venkatakumar 
Mahipati  Surya  Rao  of  Pithapuram  and  the 
worthy  Principal  of  the  Pithapuram  Raja's 
College  at  Cocanada,  Rao  Bahadur  Venkata- 
ratnam,  m.a.,  l.t.  According  to  the  repeatedly 
expressed  wishes  of  the  latter  and  through  the 
generous  pecuniary  support  of  the  former,  Brahma- 
jijndsd  was  translated  by  the  author  in  191 2- 13 
and   now    comes  out  in  its  new  dress  with  three 


PREFACE 

Brahma jijndsd  in  Bengali  was  first  published 
in  1888.  A  revised  edition,  in  which  many 
additions  and  alterations  were  made,  but  the 
central  doctrine  remained  unchanged,  came  out 
in  igii.  The  theory  defended  and  expounded 
in  the  book  underlies  every  work  written  by  the 
author  since  its  first  publication.  It  has  therefore 
been  a  matter  of  regret  to  him  that  while  most 
of  his  works  are  in  English,  the  book  containing 
a  detailed  exposition  of  the  philosophical  views 
presupposed  in  them  should  remain  in  a  pro- 
vincial language  unknown  to  his  non-Bengali 
readers.  This  regret  was  shared  by  some  of  the 
readers  and  admirers  of  his  English  works,  among 
whom  he  is  proud  to  count  Raja  Venkatakumar 
Mahipati  Surya  Rao  of  Pithapuram  and  the 
worthy  Principal  of  the  Pithapuram  Raja's 
College  at  Cocanada,  Rao  Bahadur  Venkata- 
ratnam,  m.a.,  l.t.  According  to  the  repeatedly 
expressed  wishes  of  the  latter  and  through  the 
generous  pecuniary  support  of  the  former,  Brahma- 
jijndsd  was  translated  by  the  author  in  191 2- 13 
and   now   comes  out  in  its  new  dress  with  three 


11 

supplementary  chapters  recently  written.  The 
author's  debt  of  gratitude  to  the  Raja  Saheb  for 
the  liberal  support  given  to  all  his  later  literary 
efforts  was  already  immense,  and  is  now  immeasur- 
ably enhanced  by  this  last  act  of  kindness,  which 
has  enabled  him  to  give  a  much  needed  com- 
pletion to  the  little  system  of  Theistic  Theology 
contained  in  his  works.  Of  that  system  the 
present  book  gives  the  metaphysical  basis,  the 
Philosophy  of  Brahma  ism  shows  the  doctrinal, 
ethical  and  social  development,  Brahmasddhan 
indicates  the  sddhans  or  spiritual  exercises,  and 
the  Vedanta  and  its  Relation  to  Modern  Thought 
and  Krishna  and  the  Gitd  define  the  relation  to  the 
elder  Theism  of  the  country  as  presented  in  the 
Prasthdnatrayam,  the  three  Vedantic  institutes. 

The  author's  intellectual  debt  will  be  some- 
what evident  from  the  names  of  books  and 
author's  given  in  the  foot-notes.  The  central 
doctrine  will  be  found  to  be,  in  its  essence,  the 
Theism  of  the  Upanishads,  and  in  its  method,  the 
Neo-Hegelianism  of  British  Idealists.  But  both 
in  the  exposition  and  elaboration  of  the  doctrine 
the  author  will  be  found  to  have  departed  largely 
from  the  Vedantists  of  both  the  chief  schools — 
those  of  Sankara  and  Ramanuja, — as  well  as 
from  the  British  Neo-Hegelians.     This   departure 


Ill 


will  be  found  chiefly  in  the  third  and  fourth 
chapters.  The  Idealists,  though  recognising  an 
•element  of  difference  in  the  fundamental  Unity, 
make  little  of  it,  while  the  Vedantists  of  Sankara's 
school  ignore  it  altogether,  and  the  followers  of 
Ramanuja  do  little  more  than  assert  it  dogmati- 
cally on  the  authority  of  the  scriptures.  The 
author  of  this  book  has  tried  to  put  the  proper 
emphasis  on  it  and  to  show  its  bearing  on  the 
doctrine  of  an  ever-active  God  of  love  essential 
to  all  true  Theism. 

The  Natural  Theology  of  the  West  recognises 
three  arguments  for  Theism,  (i)  the  Cosmological 
or  Causal,  (2)  the  Teleological,  and  (3)  the  Ontolo- 
gical.  Some  theologians  recognise  a  fourth,  the 
Moral.  The  first  three  chapters  of  the  book  will 
be  found  to  be  one  long  exposition  of  the  third 
argument,  which,  according  to  Hegel,  is  the  only 
real  argument,  and  the  fourth  chapter  is  devoted 
to  an  exposition  of  the  fourth  argument.  The 
second  and  third  arguments,  as  not  strictly 
philosophical,  find  no  place  in  the  original 
Brahma jijndsd.  But  as  popular  arguments,  help- 
ful to  the  unphilosophical  mind,  and  as  steps 
leading  to  the  Ontological  Argument,  they  are 
given  in  the  supplementary  chapter  on  the 
"  Theistic  Presuppositions  of  Science."     The  two 


IV 

other  supplementary  chapters  give  brief  accounts 
of  some  of  the  chief  systems  of  British  and 
American  thought  that  have  appeared  or  become 
prominent  since  the  book  was  first  published. 
They  were  written  as  articles  for  a  weekly  paper 
and  were  not  intended  to  form  parts  of  a  book  on 
Philosophy.  But  it  is  hoped  that  they  will  not 
fail  to  prove  suggestive  and  lead  to  more  serious 
studies  on  the  subjects  touched  upon  in  them. 

Though  deeply  conscious  of  its  defects  and 
imperfections,  the  author  yet  humbly  commends 
Brahmajijndsd  to  students  of  Philosophy  with 
the  hope  that  it  may,  under  divine  blessing, 
introduce  them  to  higher  and  deeper  studies  in 
Metaphysics  and  Theology  and  awaken  in  them 
an  aspiration  after  communion  with  the  God 
who  loves  and  lives  in  all. 

Calcutta, 
August,  1916. 


CONTENTS 

Chapters  and  Sections  Page 
Chapter  I :     The  Self  and  the  Not-self       ...  i — 89 
Section  i — Self-consciousness  and  object-con- 
sciousness              ...                 ...  I — 18 

Section  2 — Mind  and  Matter       ...                 ...  18 — 57 

Section  3 — Refutation  of  Naturalism           ...  58 — 75 

Section  4 — Knowledge  and  the  Senses         ...  76 — 81 

Section  5 — The  Self — Universal  and  Individual  82 — 89 

Chapter  II  :   The  Temporal  axd  the  Eternal     90 — 145 
Section  i — Sensationalism     and     Subjective 

Idealism  ...  ...     90 — 100 

Section  2 — Knowledge  a  Unity-in-difference     100 — 107 
Section  3 — Knowledge  and  Will  ...   108 — 112 

Section  4 — Time  and  Events      ...  ...   112 — 121 

Section  5 — Knowledge  and  Time  ...   121 — 129 

Section  6 — The  Omniscience  of  God  ...   129 — 140 

Section  7 — The  Mystery  of  Creation  ...   140 — 145 

Chapter  III:     Unity  and  Difference  .,.  146 — 167 

Section  i — The  Unity  and  Infinitude  of  God    146 — 150 
Section  2 — Unity-in-difference   ...  ...   150 — 157 

Section  3 — Dualism,    Monism   and  the  Doc- 
trine of  Unity-in-difference      ...   157 — 167 

Chapter  IV :  The  Perfect  and  the  Imperfect  168 — 198 
Section  i — The  Divine  Love  and  Holiness  ...  168 — 180 
Section  2 — God's  Love  to  Individuals  ...   180 — 188 

Section  3 — The  Mystery  of  Evil  ...  188 — 198 


11 

Chapter  A :    Theistic       Presupppositions      of 

Science  ...  ...  igg — 231 

Chapter  B  :     Mr.  Bradley  on  the  Divine  Person- 
ality ...  ...  ...  232 — 239 

Chapter  C  :     Monism,   Pluralism  and  their  Re- 
conciliation ...  ...  240 — 256 


# 


CHAPTER  I 
THE  SELF  AND  THE  NOT-SELF 

Section   i — Self-consciousness  and  object- 
consciousness 

At  the  very  commencement  of  our  discussion 
I  beg  the  reader  to  retire  to  a  solitary  place  and 
meditate  on  the  self.  Let  him  draw  away  his 
mind,  so  far  as  he  can,  from  external  objects,  and 
stop  the  activity  of  his  senses — cease  to  see,  hear 
and  touch.  Let  all  thoughts  of  external  objects 
also  cease  and  let  the  mind  be  quiet  and  at  rest. 
Perhaps,  even  when  all  other  objects  have  moved 
away  from  the  mind,  one  will  still  remain — 
darkness  or  the  thought  of  darkness.  That  how- 
ever will  not  make  much  difference.  Now,  in 
this  dark,  quiet,  and  lonely  place, — in  this  calm, 
unruffled  state, — let  the  reader  try  to  realise   his 


2  SELF-CONSCIOUS\ESS    &   OBJECT-CONSCIOUSXESS      CHAP. 

self.  Let  him  now  have  a  close  vision  of  that 
which  he  is  apt  to  forget  almost  totally  in  his 
absorption  in  external  objects.  Let  him  see 
by  introspection  that  though  all  external  lights 
are  put  out,  the  light  of  the  self  is  not  put 
out.  The  self  is  shining  by  its  own  light  and 
lighting  the  darkness  too.  The  self  is  conscious 
of  itself  as  the  subject,  the  knower,  and  of  the 
darkness  as  the  object,  the  known ;  the  self 
reveals  itself  as  consciousness.  Let  the  reader 
closely  attend  to  this  characteristic  of  the  self, — 
its  consciousness.  It  has  other  characteristics 
also,  but  they  all  depend  upon  this — they  all 
shine  in  its  light.*  Consciousness  is  the  very 
life  of  the  self,  it  is  consciousness  itself.  Hence- 
forth we  shall  often  speak  of  the  self  as  only 
consciousness.  However,  let  the  reader  see  now, 
that  in  this  fundamental  characteristic  of  the 
self, — consciousness, — there  is  a  sort  of  distinction 
or  difference — a  difference,  as  it  were,  of  the 
root  and  the  branch,  of  the  support  and  the  sup- 
ported. That  the  self  knows  itself — its  self-cons- 
ciousness— is  the  fundamental  fact,  while  its  know- 
ledge of  the  object,  darkness,  depends  on  its   self- 

*  '  Tasya  bhdsd  sarvam  idam  vibhdti ' — Miindaka  Upa- 
nishad,  II.  2.  10. 


SELF-COXSCIOUSXESS  FUNDAMENTAL 

consciousness.  The  self  cannot  know  darkness 
without  knowing  itself.  Not  that  the  self  knows 
itself  first  and  the  next  moment  knows  darkness. 
The  fact  is  that  the  self  knows  itself  and  darkness 
at  once,  by  the  same  undivided  act  of  knowing. 
Nevertheless  self-consciousness  is  the  essential 
*  condition  and  ground  of  the  consciousness  of 
darkness.  To  be  conscious  of  darkness,  one 
must  necessarily  be  conscious  of  one's  self  :  dark- 
ness cannot  be  known  without  the  knowledge  of 
the  self.  It  is  not  possible  to  know  mere  dark- 
ness. In  the  knowledge  of  darkness  the  whole 
content  of  knowledge  involved  is  /  know  darkness. 
Darkness  cannot  be  known  without  the  knowing 
"I."  If  the  reader  doubts  this,  he  may  try  if  he 
can  think  of  darkness  without  thinking  of  his 
self.  If  he  says,  "Yes,  I  perceived  darkness  with- 
out knowing  my  self  ;  when  I  perceived  darkness, 
I  did  not  know  my  self,"  then  I  shall  put  two 
questions  to  him.  You  say  that  when  you 
perceived  darkness  you  did  not  know  your  own 
self,  did  not  know  the  knower, — the  fact  'I  know' 
was  not  included  in  the  content  of  your  know- 
ledge. All  right ;  let  me  take  this  for  granted. 
But  I  ask  you — What  is  the  proof  of  your  having 
perceived  darkness  ?  You  will  say  that  the  proof  is 
remembrance, — that    it    lies    in  the  fact  that. you 


4  SELF-CONSCIOUSNESS    &   OBJECT-CONSCIOUSNESS      CHAP. 

remember  to  have  perceived  darkness.  Well, 
then  the  content  of  your  remembrance  is  this — 
'  I  then  knew  darkness,'  that  is,  '  I  knew '  +  '  dark- 
ness '  are  the  two  indivisible  contents  of  your 
remembrance.  You  must  admit  that  nothing 
can  be  remembered  that  was  not  once  known, 
that  it  is  only  things  known  that  can  be  remem-' 
bered.  What  is  remembered  must  once  have 
been  known.  Therefore,  as  you  remember  '  I 
knew,'  this  fact  must  have  been  known  to  you, 
that  is,  at  the  time  of  knowing  darkness,  'I  know' 
must  have  formed  a  content  of  your  knowledge. 
And  yet  you  said  a  moment  before  that  you  per- 
ceived mere  darkness, — that  at  the  time  you  per- 
ceived darkness  you  had  no  knowledge  of  your  self 
— that  '  I  know  '  formed  no  content  of  your  know- 
ledge. The  reader  sees  then  that  to  think  that 
darkness  can  be  known  without  knowing  the 
self  is  only  the  result  of  inadvertence.  To  know 
darkness,  one  must  necessarily  know  the  self ; 
self-consciousness  is  the  condition  and  support 
of  the  consciousness  of  darkness, — the  knowledge 
of  darkness  is  absolutely  impossible  without  the 
knowledge  of  the  self. 

Let  us  now  proceed  a  little  further.  Let  the 
reader  open  his  eyes  and  look  at  some  object. 
Suppose  he  sees  a  piece  of  paper,  the  white  colour 


ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    THE    TRUTH 

of  which  has  taken  the  place  of  darkness.  It  may 
seem  that  immediately  on  opening  the  eyes, 
immediately  on  looking  at  the  paper,  he  has 
reached  the  external  world  and  gone  entirely  out 
of  the  inner  world,  the  world  of  the  self.  But 
^the  fact  is  not  so  :  he  has  not  gone  an  inch  out 
of  the  impassable  limits  of  self-consciousness. 
Whatever  we  have  said  of  the  knowledge  of 
darkness,  is  true  also  of  this  knowledge  of  colour. 
He  will  see  that  in  knowing  this  colour  too,  he 
must  necessarily  know  the  self  that  knows  it. 
As  self-consciousness  is  the  necessary  support  of 
the  consciousness  of  darkness,  so  is  it  of  the 
consciousness  of  colour  ;  the  latter  is  not  a  bit 
more  independent  than  the  former.  The  know- 
ledge of  colour  is  impossible  without  the  know- 
ledge of  the  self.  In  the  knowledge  of  colour, 
the  whole  content  involved  is  "  I  know  colour." 
If  the  reader  has  any  doubt  of  the  matter,  he  has 
only  to  apply  the  test  already  proposed,  and  he 
will  see  that  to  suppose  that  the  knowledge  of 
colour  is  possible  without  the  knowledge  of  self, 
is  an  inadvertence. 

The  reader  may  replace  this  knowledge  of 
colour  by  the  knowledge  of  any  other  object  he 
pleases,  but  he  will  see  that  whatever  the  object 
may   be,    the    consciousness    of   it    is    invariably 


6  SELF-CONSCIOUSXESS    &   OBJECT-CONSCIOUSNESS      CHAP. 

accompanied  with  self-consciousness,  forming  its 
support  and  making  it  possible.  Self-conscious- 
ness is  the  universal  principle  that  remains 
constant  in  the  midst  of  the  changes  of  object- 
consciousness  :  nothing  can  enter  into  conscious- 
ness without  being  conditioned  by  it.  We 
cannot  know  anything  else  without  knowing  "  I 
know  ;  "  we  cannot  remember  anything  without 
remembering  "  I  knew  ;  "  and  we  cannot  antici- 
pate any  future  knowledge  without  thinking 
"  I  shall  know."  All  knowledge  is  winded,  as 
it  were,  with  the  thread  of  self-knowledge  ;  the 
whole  structure  of  knowledge  stands  on  the 
ground-work  of  self-knowledge.  The  truth  of 
this  principle  is  not  confined  to  the  particular 
examples  of  it  we  have  given.  It  is  not  a  parti- 
cular truth  confined  to  particular  cases  :  it  is  a 
universal  and  necessary  truth.  As  the  properties 
of  all  circles  are  evident  from  particular  circles, 
as  those  of  all  triangles  are  exemplified  by  parti- 
cular triangles,  so  is  the  common  characteristic 
of  all  forms  of  knowledge  revealed  in  particular 
forms.  As  every  circle  requires  a  centre,  as  a 
circle  without  a  centre  is  impossible,  so  is  a  piece 
of  knowledge  impossible  without  self-knowledge. 
The  reader  may  now  open  all  the  gates  of 
knowledge, — all  his  senses — and  perceive  various 


I  SELF-CONSCIOUSKESS   UNIVERSAL   AND    NECESSARY  7 

objects  in  nature.  In  doing  this,  he  will  see  that 
all  objects  are  full  of  the  light  of  the  self.  He 
will  see  that  the  light  of  self-knowledge  is  on  all 
forms  of  knowledge — that  it  is  that  light  by 
which  all  objects  are  revealed.  With  all  the 
objects  he  sees  is  involved  the  truth  "  I  see  ;  " 
with  all  he  hears,  "  I  hear  ;  "  with  all  he  touches, 
"  I  touch  ;  "  in  a  word,  with  all  that  he  knows, 
he  knows  the  fundamental  truth,  "  I  know."  Let 
the  reader  clearly  realise  this  truth.  It  may  now 
seem  to  be  trivial,  but  he  will  see  by  and  by  that 
it  is  really  the  basis  of  our  knowledge  of  God. 

As  a  self-evident  truth,  we  merely  state  and 
expound  it ;  we  make  no  attempt  to  prove  it.  As 
the  basis  and  proof  of  all  other  truths,  it  is  really 
above  proof.  We  have  seen  how,  by  attempting 
to  deny  this  self-evident  truth,  we  are  involved 
in  inconsistencies  and  self-contradictions — how, 
by  denying  something  for  a  moment,  we  are 
obliged  to  admit  it  in  a  manner  the  next  moment. 
It  is  needless  to  say  anything  more  on  the  sub- 
ject. To  say  that  we  know  something,  but  do 
not  know  ourselves  as  knowers,  is  to  say  that  we 
acquire  a  piece  of  knowledge,  but  do  not  know  it 
as  ours.  One  who  says  this  may  be  asked, — if  in 
acquiring  the  piece  of  knowledge  he  does  not 
know  it  as  his,  why  does  he  believe  it  as  his  the 


8  SELF-CONSCIOUSNESS   &   OBJECT-CONSCIOUSNESS      CHAP. 

next  moment  ?  And  why  does  he  attempt  to  get 
it  recognised  as  such  ?  Whence  comes  this  un- 
shaken belief  in  a  matter  which  he  did  not  know 
directly  and  of  which  he  does  not  possess, — what 
is  not  possible — any  indirect  proof  ?  If  we  were 
to  say  to  the  objector  that  whatever  knowledge 
he  is  said  to  have  acquired  without  self-knowledge 
is  not  really  his,  what  could  he  answer?  We 
could  indeed  very  well  say  so,  for  the  objector 
himself  says  that  in  acquiring  that  knowledge  he 
did  not  know  it  as  his,  and  he  cannot  say  that 
he  remembers  it  as  his,  for  what  was  not  known 
at  all,  cannot  be  remembered, — what  was  never 
eaten  cannot  be  ruminated.  That  we  claim  our 
knowledge  as  ours,  depends  upon  the  invulnerable 
proof  that  in  acquiring  every  piece  of  knowledge 
we  have  known  it  to  be  ours,  that  we  have 
acquired  not  a  bit  of  knowledge  without  self- 
knowledge  and  do  not  consider  such  unconscious 
acquisition  of  knowledge  as  possible.* 

The  reader  may  ask,  '  If  it  be  really  true  that 
self-consciousness  accompanies  every  other  form 
of  consciousness,  that  so  long  as  we  are  conscious 
we  are  also  self-conscious,  how  is  it  that  the  very 


*  See  Ferrier's  Institutes  of  Metaphysic,  Prop.     I,  and 
Sankara's  Commentary  on  the  Brahmasutras,  II.  3.7. 


I        INTUITIVE  &  REFLECTIVE  KNOWLEDGE  DISTINGUISHED        9 

Opposite  of  this  seems  to  be  true  ?  How  is  it 
that  we  seem  to  forget  the  self  in  our  absorption 
in  the  knowledge  of  some  particular  object  ?  The 
source  of  the  error  is  this.  To  know  something 
and  to  think  that  we  know  it, — to  understand 
that  we  know  it,— are  two  very  different  things. 
Knowing  is  often  a  matter  of  direct  perception, 
insight  or  introspection,  while  understanding  is 
always  the  result  of  reflection,  of  observation. 
We  have  shown  that  no  ki.  iwledge  is  possible 
without  the  knowledge  of  the  self  as  the  knower, — 
without  the  knowledge  of  the  piece  of  knowledge 
as  one's  own.  This  self-consciousness,  which  lies 
at  the  root  of  all  consciousness  of  objects,  is 
direct  knowledge.  But  to  understand  this  truth 
clearly  is  not  the  result  of  direct  knowledge  ;  it 
is  the  result  of  thought, — of  reflective  introspec- 
tion, which  is  a  difficult  process,  one  which  many 
are  quite  incapable  of  going  through.  To  make 
the  mind  calm  and  quiet,  to  concentrate  the 
attention  on  the  contents  of  knowledge,  to 
analyse  them  closely  and  describe  them — is  quite 
impossible  with  many.  And  even  those  who  are 
capable  of  doing  all  this,  do  not  do  it  always. 
Even  the  most  thoughtful  philosopher  has  not 
always  the  microscope  of  mental  analysis  ready 
in   hand.     So   it    happens    that  though  self-con- 


lO         SELF-CONSCIOUSNESS    &   OBJECT-CONSCIOUSNESS      CHAP 

sciousness  (dtmajndna),  which  is  direct  know- 
ledge, is  involved  in  all  forms  of  consciousness, 
self-realisation  (atmopalabdhi)  or  the  reflective 
knowledge  of  self,  is  not  always  possible.  If 
the  reader  understands  this  difference  between 
self-consciousness  and  self-realisation,  he  will  see 
why  the  truth  under  discussion  does  not  always 
seem  to  be  true.  Self-consciousness  is  fundament- 
al, intuitive,  spontaneous  and  universal ;  it  is 
possessed  by  the  thoughtful  and  the  thoughtless 
alike,  and  is  present  at  all  moments,  reflective 
and  unreflective.  But  self-realisation  is  the  result 
of  reflection,  of  self-examination  ;  it  is  possible 
only  to  the  thoughtful,  and  attainable  only  in 
reflective  moments.  We  spend  most  part  of  our 
life  without  reflection,  without  self-examination  ; 
and  so  it  seems  to  us  that  for  most  part  of 
our  life  we  remain  without  self-knowledge — 
without  self-consciousness— and  absorbed  in 
the  consciousness  of  objects.  But  the  fact  is  that 
at  such  times  though  we  are  without  self-realisa- 
tion, we  are  not  without  self-consciousness.  We 
could  not  know  anything  without  knowing  "  I 
know,"  "  the  knowledge  is  mine." 

We  now  proceed  to  expound  another  funda- 
mental principle  of  knowledge  and  crave  the 
reader's  close  attention  to  it.     He  must  have  seen 


I      OBJ-CONSCIOUSNESS  INVOLVED  IN  SUBJ-CONSCIOUSNESS       II 

that  when  he  was  trying  to  free  the  mind  from 
the  knowledge  and  thought  of  objects,  he  did  not 
quite  succeed  in  doing  so.  All  objects  of  sense 
must  have  moved  away  from  his  sphere  of  know- 
ledge, the  activity  of  all  his  senses  must  have 
ceased,  the  thought  of  all  external  objects  must 
have  stopped  and  the  mind  must  have  ceased  to 
be  swayed  by  various  feelings  and  become  calm 
and  tranquil.  Nevertheless,  the  thought  of 
objects  cannot  have  been  quite  excluded.  When 
the  thought  of  all  other  things  had  passed  away 
from  the  mind,  darkness  remained  to  keep  com- 
pany with  the  self.  This  darkness  may  not  be 
called  a  material  object,  but  it  is  nevertheless 
an  object.  Whether  it  is  an  external  or  an  inter- 
nal object,  a  material  or  a  mental  property, — we 
at  present  say  nothing  as  to  that.  It  may  here- 
after be  seen  to  be  nothing  independent  of  the  self, 
— nothing  that  can  exist  apart  from  the  self  ;  but 
what  we  say  at  present  is  only  this,  that  it  is  an 
object,  not  the  subject,  not  the  self, — that  there 
is  a  distinction, — a  sort  of  duality — between  it 
and  the  self.  In  knowing  darkness,  the  self 
knows  something  which  it  can  distinguish  from 
itself,  and  so  it  says  that  it  knows  itself  and 
darkness.  If  there  were  no  distinction  between 
the   self  and   darkness,    the    consciousness  of  self 


12      SELF-CONSCrOUSKESS   &   OBJECT-CONSCIOUSNESS        CHAP. 

would  pass  away  with  the  disappearance  of  the 
consciousness  of  darkness,  and  it  would  be  impos- 
sible for  the  self  to  perceive  the  white  colour  and 
other  objects  referred  to  by  us.  This  proves  that 
though  self-consciousness  was  manifested  in  con- 
nection with  the  consciousness  of  objects  when 
the  latter  appeared,  it  is  not  one  with  it, — that 
there  is  a  difference  between  the  two.  So  we  said 
that  though  darkness  is  not  a  material  object,  it 
is  nevertheless  an  object,  and  as  such  distinguish- 
able from  the  subject.  What  we  have  to  say 
now  is  that  however  the  self  may  try  to  free 
itself  from  the  consciousness  of  objects,  to  isolate 
itself,  it  is  impossible  for  it  to  do  so  :  some  cons- 
ciousness or  thought  of  objects  must  necessarily 
accompany  its  consciousness  of  itself.  As  we 
have  seen  that  self-consciousness  is  the  necessary 
condition  of  object-consciousness,  that  no  cons- 
ciousness of  objects  is  possible  without  it,  so  is 
it  true  that  self-consciousness  cannot  manifest 
itself  without  being  accompanied  with  some 
consciousness  of  objects — that  the  consciousness  of 
self  is  impossible  without  some  object-conscious- 
ness. The  self  cannot  know  itself  without  distin- 
guishing itself  from  some  object  or  other.  The 
difference  between  these  two  fundamental  truths 
is,  that  while  self- consciousness  is    the    invariable 


I  THE    TWO    FUNDAMENTAL    TRUTHS    DISTINGUISHED         I3 

condition  and  acconripaniment   of    all   conscious- 
ness  of   objects, — the    self  being  known  with  the 
knowledge  of  every  object, — no  particular  object- 
consciousness  accompanies  self-consciousness.    It  is 
not  necessary  that  any  particular  object  or   num- 
ber of  objects  must  be  known  with  the  self.     The 
fact  is  that  the  self  cannot  be  known  unless  soTiie 
object  or  other,  whatever   it    may   be,    is   known 
with    it.     Perhaps,    some    reader  will  say  that  in 
realising  his  self,  in  the  way  he  is  invited    to    do, 
he   can    free    himself   from    the    consciousness  of 
darkness, — that  darkness  does  not   remain   as   an 
object    of   his    knowledge    in    that   state  of  self- 
realisation.     Now,  there  is  nothing  surprising  in 
this.     A  man    born   blind   has   perhaps  no    idea 
of   darkness ;  but   perhaps    he    has  a   feeling    of 
touch  instead  of  a  feeling   of   darkness.     Perhaps 
he  feels    the    touch    of   the   seat  he  occupies,  or 
the  memory    of   some    touched   or  heard    object 
sticks    to    his   mind.     As  to  a  man  with  eyes  the 
absence  of  light  remains  as  an  object  of  conscious- 
ness in  such  a  condition,  so  to   a  blind   man    the 
absence  of  sound  or  touch  perhaps  remains  as  the 
accompaninent  of  his  lonely  thought.     The   truth 
is   that  whether  it  be  something  positive  or  nega- 
tive,   some    external   object   or   some    feeling  or 
state  of  the  mind,  the  thought  of  some    action    or 


14      SELF-CONSCIOUSXESS    &   OBJECT-CONSCIOUSNESS        CHAP 

inaction — whatever  has  any  distinction  or  differ- 
ence from  the  self — must  invariably  accompany 
the  consciousness  of  self.  Why  the  self  cannot 
know  itself  in  isolation,  the  reader  will  under- 
stand on  a  little  reflection.  What  does  the  self 
know  itself  to  be  ?  It  knows  itself  to  be  a  knower. 
Whatever  object  the  self  may  know,  it  knows 
itself  with  it  as  its  knower.  With  whatever 
object-consciousness  its  self- consciousness  may  be 
manifested,  the  form  of  this  self-consciousness  is — 
'  I  am  the  knower.'  It  is  only  as  a  knower  that 
the  self  knows  itself.  But  the  term  '  knower '  is 
relative  ;  it  implies  an  object  of  knowledge.  A 
knower  who  knows  nothing  is  unmeaning.  But 
cannot  the  self,  it  may  be  asked,  know  itself? 
Yes,  it  can,  we  reply,  but  in  knowing  itself  it 
must  know  itself  as  possessing  some  characteris- 
tic. It  is  not  possible  that  it  should  know  itself 
and  yet  not  know  itself  as  so  and  so.  But  under 
whatever  characteristic  it  may  know  itself,  it  will 
be  seen  that  every  one  of  these  characteristics  is 
related  to  some  object  or  other, — that  unless  some 
object  or  other  is  known  or  thought  of,  that 
characteristic  cannot  be  known  or  thought  of. 
If  the  self  thinks  of  itself  as  unextended,  as  space- 
less, such  thought  is  possible  only  in  relation 
to  the  thought  of  extended  objects.     If   it    thinks 


I  SELF-CONSCIOUSNESS    RELATIVE  15 

of  itself  as  permane-nt,  unchangeable,  such  thought 
is  possible  only  in  relation  to  transient,  change- 
able objects.  If  it  thinks  of  itself  as  one,  such 
thought  is  possible  only  in  relation  to  the  thought 
of  many  objects.  The  reader,  therefore,  sees 
that  '  self-consciousness  is  impossible  without 
object-consciousness,'  is  also  a  fundamental  truth. 
As  in  trying  to  deny  our  first  fundamental  truth 
we  involve  ourselves  in  self-contradiction,  so  is 
it  the  case  with  this  our  second  fundamental 
truth.  If  any  reader  says  that  in  a  particular 
moment  he  knew  only  his  self,  and  not  anything 
else,  then  we  ask  him  as  before,  What  proof  of 
this  do  you  offer  ?  Its  only  proof  can  be  memory. 
The  reader  remembers  that  in  that  particular 
moment  he  knew  only  his  self,  and  nothing  else, 
so  that  the  whole  content  of  his  knowledge  at 
that  moment  was—'  I  know  only  myself  + 1  know 
nothing  else.'  The  reader  sees  that  the  second 
part  of  this  piece  of  knowledge  is  involved  in  the 
first ;  we  put  it  separately  only  to  make  it  explicit. 
That  this  piece  of  knowledge  is  not  mere  self- 
consciousness,  that  the  consciousness  of  an  object 
is  involved  in  it,  is  also  clear.  That  object  is — 
the  feeling  of  the  absence  of  anything  else  but 
the  self.  This  feeling  itself  is  a  form  of  object- 
consciousness  and  as  such  is  distinguishable  from 


l6      SELF-CONSCIOUSNESS    &   OBJECT-CONSCIOUSNESS        CHAP. 

self-consciousness.  The  reader  therefore  sees 
that  what  he  thought  a  moment  before,  namely 
that  he  sometimes  knows  his  self  in  isolation 
from  objects,  is  something  absurd.  The  very 
absence  of  objects  cannot  be  felt  without  thinking 
of  some  object  or  other.  In  thinking,  '  I  perceive 
no  object,'  the  self  necessarily  thinks  of  something 
or  other  as  representing  the  world  of  objects. 
The  sky,  the  earth,  a  tree,  a  piece  of  paper,  a  pen, 
joy,  sorrow — something  or  other  like  these  must 
be  thought  of,  so  that  the  thought  '  I  perceive 
no  object '  may  be  possible.  We  see,  then,  that 
the  knowledge  or  thought  of  some  object  is  an 
invariable  and  necessary  condition  of  self-con- 
sciousness, that  the  self  cannot  realise  itself  without 
distinguishing  itself  from  some  object  or  other. 

We  have  explained  two  fundamental  laws 
of  knowledge.  We  have  discussed  as  much  of 
Epistemology  or  the  science  of  knowing  as  is 
necessary  for  our  present  purpose.  We  shall  now 
take  up  Ontology  or  the  science  of  being.  Before 
we  take  up  this  discussion,  it  seems  necessary 
to  say  a  word  or  two  on  the  relation  of  faith  and 
knowledge.  Faith  is  of  two  kinds, — rational 
faith  and  blind  faith.  Rational  faith  is  faith 
derived  from  knowledge,  whatever  may  be  the 
method    in   which  the    latter   may   be    acquired. 


FAITH — BLIND    AND    RATIONAL  17 

Such  faith  alone  is  real  faith.  It  is  the  necessary 
result  of  knowledge.  It  naturally  follows  know- 
ledge and  does  not  require  the  practice  of  any 
austerities  or  any  other  spiritual  exercise  than 
the  acquisition  of  knowledge.  There  is  another 
^kind  of  faith  which  is  not  real  faith,  but  only  its 
shadow  or  adumbration.  It  does  not  wait  for 
knowledge  or  understanding,  but  is  the  result 
of  tradition  or  sentiment.  Far  from  depending 
on  knowledge  or  understanding,  this  blind  faith 
sticks  even  to  suCh  false  things  as  cannot  either 
be  known  or  thought  of,  and  the  thought  of 
which  involves  inconsistency  and  self-contradic- 
tion. What  cannot  be  known  or  thought  of 
cannot  indeed  be  an  object  of  real  faith,  and  so 
we  have  said  that  such  faith  is  not  real  faith,  but 
only  its  shadow— only  a  make-belief.  Such  blind 
faith  perhaps  exists  in  all  persons  more  or  less, 
but  a  seeker  after  knowledge  can  never  be  con- 
tented with  it.  If  there  is,  among  the  readers  of 
this  book,  any  one  who  is  contented  with  such 
faith,  he  may  put  down  the  book  immediately, 
for  it  is  not  intended  for  him.  It  is  impossible 
for  such  an  one  to  acquire  true  knowledge.  Even 
if  he  proceeds  to  acquire  knowledge,  blind  faith 
will  mislead  him  at  every  step.  In  whatever 
disguise     he    may  come,    Mahiravana,  the  prince 


l8  MIND    AND    MATTER  CHAP. 

of  the  nether  regions,  is  a  deadly  enemy  of 
Rama  and  Lakshmana.*  So,  blind  faith,  whether 
it  calls  itself  common  sense  or  spiritual  ex- 
perience, is  a  deadly  enemy  of  all  kinds  of  pure 
knowledge,  and  therefore  of  the  knowledge  of 
God.  Let  the  reader  who  is  prepared  to  accept 
the  witness  of  knowledge,  and  is  satisfied  with 
knowledge  alone,  accompany  us  while  we 
proceed  to  seek  the  witness  of  God  in  our  self- 
consciousness  and  consciousness  of  objects. 

Section  2 — Mind  and  Matter 

Let  us  discuss  the  relation  of  the  external 
world  to  mind  in  the  light  of  the  truths  ex- 
plained in  our  first  section.  The  reader  has 
already  seen  that  every  object  of  knowledge  is 
full  of  the  light  of  the  self  and  is  really  revealed  by 
that  light.  Let  him  now  try  to  realise  this  truth 
fully.  What  I  have  before  me, — paper,  ink, 
inkpot,    pen,    table    &c. — are    all    objects    of  my 

*  Mahiravana  was  a  son  of  Ravana,  King  of  Lanka, 
[n  the  Ramayana  by  Ki'rtivasa  he  is  represented  as  having 
successively  taken  various  disguises — those  of  Dasaratha 
and  Kausalya  among  others — in  order  to  get  entrance  into 
the  room  in  which  the  princes  were,  in  order  to  carry  them 
off  to  his  regions.  He  at  last  succeeded  in  his  attempt 
under  the  form  of  Vibhishana,  the  princes'  chief  friend 
and  protector. 


I  RELATIVITY    OF   SUBJECT    AND    OBJFXT  I9 

sight,  related  to  that  form  of  knowledge  which 
is  called  visual  perception.  The  pen,  paper  and 
inkpot  touched  by  me  are  related  to  my  tactual 
sense, — are  objects  of  my  sense  of  touch.  In  the 
same  manner,  whatever  I  perceive  by  the  other 
senses  I  know  to  be  closely  related  to  conscious- 
ness— to  the  conscious  self.  Even  when  I  do  not 
perceive  them,  I  can  think  of  them,  I  can  imagine 
them,  as  existing  only  in  relation  to  conscious- 
ness. Thought  or  imagination  can  deal  only 
with  materials  supplied  by  perception.  Imagina- 
tion can  variously  manipulate  the  materials 
supplied  by  perception— can  combine  or  permute 
them  in  various  ways,  but  cannot  create  new 
materials.  The  common  characteristic  of  all 
that  we  know  of  material  objects — of  their  forms, 
qualities,  states, — is  that  they  are  known — objects 
of  the  conscious  self.  Consequently,  imagination 
too  can  contemplate  them  only  as  objects  of 
the  conscious  self.  If  imagination  could  create 
new  materials,  such  materials  also  would  be 
nothing  but  objects  imagined, — objects  of  the 
imagining  self,  and  not  things  unrelated  to  the 
self — things  independent  of  it.  The  reader  there- 
fore sees  that  things  that  we  call  material  cannot 
be  known  or  thought  of  as  unrelated  to  or 
independent  of  the  conscious  self.    Things  known 


20  MIND   AND    MATTER 

can  be  distinguished,  but  not  separated,  from   the 
knower.     The  distinction  is  within,  not   without, 
knowledge.     The   knowledge    of   what   we   call 
matter   is   a   relation    of   which  one  term  is  the 
self   as   subject,    and   the  other  matter  as  object. 
But   this   distinction    or  difference  of  subject  and 
object   is   a   difference    within     knowledge    and 
has  no  place  out  of   knowledge.     Matter   cannot 
either  be  known  or  conceived  out  of  this  relation 
— knowledge.     It  cannot  be  known  or  conceived 
except  as  appearing  to  the  self  as   the    object   of 
its   knowledge.     Now,   the  conclusion   from    all 
this  is   that   what  we  cannot   know  and    cannot 
even  conceive,  is  not  worthy  of  being  believed  in, 
and   cannot    really  be  believed  in  ;  but  neverthe- 
less  people    think    that   they  can  and  do  believe 
in  it.     The  fact  is    that    they   do   not  believe  in 
it,  but  only  think  that  they  believe.    Matter   can 
neither   be    known  nor  conceived  as  independent 
of  knowledge, — it  is  indissolubly   related    to  the 
self  in  knowledge  and  conception  ;  and  yet  people 
think    that    in    existence    it   is   independent     of 
knowledge, — that  it  can  exist  without  being  the 
object  of  any  knowledge.     Such  thinking  is  mere 
fancy  ;  mere  senseless  talk.     How    it    originated 
we  shall  explain  later  on.     Let  the    reader   only 
understand   now    that  it  is  a  meaningless  talk,  a 


CONTRADICTIONS    IN    POPULAR   THINKING 

groundless  erroneous   belief.     We    have    already 
shown    how    in    entertaining    it  we  involve  our- 
selves in  inconsistency — in  an   actual   contradic- 
tion.    However   different   material    things     may 
be  from  one  another,  they  have  all    this  common 
characteristic,    that    they    are    all   known  things. 
What  do  I  know  of  the  pen  in  my  hand  ?  I  know 
that   it    is   something   having   colour,  extension, 
hardness,  smoothness  &c.     But  all  these  qualities 
are  dependent  on   knowledge.     Colour   is   some- 
thing   that  is  seen  and  we  can  think  of  it  only  as 
something  seen.     Similarly  hardness  and  smooth- 
ness are  also  known    objects, — objects   of  touch, 
and    can   be    thought   of    only    as  such.     In  the 
same  manner,  extension  too  is  something  known 
by   vision    and    touch  and  can  be  conceived  only 
as  such  an  object  of  knowledge.     Therefore,  if  we 
were  to  believe  something  having  these  charac- 
teristics as  existing  independently  of  knowledge — 
existing   without    being   known   by   me  or   any 
other  conscious  being,  we  should   have  to  believe 
in   this  absurd    and  senseless   proposition   that  a 
seen   thing  exists   unseen     or    that     a     touched 
thing    exists    untouched.     Popular    thinking    is 
involved  in    such  a  net  of  error  tiiat   it  accepts 
even  such  absurd  and  contradictory  propositions 
as  credible.     The  fact  is  that  even  when  this  pen 


22  MIND   AND    MATTER 

is  absent  from  sense,  people  really  think  of  it  as 
seen  and  touched,  thought  being  impossible  under 
any  other  conditions.  But  because,  apart  from 
the  momentary  sensuous  knowledge  of  things, 
they  have  no  clear  notion  of  an  eternal  know- 
ledge, they  are  obliged  to  think  that  though  the 
pen  exists,  it  is  not  the  object  of  any  knowledge — 
not  dependent  on  any  conscious  self.  If  the 
reader  takes  a  few  examples  like  the  one  we  have 
used,  and  thinks  a  little  on  the  subject,  he  will 
see  that  the  proposition,  "  A  material  thing  exists 
without  being  the  object  of  any  knowledge, — 
independently  of  any  knowing  self " — is  an  ex- 
tremely absurd  and  meaningless  one.  For  a 
material  object,  to  exist  is  to  be  known, — its 
existence  consists  in  being  known.  To  exist  in 
any  other  form, — to  exist  independently  of  a 
knowing  self — is  for  it  impossible. 

We  shall  take  up  one  by  one  each  quality 
of  matter  and  by  a  detailed  discussion  of  them 
and  of  the  material  'substance'  imagined  by  some 
philosophers,  we  shall  show  that  matter  is  not 
anything  independent  of  mind — that  mind  is  the 
support  of  matter.  Before,  however,  we  take  up 
that  discussion,  we  shall  show  the  cause  of  the 
popular  error  about  matter.  The  chief  cause 
of   this    error   is    a   false   notion  of  the  nature  of 


I  POPULAR  XOTIOX  OF  THE  SOUL  23 

mind  or  the  soul.  To  the  uneducated  and  the 
unreflective,  the  soul  means  the  body :  in 
speaking  of  their  soul,  they  think  of  their  body. 
Those  who  know  that  the  soul  is  formless  and 
immaterial,  are  indeed  partly  free  from  error, 
but  many  of  them  are  not  quite  freed  from  the 
fundamental  mistake.  People  of  this  class  have 
no  clear  notion  of  formlessness  and  immateriality. 
Though  speaking  of  the  soul  as  formless  and  im- 
material, they  in  a  manner  attribute  form  and 
materiality  to  it.  They  think  of  the  soul  as  a 
subtle  thing  confined  to  a  particular  part  of 
space.  As,  according  to  this  view,  the  soul  is 
a  small  thing  confined  to  a  small  portion  of 
space,  whatever  is  external  to  that  portion  of 
space,  whatever  lies  outside  of  it,  appears  to 
be  external  to  the  soul.  To  say  that  such  things 
are  indissolubly  connected  with  the  soul — are 
dependent  on  the  soul— seems  to  be  so  much 
metaphysical  raving.  By  thus  mistaking  matter 
to  be  the  soul,  and  attributing  the  material 
qualities  of  extension  and  size  to  the  soul,  people 
become  blind  to  the  deeper  truths  of  the  spiritual 
world,  mistake  their  own  ignorance  and  thought- 
less notions  for  '  common  sense,'  and  failing  to 
realise  the  truths  revealed  to  the  keen  insight  of 
the  wise,  set  them    down    as   so    much    senseless 


MIND    AND    MATTER 


talk.  People  of  this  class  do  not  see  that  if  the 
soul  is  to  be  believed  as  something  confined  to 
a  portion  of  space,  it  must  be  regarded  also  as 
having  a  particular  size,  and  that  if  it  has  a 
particular  size,  its  formlessness  and  immateriality 
are  gone,  and  it  has  become  something  material. 
The  fact  is  that  the  soul  is  essentially  conscious, 
it  is  consciousness  itself,  shining  by  its  own  light 
and  revealing  thereby  matter,  which  depends 
for  existence  on  its  support.  This  consciousness 
is  the  fundamental  characteristic  of  the  self.  It 
involves  no  idea  of  length,  breadth  or  size.  Con- 
sciousness is  neither  long  nor  short,  neither  broad 
nor  narrow,  neither  deep  nor  shallow ;  it  has 
no  such  quality.  It  is  therefore  a  great  error  to 
regard  the  conscious  self  as  something  having 
size  or  as  confined  to  such  a  thing.  The  self  has 
no  space  relations  with  matter  ;  its  relation  to 
it  is  one  of  knowledge.  The  self  is  the  knower, 
the  subject,  and  matter  is  the  known,  the  object. 
To  say  therefore  that  the  self  is  in  a  certain 
portion  of  space,  is  true  only  in  the  sense  that 
the  former  knows  the  latter.  In  this  sense  the 
self  may  be  said  to  be  in  everything  it  knows. 
It  cannot  be  confined  to  any  one  of  the  things 
it  knows.  If  it  were  confined  to  any  one  of 
them,  it  could  not  know  the    others.     I    see    my 


I  THE    SOUL    NOT    IN'    SPACE  25 

hand,  this  pen  and  this  piece  of  paper.  These 
things  are  external  to  one  another.  Now,  people 
think  that  just  as  these  three  things  are  external 
to  and  independent  of  one  another,  so  is  the 
self  a  fourth  thing  occupying,  like  the  other  three, 
a  distinct  portion  of  space  and  looking  at  them 
from  there.  It  is  because  of  this  false  notion  of 
the  self  that  people  believe  matter  to  be  some- 
thing independent  of  consciousness.  The  fact  is 
that  consciousness,  the  self,  is  equally  present  to 
all  these  three  things,  and  is  not  confined  to  any 
one  of  them  ;  nor  does  it  occupy  any  portion  of 
space  beyond  them.  The  self  is  consciousness, 
and  whatever  is  an  object  of  consciousness  is 
within  its  sphere.  It  is  the  common  support  of 
all  objects  of  knowledge.  However,  we  shall 
discuss  more  closely  later  on  the  relation  of  space 
to  consciousness. 

Another  cause  which  makes  people  think  of 
material  objects  as  independent  of  consciousness 
is  that  by  consciousness  people  usually  under- 
stand their  own  individual  consciousness,  the 
limited  consciousness  of  finite  beings.  We  know 
that  our  knowledge  is  confined  to  very  small 
limits.  We  know  that  at  a  time,  by  one  glance 
or  a  momentary  act  of  touch,  we  can  apprehend 
very    little  of  the  material  world — how  little,  we 


26  MIND   AND   MATTER  CHAP. 

shall  show  hereafter.  And  the  little  we  thus 
know  does  not  always  remain  in  our  conscious- 
ness. But  we  believe— and  this  belief  is  not 
groundless— that  the  material  world  continues 
to  exist  even  when  it  leaves  the  sphere  of  our 
individual  consciousness.  When,  by  conscious- 
ness, people  understand  only  the  individual  cons- 
ciousness, it  is  nothing  surprising  that  they  should 
think  of  the  world  as  existing  independently  of 
consciousness  when  it  is  out  of  the  sphere  of  our 
individual  knowledge.  But  by  saying  that  the 
world  cannot  exist  independently  of  conscious- 
ness, we  do  not  mean  that  it  cannot  exist  in- 
dependently of  any  individual  consciousness.  We 
do  not  say  that  when  we  do  not  know  the 
material  world  it  ceases  to  exist.  What  we 
really  say  is  that  even  when  we  do  not  know  it, 
it  exists  in  consciousness.  How  the  individual 
consciousness  is  related  to  that  in  which  it  then 
exists,  the  reader  will  see  by  and  by.  The  reader 
will  indeed  admit  that  the  nature  of  the  world 
revealed  to  individual  consciousness  is  its  true 
nature.  There  is  really  no  other  means  of  learn- 
ing the  true  nature  of  the  world  than  what  we  call 
the  individual  consciousness.  But  what  do  we 
learn  by  our  individual  consciousness  about  the 
nature  of  matter  ?  Is  it  not  this,  that  it    is  some- 


1  COXSCIOUSNESS— INDIVIDUAL   AND   UNIVERSAL  27 

thing  essentially  related  to  consciousness  ?  Really 
it  is  impossible  to  learn  anything  else.  Things 
known  can  be  known  only  as  related  to,  as 
dependent  on,  consciousness.  When,  by  our 
individual  intelligence,  we  learn  that  the  world 
is,  by  its  very  nature,  something  dependent  on 
consciousness,  we  must  believe  that  even  when 
we  do  not  know  it,  it  still  exists  in  some  cons- 
ciousness ;  otherwise  it  cannot  exist  at  all.  We 
state  this  truth  in  the  current  language  of 
common  sense,  which  may  be  interpreted  as 
meaning  that  when  we  do  not  know  the  world 
it  exists  in  some  consciousness  quite  distinct  or 
separated  from  our  consciousness ;  but  really  it 
is  not  so.  We  shall  show  gradually- — the  reader  is 
not  expected  to  understand  it  clearly  at  this  stage 
of  our  discussion— that  it  is  not  a  fact  that  the 
world  is  continually  passing  from  one  conscious- 
ness to  another  like  a  ball  tossed  from  one  person's 
hand  to  another's.  What  we  call  the  individual 
consciousness  is  not  merely  individual.  Though 
its  manifestation  in  individual  life  is  limited,  it 
is  not  essentially  limited.  The  consciousness 
which  is  manifested  in  our  individual  life,  which 
shines  as  the  light  and  support  of  all  that  we 
know,  remains  ever-waking  and  manifest  to 
itself   in    the    midst  of  our  individual  ignorance. 


28  MIND    AND    MATTER 

oblivion  and  sleep,  and  supports  the  world. 
However,  we  shall  explain  these  truths  at  length 
in  the  proper  place. 

We  shall  now  discuss  each  quality  of  matter 
and  show  that  it  is  not  anything  independent 
of  consciousness — that  it  cannot  exist  except  in 
relation  to  it.  This  section  of  our  book  is  most 
useful  in  correcting  the  popular  error  in  regard  to 
matter ;  the  reader  will  therefore  do  well  to  pay 
particular  attention  to  it. 

Extension  is  the  common  characteristic  of  all 
material  objects  :  ever}'  material  object  has  exten- 
sion or  spatiality.  Qualities  like  colour,  smell, 
warmth, and  coldness  may  not  be  possessed  by  parti- 
cular objects,  but  every  material  object  has  exten- 
sion. That  this  extension  or  spatiality  is  dependent 
on  consciousness,that  it  is  not  anything  independent 
of  mind, — we  have  already  explained  in  a  general 
way.  We  shall  now  explain  it  particularly.  Let 
us  take  as  example  the  piece  of  paper  before  us. 
So  long  as  we  merely  look  at  this  piece  of  paper, 
and  do  not  touch  it,  we  perceive  only  two  of 
its  qualities — its  extension  and  its  white  colour. 
Instead  of  white,  it  may  be  coloured  blue,  yellow 
or  green.  It  may  have,  and  may  be  conceived 
as  having,  any  colour.  No  particular  colour  is 
absolutely  necessary  for  it.     But  the  reader   will 


I        PKRCEPTIOM    OF    EXTEXSION    IMPLIED    IN'    SENSATIONS      29 

see    that  whatever  colour  it  may  have  or  may  be 
conceived  to  have,  it  is  absolutely  necessary    that 
there   should    be    extension    with    it.     It   is  only 
with      extension — as      extended — that       colour 
appears     or     can     be     conceived  :    extension    is 
I  absolutely   necessary   for   colour.       But    on     the 
other  hand,    colour    is    not   absolutely   necessary 
for  extension.     We  have  seen  that  in  the  absence 
of  white,  extension  may  exist  with  blue,    and   in 
the    absence    of  blue  with  green  and  so  forth,  no 
particular  colour  being  necessary  for  the    percep- 
tion    of     extension.      Nay,     extension    may  be 
perceived  even  without  any  colour   at    all.     The 
blind  have  no  sense  of  colour,  but    they    perceive 
extension.     Extension     appears     to    them    with 
sensations  of  touch.     Not  only  to  the    blind,    but 
to   those   also  who  have  eyes,  extension  may  and 
does  appear  with  tactual  sensations.     In  the  case 
of    these    sensations   also,    it    is   found    that    the 
perception  of  space    is    absolutely    necessary    for 
them — for    the    sensations    of   warmth   and  cold, 
smoothness  and  roughness,  hardness  and  softness. 
It   is    impossible  for  these  sensations  to  be  felt  or 
imagined    without   a   perception     of     extension, 
but  the   perception    of   space    is   not   necessarily 
accompanied  with  these  sensations.  In  the  absence 
of  heat,  space  may   be   perceived    with    cold ;  in 


30  MIND    AXD    MATTER 

the  absence  of  cold,  with  smoothness  or  rough- 
ness and  so  forth — none  of  these  sensations  being 
absolutely  necessary  for  the  perception  of  space. 
Nay,  in  the  absence  of  all  tactual  sensations, 
extension  may  be  perceived  with  colour.  There- 
fore, as  we  saw  before  that  space  is  not  dependent 
on  colour,  but  is  independent  of  it,  so  we  see  now 
that  it  is  not  dependent  on  touch,  but  is  in- 
dependent of  it. 

We  therefore  see  that  of  the  qualities  with 
which  space  is  perceived,  it  is  dependent  on 
none, — none  being  absolutely  necessary  for  it, 
but  that  it  is  indispensably  necessary  for 
perceiving  them.  Nay  more.  Visual  sensations 
like  white,  blue  and  green,  and  tactual  sensa- 
tions like  heat  and  cold,  may  be  conceived 
as  absent,  as  non-existent  ;  but  the  non- 
existence of  space  cannot  be  conceived.  We 
may  imagine  that  the  colour,  smoothness,  soft- 
ness &c.,  of  this  piece  of  paper  are  destroyed  ; 
but  we  cannot  imagine  that  the  portion  of  space 
it  occupies  is  destroyed.  The  existence  of  the 
former  qualities  is  not  necessary  for  thought,  but 
the  existence  of  space  is  necessary  for  thought. 
But  it  must  be  seen  that  though  no  particular 
visual  or  tactual  sensation  is  necessary  for  space, 
it   can   be    perceived  or  imagined  only  as  a  con- 


SPACE    A   FORM    OF    PERCEPTION" 

dition  of  perceiving  such  qualities.  Otherwise — 
as  anything  unrelated  to  them — it  can  neither 
be  perceived  nor  imagined.  It  is  necessary  only 
as  conditioning  the  perception  of  the  qualities 
named.  Now,  two  conclusions  follow  from  the 
,above  discussion  : — ^(i)  Space  is  not  anything 
independent  of  consciousness.  A  reality  inde- 
pendent of  mind,  an  alien  to  mind,  cannot 
be  so  indissolubly  related  to  it  that  it  cannot 
perceive  certain  things  without  perceiving  it,  and 
cannot  even  conceive  its  non-existence.  Some- 
thing independent  of  consciousness  cannot  be 
indispensable  for  it  ;  it  must  be  such  that  consci- 
ousness may  or  may  not  apprehend  it.  But  space 
is  indispensable  to  perception — to  the  perception 
of  visual  and  tactual  sensations.  What  is  so 
closely,  so  indissolubly,  related  to  knowledge 
cannot  be  independent  of  it.  Besides,  of  that 
which  is  independent  of  consciousness,  which  is 
an  alien  to  consciousness,  even  though  it  be 
known,  nothing  absolutely  true  can  be  said,  for 
what  it  is  today  it  may  not  be  to-morrow  ;  what 
it  is  this  moment  may  be  changed  in  the  next. 
And  as  to  making  any  statement  in  anticipation 
of  actual  knowledge — that  is  quite  impossible 
in  regard  to  it.  But  in  regard  to  space  we 
possess   both     necessary     truths     and     anticipa- 


32  MIND  AXD  MATTER  CHAP. 

tions.  In  the  first  place,  it  is  absolutely  certain 
that  in  whatever  other  way  matter  may  be 
changed,  it  must  be  extended — extension  is 
necessary  for  matter.  Other  qualities  may  come 
and  go,  but  extension  must  remain  permanent. 
This  is  true  even  of  things  which  have  not  come 
within  the  sphere  of  our  individual  consciousness. 
It  is  sure  also  of  all  visual  and  tactual  sensations 
which  we  may  have  in  future  that  they  will  all 
be  conditioned  by  space.  In  the  second  place, 
we  know  that  the  three  dimensions, — length, 
breadth  and  depth, — which  space  as  perceived 
by  us  possesses,  must  be  possessed  also  by  the 
space  beyond  our  sphere  of  individual  knowledge. 
We  can  make  this  assertion  even  without  perceiv- 
ing that  space.  Now,  the  fact  is  that  it  is  only 
because  space  is  dependent  on  knowledge,  some- 
thing which  is  its  own,  that  it  can  make  these 
assertions  and  anticipations  regarding  its  nature. 
They  would  be  impossible  if  it  were  something 
independent  of  it.*  (2)  Though  space  is  depend- 
ent on  Imowledge,  it  is  not  an  object  by  itself,  but 

*  The  necessary  truths  of  Mathematics  all  imply  the 
dependence  of  space  on  mind.  They  would  not  be  neces- 
sary if  space  were  anything  independent  of  mind.  As  the 
subject  is  not  likely  to  be  intelligible  to  the  general 
reader,  we  avoid  a  lengthy  discussion  on  it. 


I  INFINITE    DIVISIBILITY    OF    SPACE  33 

only  a  necessary  form  of  perception,  for,  as  we 
have  already  seen,  it  can  be  perceived  or  imagined 
only  as  the  necessary  condition  of  sensations  and 
never  as  anything  independent  of  them.  Colour, 
touch  &c.,  are,  as  it  were,  the  matter  of  perception, 
•  but  as  these  sensations  cannot  be  perceived  with- 
out space,  as  the  mind  cannot  perceive  them  except 
as  in  space,  except  in  the  form  of  extension,  we 
have  called  it  a  necessary  form  of  perception.* 

We  do  not  know  how  far  the  reader  unfamiliar 
with  Philosophy  has  followed  the  above  exposi- 
tion. We  hope  that  what  has  seemed  abstruse 
and  unsatisfactory  at  the  first  reading,  will  seem 
clear  and  convincing  if  he  reads  it  with  close 
attention  a  nurnber  of  times.  However,  we  are 
going  to  explain  in  another  way  the  dependence 
of  space  on  mind,  and  hope  that  this  exposition 
will  appear  to  some  readers  more  intelligible  and 
convincing  than  what  has  just  been  given. 

Let  us  divide  the  piece  of  paper  before  us  into  a 
number  of  parts  with  real  or  imaginary  lines.  The 
portion  of  space  occupied  by   it  can  be  divided 


*  See  Kant's  Critique  of  Pure  Reason  :  Transcendental 
Aesthetic;  and  Prof.  E.  Caird's  Critical  Philosophy  of 
Kant,  Book  I.,  Chapter  II.  See  also  the  relative  sections 
of  Prof.  T.  H.  Green's  Introduction  to  Humes  Works  and 
pp.  228 — 251  of  the  second  volume  of  Green's  Works. 


34  MIND   AND    MATTER 

into  such  parts.     It  really  consists  of  such  parts. 
Space  is  essentially  divisible  into  infinite  parts — 
it  is  a  sum  of  such  parts.     However  small  space 
may  be,  it  must  have  parts.     No  space  can  be 
so  small  as  to  be  indivisible — to  have  no  parts. 
There    can    indeed  be  such   a  small   portion  of 
space  that  it  is  not  in  the  power  of  man  or  any 
other  creature  to  divide  it  any  more.     But  we  do 
not  speak  at  present  of  the  power  of  the  creature. 
What  a  created   being  cannot  divide  still    has 
parts.     The  nature  of  space  is  such  that  however 
small  it  may  be,  it  must  have  parts,  or  in  other 
words,    must    be    divisible.     Space    cannot     be 
indivisible    or    without     parts.     But    cannot    a 
portion  of  space  be  divided  into  parts  so  small 
that  they  are  mere    points  and   have  no  magni- 
tude ?  The   reply    is    that    such    points,    even    if 
imaginable,    would     not     really     be     parts     of 
space.     Real   parts    of   space,  parts  which  taken 
together  make  space,  must  have  magnitude.     Not 
even   millions   of    points   having   no   parts   and 
magnitude  could  make  real  space  having  magni- 
tude.    Space,    however   small    it   may  be,  must 
have  some  magnitude,  and  must  therefore  have 
infinite  parts — must  be  infinitely  divisible.     Now, 
let  us  think  of   the  relation   with  mind   of  the 
portion  of  space  we  have  taken  for  our  example 


1  ,  UNITING    FUiXCTION    OF    M!.\U  35 

and  of  its  parts,  which  are  all  external  to  and  yet 
connected  with  one  another.  The  reader  has 
understood  in  a  general  way  that  whatever 
appears  to  the  mind  as  its  object  is  essentially 
related  to  it — has  the  mind  as  its  support.  He 
» has  also  seen  in  a  general  way  that  extended 
objects,  though  they  are  external  to  one  another, 
are  all  within  the  sphere  of  knowledge  and 
depend  on  knowledge.  We  wish  now  to  show 
particularly  that  the  connection  subsisting  be- 
tween the  parts  of  this  portion  of  space — the 
connection  which  makes  its  existence  possible, 
has  consciousness  for  its  necessary  condition.  It 
is  by  the  unifying  power  of  the  understanding 
that  they  are  united.  The  connection  of  distinct 
objects  imply  something  which,  though  one  and 
indivisible,  is  in  all  of  them,  binding  them  together 
and  bringing  unity  into  their  discreteness.  There 
can  be  no  union  without  something  to  unite. 
What  is  that  uniting  principle  in  the  present  case  ? 
In  the  present,  and  in  all  such  cases,  that  uniting" 
principle  is  consciousness — the  conscious  self.  If 
consciousness  were  confined  to  some  one  of  these 
parts,  they  could  not  be  united,  and  in  the 
absence  of  union  the  space  in  question  would  be 
impossible.  The  conscious  self,  though  one  and 
indivisible,  is  in  each  of   them,   and  hence   their 


36  MIKD   AND    MATTER  CHAP, 

union.     It  is   their  common  support  and  unifier. 
We  do  not  mean  to  say  that  these  parts  were 
separate    before    and    consciousness     afterwards 
brought  them  together.     We  do  not  speak  of  that 
artificial    union    which    is    effected   by    bringing 
together  different   things   existing   independently 
of   one    another.     We    speak    of   that   union    or 
synthesis  which  is  the  very  nature  of  space,  with- 
out which  space  would  be  impossible.     This  piece 
of  paper  may  be  torn   into  pieces  unconnected 
with  one  another  ;  but  the  space  occupied  by  it 
cannot   be  so  divided.     Its  existence  consists  in 
the  synthesis  of   distinct    parts.     Each  of   these 
parts  again  consists  of  smaller  parts.    Space  means 
just  this  synthesis  of  infinite  parts,  and  it  is  of  this 
synthesis  that  we  speak.     This  synthesis  is  not 
an  event  in  time.     It  is  not  something  that  once 
was  not,  but  took  place  at  a  particular  time.     It 
is,  as  Prof.  T.  H.    Green  says,  "  a  timeless  act." 
If  any  one  objects  to  call  it  an  act,  we  may  call 
it  a  condition.     Whatever  it  may  be  called,  it   is 
doubtless  dependent  on  consciousness.     If  it  be 
called  an  act,  consciousness  is  its  necessary  cause. 
If  it  is  a  condition,   consciousness  is  its  necessary 
support  or  presupposition.     It  may  be  objected 
that  a  synthesis  of  distinct  objects  implies  that 
the  objects   themselves  are  essentially  disparate 


I  SPACE    AN    INFIXITE    SYNTHESIS  37 

and  can  exist  without  being  synthesised  and 
therefore  independently  of  a  synthesiser,  and  that 
an  object  which  has  its  origin  in  a  synthesis 
alone  depends  on  it.  When  space  is  said  to  be  a 
synthesis  of  distinct  parts,  is  it  not  admitted  that 
'  the  components  of  the  synthesis  are  independent 
of  consciousness  and  the  synthesis  alone  is  depend- 
ent on  it  ?  This  objection  has  in  a  manner  been 
already  answered.  It  doubtless  applies  to  a  mecha- 
nical synthesis.  The  agent  of  such  a  synthesis 
has  really  no  essential  relation  to  the  components 
of  the  synthesis.  In  such  a  case  the  objects  united 
may  exist  independently  of  one  another  and  there- 
fore independently  of  a  unifier.  But  this  does  not 
apply  to  space.  Space  is  something  the  very  exist- 
ence of  which  depends  on  synthesis.  It  is  an 
infinite  synthesis.  As  the  synthesis  of  the  parts  of 
a  particular  portion  of  space  depends  on  conscious- 
ness, so  each  part  depends  on  the  synthesis  of  its 
own  component  parts.  It  is  in  this  infinite  syn- 
thesis of  parts  that  space  consists.  It  is  not  that 
the  components  first  existed  unconnected,  and 
then  came  the  synthesis.  The  components  really 
have  no  existence  apart  from  the  synthesis  ;  with- 
out it  they  are  unthinkable  and  meaningless.* 

*  See  Green's  Pvolegomena  to  Ethics,  Book  I,  Chap.  I, 
Sees.  28,  29. 


38  MIND   AND    MATTER 

We  have  thus  shown  that  space,  the  form  in 
which  matter  is  perceived,  depends  on  conscious- 
ness. We  shall  now  show  that  the  matter  of 
perception — colour,  hardness,  smell  &c.,  which 
are  supposed  to  be  things  or  qualities  of  things 
independent  of  mind,  are  not  so,  but  are  also 
dependent  on  consciousness.  We  shall  show 
that  they  are  mental  states,  sensations  or  ideas. 
We  shall  show  that  they  are  what  the  English 
psychologists  call  '  feelings  '  or  '  sensations,'  and 
the  Buddhist  philosophers  vijndnas  (ideas). 
Sensations  are  things  dependent  on  consciousness, 
their  existence  being  impossible  without  conscious- 
ness. Before  we  enter  fully  into  the  discussion, 
let  us  discuss  a  little  the  relation  of  a  sensation 
to  the  mind.  Let  the  reader  imagine  that  he 
feels  a  pain.  A  pain  is  a  sensation.  Leaving 
aside  the  question  how,  under  what  circumstances, 
the  sensation  arises,  let  us  confine  ourselves  to 
thinking  of  its  relation  to  the  conscious  self,  which 
is  its  essential  condition  or  support.  We  see  on 
the  one  hand  that  there  is  a  sort  of  difference,  of 
duality,  between  the  pain  and  the  self.  The 
pain  is  not  the  self  nor  is  the  self  the  pain.  But 
on  the  other  hand,  the  pain  is  a  sensation  or  idea 
of  the  self  and  is  nothing  without  relation  to  it. 
When  its  relation  to  the  self  ceases,  it  ceases  too. 


1  RELATION    OF   FEELINGS   TO    CONSCIOUSNESS  39 

A  pain,  a  feeling,  which  a  mind  does  not  feel,  is 
an  absurdity,  a  nonsense.  Really  the  term 
'  feeling '  does  not  stand  for  a  distinct,  independ- 
ent reality.  We  use  it  only  for  convenience' 
sake.  There  is  no  such  thing  as  '  a  mere  feeling,' 
the  concrete  reality  being  '  I  feel.'  '  A  feeling '  = 
'I  feel  once.'  'Two  feelings '  =  ' I  feel  twice.' 
'  A  series  of  feelings  '  = '  I  feel  continually.'  There 
is  therefore  no  reality  corresponding  to  the  term 
'  feeling  '  or  '  a  series  of  feelings,' — a  feeling  or 
series  of  feelings  being  nothing  apart  from  the 
conscious  self. 

We  shall  now  show  that  just  a^  a  pain  is  a 
sensation  or  idea  which  cannot  exist  independ- 
ently of  the  self,  so  colour,  touch,  smell  &c., 
which  we  call  qualities  of  matter,  are  also 
sensations  and  cannot  exist  independently  of  the 
conscious  self.  Let  us  first  take  up  colour. 
Colour  is  something  seen.  It  is  as  something 
seen  that  it  appears  to  the  mind,  and  even  when 
we  do  not  see  it,  we  can  think  of  it  only  as  seen 
by  some  person  or  other.  We  have  already  seen 
how  we  involve  ourselves  in  a  self-contradiction 
if  we  try  to  believe  that  what  we  know  only  as 
seen  and  can  think  of  only  as  such  can  exist 
unseen.  However,  we  shall  now  explain  at  some 
length  the  truth  that  colour  is  nothing  independ- 


40  MIND   AND    MATTER  CHAP. 

ent  of  consciousness,  that  it  is  only  a  sensation. 
One  circumstance  which  leads  people  to  think 
that  it  is  not  merely  a  sensation,  but  is  something 
independent  of  mind,  is  that  colour  appears  in 
association  with  space, — that  it  seems  to  be  one 
with  space,  to  be  an  extended  thing.  That  an 
extended  object  should  be  a  mere  sensation, 
seems  absurd.  But  we  have  shown  that  space  is 
not  one  with  colour — that  it  is  independent  of 
colour.  It  has  also  been  shown  that  space, 
though  it  is  not  a  sensation,  is  yet  not  anything 
independent  of  mind, — that  it  is  a  form  of  per- 
ception— a  form  of  perceiving  visual  and  tactual 
sensations.  Therefore,  the  doubt  about  the 
dependence  of  colour  on  mind  which  arises  from 
the  fact  of  its  association  with  space  is  ground- 
less. Colour  is  what  we  see,  what  we  feel  with 
our  visual  organ.  But  that  what  is  seen  exists 
independently  of  sight  is  absurd.  To  the  blind, 
colour  is  nothing.  There  would  be  no  such 
thing  as  colour  if  there  were  no  seer  and  no 
power  of  seeing. 

Another  cause  that  prevents  people  from 
seeing  that  colour  is  a  sensation,  is  this :  To 
people  not  accustomed  to  philosophical  reflec- 
tion it  seems  as  if  the  same  visual  form  can  be 
and  becomes  visible  to  different   persons.     Sensa- 


1  ILLUSIONS    REGARDING    VISION  4I 

tion  is  an  individual  affair :  every  one  directly 
perceives  only  his  own  sensation ;  the  same 
sensation  cannot  be  perceived  by  more  than  one 
person.  Your  pain  can  be  felt  only  by  you ; 
I  can  only  indirectly  take  notice  of  it ;  it  is 
'  impossible  for  me  to  feel  it.  What  I  feel  is 
only  my  own  pain.  When,  therefore,  the  same 
visual  form  can  be  perceived  at  the  same  time 
by  many  persons,  how  can  it  be  called  a  mere 
sensation,  a  mere  mental  state  ?  This  argument 
works  in  people's  mind.  Really,  however,  it  is 
not  a  fact  that  the  same  visual  form  is  seen  by 
many  persons.  Every  seer  really  has  a  distinct 
form  presented  to  him,  there  being  as  many 
forms  or  images  as  seers.  The  forms  are  indeed 
similar  to  one  another,  but  they  are  not  numeri- 
cally identical.  Nay,  we  really  have  two  distinct 
but  similar  images  presented  to  our  two  eyes — 
images  which  coalesce  in  actual  vision.  We 
shall  show  the  truth  of  our  statement  by  one 
or  two  examples.  Let  the  reader  look  at  an 
object,  say  a  book  before  him,  in  the  company 
of  a  friend.  It  seems  to  you  that  both  of  you 
see  the  same  form,  but  you  will  soon  find  out 
the  mistake  of  thinking  so.  Let  one  of  you  shut 
one  of  his  eyes  and  look  at  the  object  with  only 
the  other  eye.     Then  let  him,  with  a   finger   put 


42  MIND   AND    MATTER  CHAP. 

on   the    lower   lid   of  the  eye,  move  the  eye-ball. 
He   will   see    that    the    form   seen   by   him   will 
move   with    the    eye   while    the  form  seen  by  his 
friend  will   remain    unmoved.     The    reader   will 
now   see    whether  the  forms  seen  by  him  and  his 
friend  are  identical  or  not.     He    will   further   see 
that    when    the    eye  is  unmoved,  the  form  seen  is 
also  unmoved,  and  when  the  eye  moves,  the  form 
also  moves.     This    will    show    him    whether    the 
form   seen   is    anything    independent    of  sight  or 
only  an  image    depending"    upon    it.     The   proof 
that   we    see  two  coalescing  images  with  the  two 
eyes,  the  reader  may  find  ready  at  hand.     In    the 
natural     state     the    two    eyes    are    in    the    same 
straight  line   with    each    other.     Let    the    reader 
somewhat     disturb     this     natural    condition    as 
before  by  a  finger   put   on    one    of    the    eye-lids. 
Let   him   somewhat    lift    up    or  bring  down  one 
of  his  eye-balls,  and    he    will    find    that   he    sees 
two    images  with  the  two  eyes.     The  reader  who 
thinks   that    the    forms   seen  by  us  are  things  in- 
dependent of  sight,    may   now    be    asked    to    say 
which    of    these   two  distinct  forms  seen  with  the 
two  eyes  is  the  real  thing  and    which    is    a    mere 
shadow,    and    also    whence    the    shadow    comes. 
If  he  says  that  the  form  seen  with    the    unmoved 
eye   is   the   real   thing,    he   will    see,  on  moving 


[  VISIBLE    AND    TANGIBLE    OBJECTS    DISTINCT  43 

that  eye,  that  the  form  seen  by  it  has  also  begun 
to  move.  If  both  the  ej^es  are  moved  simul- 
taneously, both  the  forms  will  move.  The  fact 
is  that  there  can  be  no  question  in  the  case 
which  is  the  real  thing  and  which  the  unreal. 
What  we  see  is  real  to  the  eye,  and  to  the  eye 
alone.  Whatever  things  are  seen  are  of  the 
same  nature,  whether  you  call  them  realities  or 
forms,  images  or  representations.  What  we  see 
is  only  an  image  dependent  on  sight  and  is 
therefore  liable  to  change  with  the  change  of 
the  visual  organ  and  the  conditions  of  vision. 
What  we  see  is  real  to  sight,  to  the  eye,  but  not 
to  the  other  senses.  \Vhat  is  seen  is  only  seen  ; 
it  cannot  be  touched,  tasted  or  felt  in  any 
other  way. 

Another  cause  leading  to  errors  about  the 
object  of  vision  is  the  mistaken  notion  that  the 
objects  of  vision  and  touch  are  the  same, — that 
what  we  see  we  also  touch,  and  what  we  touch 
we  also  see.  The  same  thing  is  supposed  to  be 
the  object  of  touch  to  different  people  and  so  the 
same  form  of  the  thing  is  supposed  to  be  the 
object  of  vision  to  different  people.  Whether 
the  same  thing  can  be  the  object  of  touch  to 
different  people,  we  shall  see  by  and  by.  But  it 
is   certain    that   what    is    touched    can   only   be 


44  MIND    AND    MATTER 

touched  and  cannot  be  seen.  The  objects  of 
touch  are  heat,  cold,  smoothness,  roughness, 
softness,  hardness  and  so  forth.  The  objects  of 
sight  are  white,  yellow,  blue,  red  and  other 
colours.  Heat,  hardness,  roughness  &c.,  cannot 
be  objects  of  sight  ;  neither  can  white,  yellow, 
blue  &c.,  be  objects  of  touch.  The  objects  of 
sight  and  touch  are  indeed  connected  by  the  laws 
of  causation.  For  instance  the  colour  of  an 
orange  seen  before  may  indicate  the  proximity  of 
its  cold  touch  and  sweet  taste ;  but  objects  of 
sight  and  touch, — visual  and  tactual  sensations — 
are  quite  dijfferent  from  one  another. 

There  are  many  popular  errors  regarding 
visual  objects,  errors  which  prevent  people  from 
understanding  the  true  nature  of  these  objects. 
We  have,  however,  no  space  to  point  out  these 
errors  at  length.  We  shall  speak  only  of  two 
such  errors.  Those  who  wish  to  investigate  the 
matter  fully  will  better  read  some  large  work  on 
Psychology.  The  error  we  shall  first  point  out 
here  is  this  :  People  think  that  the  forms  seen  by 
them  can  exist  and  do  exist  at  a  distance  from 
their  eyes, — that  distance  is  an  object  of  direct 
vision.  But  it  is  not  really  so.  What  each  one 
of  us  sees  is  only  a  picture  on  our  retina.  That 
a  form  seen  seems  to  be  at  a  distance  is  the  result 


DISTANXE    IKVISIBLE  45 

of    experience     and    association.     To    a   person 
without  visual  experience  all  forms  seen  appear  to 
be    immediately    close     to    his    eyes.     Scientific 
experiment   has   proved    that    when  a  man  born 
blind   regains   his   eye -sight    through    a  surgical 
operation,  everything  he  sees  seems    to  be  touch- 
ing his  eyes.     Perhaps  the  first  visual  impressions 
of   children    are    similar  to  this,  as  appears  from 
their   stretching    their   hands    to  get  hold  of    the 
moon.       It    is    easy    to    understand   why    it    is 
impossible  for  us  to  see   distance.     Distance  is  a 
straight    line    extending    forward    in    the    same 
straight  line  with  the  eye.     That  it  is  impossible 
to   see    the    length  of   such    a    straight    line,  the 
reader   can  easily    understand  by  holding  a  stick 
before   him    in    the  same  way.     It  is  only  one  of 
the  ends  of  such  a  line — namely  that  one  which  is 
in    touch    with    the    eye — that  we  can  see.     It  is 
therefore  impossible  for  us  to  see    distance  in  the 
line  of   sight    and    consequently  a   distant  form. 
We  often  find  that  to  touch    the   tangible    object 
causally  connected  with  the    image  seen  by  us— 
for  instance  the  tangible  pillar  before  me  indicat- 
ed by  the  pillar-image  seen  by    me — we   have  to 
go    to   some    distance,  more  or  less,  and  that  the 
colour  and  size  of  the  image  seen  vary  according 
to    the    amount    of    this    distance.     From    this 


46  MIND   AND    MATTER  CHAP. 

variation  and  by  other  means  we  acquire  a 
knowledge  of  the  distance  of  the  tangible  object. 
By  constant  habit  this  mediate  knowledge 
acquired  from  experience  comes  to  be  thought  of 
as  immediate  and  intuitive  knowledge.  How- 
ever, what  we  know  to  be  distant  is  not  visible, 
but  only  tangible.  What  we  see  is  not  distant, 
but  in  touch  with  the  eye — in  fact  in  the  retina. 

Another  popular  error  relating  to  vision  is 
that  we  see  very  large  objects  by  mere  sight. 
The  fact  is  that  each  time,  by  each  glance,  we 
see  only  a  very  small  object — something  not  larger 
than  the  eye.  This  will  be  somewhat  evident 
from  what  we  have  said  above.  Since  what  we 
see  is  nothing  but  an  image  in  the  retina,  how 
can  it  be  larger  than  the  eye  ?  We  cannot  see 
anything  larger  than  the  organ  of  sight.  How- 
ever, we  shall  prove  this  truth  in  another  way. 
Let  the  reader  roll  the  fingers  of  his  hand  into 
something  like  a  pipe,  and  holding  it  before  one 
of  his  eyes,  look  at  some  object.  If  he  attends 
■only  to  the  object  seen  and  not  to  the  circum- 
ference of  the  improvised  pipe,  the  form  seen  will 
appear  much  larger  than  the  latter ;  but  if  he  at- 
tends to  both,  he  will  find  that  the  image  seen  is 
confined  within  the  circumference  of  the  pipe,  so 
that   the   former   is   not   larger   than   the  latter. 


I  COLOUR    CHANGES    BY   CHANGE    OF   VISION  47 

From  this  we  understand  that  what  we  see  at  one 
sight  is  a  very  small  object.  That  it  appears 
larger  is  the  result  of  experience.  By  habit  the 
knowledge  acquired  from  experience  appears  to 
be  intuitive.  We  have  learnt  by  long  experience 
that  the  object  causally  related  to  the  image  seen 
by  us, — for  instance  the  real  or  tangible  house 
indicated  by  the  image-house  seen  by  us — is  a  very 
large  object,  so  that  by  constant  association  the 
idea  of  the  image  at  once  suggests  the  idea  of  the 
large  tangible  object,  and  we  mistake  this  sug- 
gestion as  immediate  knowledge  or  common  sense. 
We  hope  that  a  consideration  of  such  facts  will 
somewhat  moderate  the  enthusiasm  of  some  of 
our  readers  about  'common  sense,'  which,  in  many 
cases,  is  only  another  name  for  nonsense. 

In  the  above  discussion  on  colour,  we  did  not 
confine  ourselves  to  mere  colour, — the  extension 
implied  in  colour  having  inextricably  been  mixed 
up  with  with  our  treatment  of  it.  But  this  did 
not  effect  the  validity  of  our  conclusions.  We 
shall,  however,  now  say  a  few  words  on  colour 
only,  so  far  as  it  is  possible.  If  colour  were  any- 
thing independent  of  sight,  it  would  surely  not  be 
changed  with  changes  in  the  seer  or  the  way  or 
instrument  of  sight.  What  is  independent  of 
knowledge  and  of  the  knov/er  cannot  be  changed 


iMIND    AND    MATTER  CHAP. 

with    him    or    the  medium  of  his  knowledge.     If 
the    object    known    changes    with     every     such 
change,  it  at  once  shows  itself    to    be    dependent 
on    knowledge — to  be  nothing  but  a  sensation  of 
the  knower.     We  are  going  to  show  that   colour, 
smell,  taste,  sound  and    touch    are    all    liable    to 
change  with  such  changes.     The  colour   that    we 
see   in   an   object    when   we    look  at  it  with  our 
bare  eyes,    is   changed  when    it    is   seen   with   a 
telescope.     The  colour  seen  from  a  distance  varies 
on  near  vision.     Brilliant  light  shows  one    colour 
and  faint  light  another.     A  keen  and  a  dull  sight 
see    different    colours.     What     seems    white    to 
healthy   eyes  appears   yellowish  to  those  affected 
with  jaundice.     Now,  which  of  these  two  sets   of 
colours   is  real  ?  Which  one  of  them  is  independ- 
ent of  sight  and  which    is    unreal — only    relative 
to  the  eye  ?     And  what   sort    of   a    thing   is   the 
unreal    colour  ?     W^hence    does    it     come  ?     The 
reader  will   see    that    the    essential   character   of 
both  is  the  same — being   seen    or   known.     Both 
of  them  being  objects  of  knowlege,   one    of   them 
cannot   be   pronounced    to   be  merely  relative  to 
knowledge  with  any  reason  not  applicable  to  the 
other.     The  difference  lies  only  in  the  medium  of 
sight ;  but     this     difference    cannot     make     one 
dependent  on  sight  and  another   independent   of 


SMELL   A    SENSATION  49 

it.  When  change  in  the  medium  of  sight  changes 
the  object  seen,  it  is  proved  that  the  latter  is  not 
independent  of  sight,  independent  of  knowledge, 
but  that  it  is  only  a  sensation  of  the  seer.* 

We  have  given  so  much  space  to  the  discussion 
of  colour  because  it  seems  to  be  particularly 
difificult  for  a  reader  unfamiliar  with  Metaphysics 
to  understand  that  it  is  only  a  sensation  and 
nothing  independent  of  knowledge.  As  to  the 
other  so  called  qualities  of  matter, — smell,  taste, 
sound  and  touch — it  is  not  so  very  difficult  to 
understand  that  they  are  only  sensations.  Of 
these,  it  is  comparatively  more  difficult  to  under- 
stand the  dependence  of  touch  on  knowledge. 
After  discussing  smell,  taste  and  sound  briefly, 
we  shall  at  the  end  treat  of  touch  at  some 
length. 

Smell. — Before  we  feel  smell,  particles  of  the 
smelling  object  must  enter  our  nostrils  and 
produce  a  certain  action  on  the  olfactory  nerves, 
and  that  action  must  be  carried  to  the  brain. 
From  this  the  reader  will  see  that  the  object  of 
smelling  cannot  be  the  same  to  all,  though  it  may 
be  similar, — that  each  one    of   us    has    a    similar 

*  See  Locke's  Essay  on  the  Human  Understanding,  Book 
II,  Chaps.  IV — VIII,  and  Berkeley's  Dialogues  between 
Hylas  and  Philonus. 


50  MIND    AND    MATTER 

though  distinct  smell.  He  will  also  see  that  it 
is  most  absurd  to  suppose  that  what  we  smell 
existed  or  can  exist  unsmelt.  Apart  from  the 
smeller  and  the  power  of  smelling,  smell  is 
nothing.  That  smell  can  exist  unsmelt,  is  a 
meaningless  proposition.  It  can  only  be  said  that 
even  when  smell  is  not  felt,  the  cause  of  smell 
remains,  just  as  even  in  the  absence  of  a  pain  its 
cause  may  remain.  By  and  by  it  will  be  seen 
that  even  what  is  called  the  cause  of  smell  is 
something  dependent  on  consciousness.  Then, 
as  colour  changes  with  change  in  the  seer  and 
the  medium  of  sight,  so  smell  too  is  changed 
with  change  in  the  smeller  and  the  medium  of 
smelling.  Every  one  knows  that  what  smells 
most  foul  and  unpleasant  to  us  is  eaten  with 
relish  by  some  animals.  Not  only  between  man 
and  the  lower  animals,  but  even  between  man  and 
man,  there  is  much  difference  in  this  respect. 
What  the  gentler  classes  shun  as  hateful  smell,  is 
most  acceptable  to  some  people  of  the  lower 
classes.  Many  of  our  readers  perhaps  know  the 
story  of  the  fish-woman  who,  having  become  a 
guest  one  night  in  a  flower- woman's  house,  could 
not  sleep  on  account  of  the  perfume  of  the 
flowers,  and  who  had  at  last  to  try  to  get  sleep 
by   soaking   her    dried  up   fish-basket   in   water 


TASTE    AND   SOUND 


51 


and  taking  in  its  'sweet  smell.'  If  smell  were 
anything  independent  of  consciousness,  the  same 
object  would  not  smell  differently  to  different 
beings.  That  it  does  so,  proves  that  smell  is 
only  a  sensation  differing  according  to  different 
conditions. 

Taste. — Every  word  of  what  has  been  said  of 
smell  applies  to  taste.  The  taste  felt  by  one 
person  cannot  be  the  object  of  another's  taste. 
The  object  of  different  persons'  taste  may  be 
similar,  but  not  the  same.  Even  similarity  is 
not  found  everywhere.  What  is  agreeable  to 
my  taste  is  disagreeable  to  another.  What  is 
sweet  in  good  health  is  bitter  in  ill-health. 
Taste  also  then  differs  according  to  different 
temperaments  and  other  conditions.  Who  will 
say  then  that  it  is  anything  independent  of 
feeling  ? 

Sound. — The  sound  heard  by  different  hearers 
may  be  similar,  but  cannot  be  numerically  the 
same.  W^e  do  not  hear  until  an  aerial  undu- 
lation strikes  against  the  trumpet  of  our  ears  and 
the  nervous  shock  produced  by  it  is  communicated 
to  the  brain.  The  aerial  undulation  and  the 
nervous  shock  are  not  objects  of  hearing ;  they 
therefore  are  not  sound  ;  sound  is  the  sensation 
produced  by  them.     The  sound  heard  by  different 


52  MIND   AND    MATTER 

persons  may  be  similar,  but  cannot  be  the  same, 
and  like  smell  and  taste  it  differs  according  to 
different  conditions.  What  is  a  loud  sound  to 
me  is  a  low  one  to  a  person  half-deaf.  One 
standing  near  a  cannon  and  hearing  a  loud  sound 
thinks  that  the  low  sound  I  hear  from  a  distance 
is  only  a  faint  form  of  the  same  sound  that  he 
hears.  Is  it  so  ?  How  can  loud  and  low  be 
descriptions  of  the  same  thing?  Can  a  large 
mango-tree  and  a  small  one  be  the  same  ?  The 
fact  is  that  what  he  has  heard  has  not  been 
heard  by  me, — that  we  have  experienced  two 
different  but  somewhat  similar  sensations.  The 
identity  lies  only  in  their  cause,  which  we  shall 
discuss  later  on. 

Touch. — By  touch  we  experience  two  kinds 
of  objects, — (i)  what  can  be  known  by  simple 
touch,  and  (2)  what  we  know  by  pressure  com- 
bined with  touch.  Heat,  cold  and  the  state 
intermediate  to  these  two  belong  to  the  first 
class,  and  roughness,  smoothness,  hardness,  soft- 
ness and  resistance  to  the  second.  That  the 
first-mentioned  qualities  are  mere  sensations  and 
different  to  different  minds,  the  reader  will  have 
no  difficulty  in  understanding.  The  coldness  I 
experience  in  touching  the  table  before  me  is  my 
sensation,  and  what  the  reader  does  in   the   same 


TACTUAL    SENSATIONS  53 

manner   is   his.     Our   sensations  may  be  similar, 
but  cannot  be  numerically  the   same.     What   has 
been   said    about   coldness   applies   also    to  heat 
and   warmth.     The    heat   felt   by  me  on  account 
of   my    nearness    to     a     fire — is    it    in     me     or 
out    of   me  ?  The    reader   will   perhaps   say  that 
heat,    being    an    etherial   vibration,     cannot     be 
in    me.     But    is    the    etherial  vibration  an  object 
of  direct  experience  ?  The  fact  is  that  the  etherial 
vibration  which  scientists  call   heat    is    only    the 
inferred   cause    of   the  heat  or  warmth  felt  by  us, 
and  is  not  the  object   of   our   present   discussion. 
About    this   it  would  now  suffice  to  say  that  this 
vibration  is  conceived  in  the  form  of   things   seen 
and    touched.     If   we  can  show  that  what  we  see 
and  touch  is  dependent  on  consciousness,  it   must 
then    be    admitted    that    this  inferred  vibration  is 
also    similarly    conditioned.      Though    not     ex- 
perienced  by   us  on  account  of  the  limitations  of 
our  mental  powers,  it  must    undoubtedly   be    the 
object    of   some    higher   consciousness.     Either  it 
is  that,  or  it  is  merely  an  imaginary    and   not   a 
real   object.*     The   subject    of   our  present   dis- 

*  The  same  remark  appHes  to  light,  the  etherial 
vibration  which  scientists  conceive  as  the  cause  of  colour. 
Either  it  is  something  dependent  on  experience  or  it  is 
nothing. 


54  MIND  AND  MATTER  CHAP. 

cussion  is  the  warmth  or  heat  we  feel.  Unless 
the  etherial  vibration  spoken  of  above  is  com- 
municated to  our  nerves,  we  do  not  feel  this 
warmth  or  heat.  The  heat  or  warmth  thus 
produced  is  evidently  a  sensation  and  different  to 
different  persons.  The  heat  felt  by  two  or  more 
persons  may  be  similar,  but  cannot  be  the  same. 
And  even  the  similarity  is  not  constant.  What 
is  cold  to  one  person  may  be  warm  to  another 
differently  conditioned.  Nay,  even  if  the  same 
person  has  one  of  his  hands  warm  and  the  other 
cold,  the  same  object  will  seem  cold  when  touched 
with  the  warm  hand,  and  warm  when  touched 
with  the  cold  hand.  If  the  object  of  feeling  were 
the  same  and  independent  of  feeling,  this  would 
not  be  the  case.  The  fact  is  that  the  mind, 
under  varying  conditions,  experiences  various 
sensations.  What  is  experienced  is  dependent  on 
experience  and  not  anything  independent  of  it. 

The  reader  will  see  that  as  in  the  case  of 
sight  it  is  only  an  object  in  contact  with  our  eyes 
that  we  see,  and  what  we  see  is  not  larger  than 
the  organ  of  sight,  so  in  the  case  of  touch  it  is 
only  something  in  contact  with  our  body  that 
we  can  touch,  and  that  what  we  touch,  that  is 
the  extension  that  we  perceive  along  with  our 
feeling    of   touch,    is  not  larger  than  the  part  of 


MUSCULAR    SENSATIONS  55 

the  body  used  in  touching.  For  instance,  what 
we  touch  with  the  hand  is  not  larger  than  the 
hand,  and  what  we  touch  with  the  foot  is  not 
larger  than  the  foot.  But  if  we  continue  to  have 
tactual  feelings  while  moving  the  limb  where- 
with we  touch,  we  learn  that  the  object  touched, 
— that  is  the  extension  perceived  along  with 
the  tactual  feelings, — is  larger  than  the  limb 
used  in  touching.  But  we  have  already  seen  that 
the  extension  or  space  thus  perceived  is  also  an 
object  dependent  on  experience. 

We  shall  now  discuss  the  tactual  sensations 
of  the  second  class.  These  sensations  are  so 
different  from  tactual  sensations  of  the  first  class, 
that  they  are  called  tactual  only  for  convenience' 
sake.  They  are  closely  connected  with  tactual 
sensations,  and  cannot  be  experienced  without  the 
latter,  but  they  are  not  themselves  tactual  sensa- 
tions. The  sensation  that  we  experience  in 
moving  our  hands  over  a  rough  place  or  when 
the  motion  of  our  hands  is  stopped  on  their 
coming  into  contact  with  a  wall  or  a  table,  or 
when  we  press  a  table  with  one  of  our  limbs,  in 
a  word,  when  the  motion  of  a  limb  is  opposed — 
is,  in  the  language  of  Psychology,  called  resist- 
ance or  muscular  sensation.  In  current  phraseo- 
logy   it    is   called,    in   some    cases,  roughness,  in 


56  MIND   AND    MATTER  CHAP. 

some  hardness.  Whether,  when  this  sensation 
occurs,  it  is  reasonable  to  infer  a  cause  of  it  in- 
dependent of  experience,  we  shall  discuss  later 
on.  Let  the  reader  first  try  to  understand  that 
the  direct  object  of  our  experience  in  such  a  case 
is  only  a  sensation.  If  he  takes  into  considera- 
tion the  fact  that  this  object  appears  to  every  one 
separately  through  the  instrumentality  of  his  own 
muscles,  and  differs  according  to  differences  of 
body  and  mind,  he  will  see  at  once  that  it  is  not 
anything  independent  of  experience,  but  only  a 
sensation  dependent  on  consciousness.  That 
something  is  hard,  means  that  its  contact  gives 
rise  to  a  great  deal  of  muscular  sensation.  The 
"something"  spoken  of  is  itself,  it  will  be  seen  on 
examination,  nothing  independent  of  conscious- 
ness, but  is  really  dependent  on  it — constituted 
by  extension,  tactual  sensations  and  such  other 
properties  as  can  exist  only  in  relation  to  experi- 
ence. However,  this  muscular  sensation  too, 
like  other  sensations,  differs  according  to  different 
conditions.  What  is  hard  to  an  infant  is  soft  to 
a  grown-up  boy  and  softer  to  a  youngman. 
What  is  hard  to  the  weak  is  soft  to  the  strong 
and  vice  versa.  The  seat,  bed  or  clothing  which 
the  rich  and  the  luxurious  reject  as  rough,  is 
smooth   and   acceptable    to    the    poor.      These 


1  END   OF   THE    DISCUSSION  57 

objects  of  sense  are  evidently  relative  to  con- 
sciousness and  different  to  differently  constituted 
persons.  What  is  common  and  invariable  in 
them  is  due  to  the  general  similarity  in  the 
physical  and  mental  constitution  of  men.  As 
this  similarity  is  not  perfect,  so  their  sensations 
also  are  not  perfectly  similar.  However,  if  hard- 
ness, softness  and  the  like  are  various  according 
to  individual  variations,  where  is  their  independ- 
ence ?  Like  other  qualities  of  matter  (as  they  are 
called)  they  too  are  mere  sensations  dependent 
on  consciousness  and  are  nothing  apart  from  it. 

Here  ends  our  discussion  of  the  so-called 
qualities  of  matter.  The  reader  sees  that  what 
people  regard  as  properties  independent  of  mind 
are  really  sensations  dependent  on  consciousness. 
In  perceiving  what  we  call  the  material  world, 
therefore,  we  do  not  really  go  out  of  the  mind, 
out  of  the  spiritual  world,  but  know  only  spirit 
and  objects  related  to  it.  But  this  conclusion 
will  not  be  quite  clear  till  we  have  discussed 
certain  questions  which  we  have  reserved  for 
another  section. 


REFUTATION  OF  NATURALISM  CHAP. 


Section  3 — Refutation  of  Naturalism 
Those  of  my  readers  who  are  unacquainted 
with  philosophical  literature  will  perhaps  be 
quite  satisfied  with  the  above  exposition  and  will 
see  the  error  of  the  popular  belief  that  matter  is 
independent  of  mind.  But  perhaps  those  who 
have  studied  Philosophy  more  or  less  are  not  yet 
quite  free  from  doubts.  They  have  heard  from  a 
class  of  philosophers, — and  have  perhaps  believed 
what  they  have  heard — that  besides  what  is 
popularly  called  matter,  there  is  a  matter  which 
is  not  perceived,  but  which  nevertheless  exists. 
As  that  matter  is  not  an  object  of  perception,  the 
arguments  adduced  in  favour  of  the  relativity 
(dependence  on  mind)  of  the  matter  that  we 
perceive,  are  not  sufficient  to  disprove  the  inde- 
pendence of  the  former.  For  the  sake  of  those  of 
our  readers  who  accept  this  philosophical 
doctrine,  we  proceed  to  a  brief  exposition  and 
refutation  of  it.  The  philosophers  referred  to 
teach  that  though  what  we  call  the  qualities  of 
matter  are  really  mere  sensations,  there  is  an 
unconscious  object  beyond  the  sphere  of  direct 
perception  which  is  their  substance  and  cause. 
This  doctrine  is  called  Naturalism.  Those  who 
hold  it  think  that  unless  matter  is  believed  to  be 
independent    of   mind,    its  reality  is  not  acknow- 


I  MATTER    AS    SUBSTANCE    AND    CAUSE  59 

ledged.  As  they  acknowledge  the  independence 
of  matter,  and  in  this  sense  its  reality,  they  call 
themselves  Realists.  As  holding  the  duality 
or  mutual  independence  of  matter  and  mind, 
they  are  also  called  Dualists.  This  philoso- 
phical Naturalism  is — as  the  reader  must  see — 
very  different  from  popular  Naturalism,  which 
takes  sensible  qualities  as  independent  of  mind. 
However,  we  shall  show  the  error  of  this  philoso- 
phical doctrine  and  make  way  for  Idealism,  the 
doctrine  we  are  seeking  to  establish. 

As  to  the  matter  conceived  by  Naturalists 
being  the  substance  of  what  we  call  material 
qualities,  it  is  perhaps  enough  to  say  that  since 
these  qualities  are  acknowledged  as  sensations,  it 
is  extremely  absurd  to  imagine  an  unconscious 
object  as  their  substance  or  support.  Mind  alone 
can  be  the  support  of  sensations  or  feelings. 
Matter,  which  is  conceived  as  without  conscious- 
ness, can  never  be  the  substance  or  support  of 
objects  depending  on  consciousness.  In  fact  the 
idea  of  a  material  or  unconscious  substance  is 
suggested  only  when  colour,  sound  &c.,  are 
thought  of  as  the  qualities  of  an  external  object. 
But  we  have  already  seen  that  these  are  not  such 
qualities,  but  only  sensations  in  the  mind. 

Let    us    now    see    if   this    '  matter '    can    be 


6o  REFUTATION  OF  NATURALISM  CHAP. 

accepted  as  a  cause  of  sensations.  We  shall  give 
a  little  more  detailed  exposition  of  Naturalism 
before  we  proceed  to  its  examination.  Let  us 
take  the  table  before  us  as  our  example.  The 
table  is  endowed  with  the  qualities  of  extension, 
colour,  smoothness,  hardness  &c.  We  have  seen 
that  the  latter  are  all  sensations,  that  extension 
or  space  is  a  form  of  perception,  and  that  all 
these  depend  upon  consciousness.  Modem  Natu- 
ralists admit  all  this,  but  they  say  that  each  of 
these  objects  of  perception  has  an  unperceived 
cause  behind  it,  that  these  causes  are  the  real 
qualities  or  constituents  of  matter  and  the  sum  of 
these  qualities  or  constituents  is  the  real  material 
substance.  That  is  to  say,  though  the  extension 
we  perceive  by  our  senses  of  vision  and  touch  is 
a  mere  appearance  and  depends  on  consciousness, 
there  is  an  unperceived  extension  which  is  its 
cause.  Similarly,  there  is  an  unperceived  or 
unseen  colour  which  is  the  cause  of  the  colour 
we  see,  an  unfelt  hardness  which  causes  the  hard- 
ness we  feel,  and  a  super-sensuous  material  sub- 
stance which  is  the  sum  of  these  properties.  We 
already  begin  to  see  what  an  absurd  doctrine 
Naturalism  is.  Can  the  reader  form  any  idea  of 
such  things  as  an  unperceived  extension,  an 
unseen   colour,   and  an  unfelt  hardness  ?     And  it 


I  UNKNOWABLENESS   OF   MATTER  6l 

may  be  asked,  If  these  material  qualities  are 
beyond  sense,  where  lies  their  difference  ?  Why 
do  they  bear  different  names  ?  Colour  is  seen, 
but  not  smelt.  Hardness  is  felt,  not  seen.  So 
colour  and  hardness  are  distinct  things  or  facts. 
But  where  is  the  distinction  between  the  colour 
which  is  not  seen  and  the  hardness  which  is  not 
felt  ?  And  why  should  such  colour  and  such 
hardness  be  called  by  different  names  ?  The 
difference  lies  only  in  their  effects  and  it  has 
reference  to  the  different  senses  of  the  mind  in 
relation  to  which  they  are  produced.  The  cause 
may  be  the  same,  as  different  actions  may  be 
done  by  the  same  personal  agent.  It  is  enough 
for  Naturalism,  therefore,  to  postulate  only  a 
single  material  cause  of  sensations,  and  this  cause 
may  be  said  to  be  endowed  with  various  qualities 
only  in  the  sense  that  it  is  capable  of  producing 
various  sensations.  That  this  cause  is  called 
matter,  should  not  lead  the  reader  to  think  that 
it  possesses  the  variety  of  colour,  smell,  touch 
&c.,  which  is  presented  by  the  matter  which 
forms  the  object  of  our  perception.  We  have 
shown  just  now  that  what  is  unperceived — 
unseen,  unfelt — cannot  possess  this  variety,  for 
this  variety  can  be  conceived  only  with  reference 
to    our   senses.     It    is   called    matter  only  in  the 


•62  REFUTATION    OF   NATURALISM  CHAP. 

sense  that  it  is  conceived  as  unconscious.  The 
only  thing,  therefore,  which  the  Naturalist  knows, 
or  rather  thinks  that  he  knows,  about  this 
material  cause,  is  that  it  is  on  the  one  hand 
unconscious  and  on  the  other  endowed  with 
power, — power  to  produce  sensations.  With  the 
exception  of  these  two  characteristics  nothing  is 
known,  nothing  can  be  known,  of  it.  In  other 
respects  it  is  unknowable.  It  is  from  this  unknow- 
ableness  of  the  material  cause  that  many  Natura- 
lists call  themselves  Agnostics.  We  need  hardly 
say  that  the  above  characterisation  of  matter  is 
not  imaginary,  but  is  approved  by  prominent 
Naturalists.* 

Now,  on  this  Naturalism  we  have  to  make 
the  following  remarks  : — 

I.  We  can  infer  only  that,  or  something 
similar  to  that,  which  we  have  known  by  direct 
knowledge.  What  we  have  seen,  heard,  felt  or 
known  by  self-consciousness,  or  something  similar 
to  that,  can,  when  absent  from  direct  knowledge, 

*  See  Spencer's  Principles  of  Psychology,  Part  VII 
(Vol.  II)  and  Green's  criticism  of  this  part  in  the  fust 
volume  of  his  works.  See  also  the  essay  on  "  Science, 
Nescience  and  Faith  "  in  Martineau's  Essays — Philosophical 
and  Theological  Vol.  1,  and  the  essay  on  "  Agnostic  Incon- 
sistency "  in  my  Roots  of  Faith. 


LIMITS    OF    IMAGINATION  63 

be  known  on  the  testimony  of  others  or  by  infer- 
ence. When  we  have  known  our  own  self  by 
self-consciousness,  we  can  conceive  other  selves 
or  know  them  by  inference,  though  they  are  not 
objects  of  direct  knowledge.  When  once  we 
have  perceived  colour,  taste,  smell,  sound,  touch, 
&c.,  they  may,  even  in  case  they  are  not  directly 
perceived,  be  conceived  as  objects  of  our  future 
perception  or  that  of  other  persons.  When 
scientists,  having  perceived  the  vibration  of  things 
seen  or  felt,  imagine  the  vibration  of  a  thing 
(ether)  so  subtle  that  it  is  neither  visible  nor 
tangible,  even  then  they  do  not  go  beyond  reason, 
for  this  inferred  vibration  is  conceived  in  the 
likeness  of  visible  or  tangible  vibration.  Though 
not  perceptible  to  our  gross  senses,  it  is  per- 
ceptible to  a  person  endowed  with  subtler  powers 
of  perception.  But  what  has  never  been  perceived 
and  never  can  be,  what,  by  its  very  nature, 
is  entirely  different  from  objects  of  direct  know- 
ledge, what  is  neither  a  knower  nor  anything 
known,  neither  a  subject  nor  an  object,  such  a 
thing  can  never  be  the  object  of  indirect  know- 
ledge or  inference,  and  the  existence  of  such  a 
thing,  therefore,  cannot  be  believed.  The  matter 
imagined  by  Naturalists  belongs  to  this  category, 
and   its    existence    therefore    is   quite    incredible. 


D4  REFUTATION"    OF    NATURALISM  CHAP, 

It  is  a  wonder  that  while  not  believing  in  gods, 
sprites,  giants  and  devils — things  whose  existence 
is  conceivable  though  not  provable,  and  while 
doubting  the  existence  even  of  the  Supreme  Spirit, 
men  yet  believe  in  this  metaphysical  devil.  Is  not 
such  a  belief  in  'the  wise,'  more  absurd  than  the 
most  baseless  superstitions  of  the  ignorant  ? 

2.  If  Naturalists  represented  their  un- 
knowable matter  as  quite  unknowable,  it  would 
be  difficult,  perhaps  impossible,  to  make 
people  believe  in  it.  But  instead  of  this  they 
pronounce  it,  in  the  same  breath,  to  be  both 
knowable  and  unknowable.  As  they  say,  it  is 
unknowable  and  at  the  same  time  the  cause  of 
sensations.  What  causes  sensations  has  evidently 
at  least  one  quality,  and  cannot  therefore  be  un- 
knowable. However,  that  a  cause  of  sensations 
is  necessary,  admits  of  no  doubt.  Every  effect 
must  have  a  cause,  and  as  the  rise  of  sensations 
is  an  effect,  it  must  undoubtedly  have  a  cause. 
And  the  cause  must  be  permanent.  Reason  is 
not  satisfied  without  a  permanent  cause  of 
impermanent  effects.  When,  therefore,  the  Natura- 
list refers  sensations  to  a  permanent  supersensuous 
cause,  he  readily  secures  people's  assent.  But  why 
go  far  in  search  of  a  cause  when  one  is  near  at 
hand  ?  Is  not  the  mind  itself  the  cause  of  sensations  ? 


I  SELF   THE    CAUSE    OF    SENSATIONS  65 

The  fact  to  be  explained  is  that  the  mind  or  self 
experiences  various  sensations.  Why  imagine 
a  not-self,  unknowable  and  inconceivable,  to 
explain  this  simple  fact?  The  conditions 
necessary  for  the  rise  of  sensations  are  (i)  a  sensi- 
tive or  feeling  self,  (2)  something  which  remains 
permanent  in  the  midst  of  sensuous  changes,  the 
succession  of  one  sensation  to  another,  and  (3) 
something  to  produce  the  sensation.  Now  are 
not  all  these  conditions  to  be  found  in  the  self? 
It  is  the  self  that  feels  sensations,  it  is  the  self 
that  remains  unchanged  as  an  witness  when  sensa- 
tions change  and  follow  one  another,  and  it  is 
the  self  that  produces  sensations, — becomes  sen- 
sient  by  its  own  activity.  It  is  the  idea  that  in 
sensation  the  self  is  purely  passive*  which  makes 
people  imagine  a  not-self  as  causing  sensations  in 
it.  But  such  an  idea — ^that  of  the  self's  passivity 
— is  purely  arbitrary,  and  the  result  of  a  false 
analogy — that  of  a  piece  of  wax  acted  on  by  a 
stamp  and  producing  impressions  on  it.  Such  an 
analogy  may  represent — but  even  that  only  imper- 
fectly,— the  action  of  a  material  body  on  the  body 
or  sense-organs,  but  is  quite  out  of  place  in 
representing  the    rise    of   sensations    in    the   self. 

*  An    idea   common   to    the    Indian   Sankhya  and  the 
Western  Dualist. 


66  REFUTATION  OF  NATURALISM  CHAP. 

Sensation   being   purely    mental — a  form  of  con- 
sciousness,— it  bears  no  impress,  and  furnishes   no 
proof,     of    anything   extramental — any   not-self. 
It  implies  only  the  self's  spontaneity  or  activity — 
its  capability  of  assuming  various  sensuous  forms. 
But   our  opponent   may    object,  'We  do  not  pro- 
duce sensations  by  our   will,    how    then    can   the 
self  be  said  to  be  the  cause  of  sensations  ?'     Does 
he    admit,    then,    that    causality    or  agency — the 
power    of   producing   changes — implies  will  ?     If 
he  admits  this,  his  Naturalism,    his   Agnosticism, 
is   gone.     If    the    cause    of  sensations  is  a  Being 
endowed  with  will,  he  is  neither  unknowable  nor 
unconscious  matter,  he  is  a  knowable  and  know- 
ing Person.     If  it  be  admitted    that   causality    or 
agency   does   not  imply  will,  why  not  ascribe  the 
causality  of  sensations  to  the   self   instead   of   an 
unknowable  and  inconceivable  not-self.    We  shall 
see    later   on    that   causality   does    indeed  imply 
will ;  but  we   do   not   mean    to    assert    that   our 
individual   volitions  are  the  causes  of  sensations. 
Evidently  it  is  not  our  individual  will  that  causes 
the  sensations  we  feel.     But  this  does   not   prove 
that  that  the  self  we  call  our  own  is  not  the  cause  of 
sensations.  Our  individual  volitions  do  not  exhaust 
our  selfhood.     There  are  many  things  in    the  self 
which    do    not    depend  upon  our  volitions.     The 


I  MATTER   EXPLAINS    NOTHING  67 

consciousness  that  forms  its  very  essence  is  not 
dependent  on,  but  is  rather  the  cause  of,  our  voli- 
tions. This  consciousness,  irrespectively  of  our 
personal  volitions,  manifests  itself  in  the  forms  of 
sensations,  memory,  understanding  and  emotions, 
and  thus  makes  our  individual  lives.  Leaving 
the  discussion  of  the  subject  in  greater  detail  for 
a  future  chapter,  we  would  this  moment  only 
ask  the  reader  to  realise  that  for  the  origination 
of  sensations  and  other  mental  facts  it  is  not 
necessary  to  imagine  an  extramental  cause,  a  not- 
self.  The  characteristics  required  by  the  Natu- 
ralist for  such  a  cause  are  all  to  be  found  in  the 
conscious  self  which  forms  the  basis  of  our  lives. 
He  wants  that  the  cause  of  sensations  should  be 
permanent  and  that  it  should  be  independent  of 
our  personal  volitions.  As  the  consciousness 
forming  the  basis  of  our  lives  possesses  both  these 
characteristics,  it  is  needless  to  refer  sensations 
to  an  unknowable  and  unconscious  something 
instead  of  referring  them  to  the  conscious  self. 

3.  Not  only  is  it  needless  to  imagine  such 
an  unconscious  power,  but  it  is  extremely  un- 
reasonable. This  imaginary  power  gives  no 
explanation  of  the  origination  of  sensations. 
That  only  is  a  real  cause  which  reasonably 
explains   the    effect.      What    cannot   explain    an 


68  REFUTATION'  OF  NATURALISM  CHAP.. 

ejffect  cannot  be  called  its  cause.  We  shall  try 
to  show  that  the  material  cause  supposed  by 
Naturalists  gives  no  explanation  of  sensations. 
Naturalism,  though  it  admits  that  sensations  are 
mental,  imagines  them  as,  in  a  manner,  distinct 
from  the  self,  and  therefore  tries  to  explain  their 
origin  by  something  other  than  the  self.  But 
we  have  already  seen  that  sensations  are  nothing 
apart  from  the  self.  Sensation  or  feeling  =  I  feel. 
It  is  nothing  apart  from  the  self.  There  is  no 
such  thing  as  a  'mere  feeling  or  sensation',  and 
therefore  there  cannot  be  any  cause  of  'mere 
feeling', — anything  that  explains  'mere  feeling.' 
That  alone  can  explain  feeling  which  can  explain 
the  self,  and  as,  according  to  Naturalists  them- 
selves, the  material  power  conceived  by  them  is 
incompetent  to  explain  the  self  (which  requires 
no  explanation),  it  is  incompetent  to  explain 
feeling,  and  can  therefore  never  be  the  cause  of 
feeling. 

4.  That  alone  can  explain  feeling  which  is 
closely  connected  with  mind.  That  alone  can 
produce  feeling  in  the  mind  which  is  either  in 
the  mind  or  in  which  the  mind  is — under  whose 
control  the  mind  is.  But  according  to  Natu- 
ralists themselves,  the  matter  conceived  by  them 
is   external    to    the    mind.     To   be  something  in 


3  DIFFERENT    MEANINGS    OF    'CAUSe'  69 

the  mind,  it  would  have  to  be  either  a  knowing 
subject  or  some  object  dependent  on  the  subject ; 
consequently  Naturalists  take  care  to  keep  it 
outside  the  mind.  But  nothing  can  be  more 
unreasonable  than  the  idea  that  what,  by  its 
very  nature,  exists  out  of  the  mind  should 
produce  feelings  in  it  from  outside, — should  make 
it  feel  various  sensations.  What  is  external 
should  be  incompetent  to  act  internally,  and 
what  acts  so  cannot  be  anything  external.  That 
an  absolutely  external  thing  should  act  inter- 
nally, is  a  palpable  self-contradiction.  That 
such  absurd  and  self-contradictory  propositions 
are  presented  as  philosophical  truths  and  received 
as  words  of  profound  wisdom,  is  apt  to  take 
away  one's  patience  and  lead  one  to  call  the 
teachers  of  such  doctrines  wise  in  their  own 
conceits,  'blind  leaders  of  the  blind.' 

5.  It  is  because  the  Naturalist  totally  forgets 
the  meaning  of  'cause"  that  he  ascribes  causality 
to  an  unknown  something.  It  is  a  relation 
between  known  things  that  we  call  causality. 
We  observe  the  relation  in  the  knowable  world. 
But  the  Naturalist,  having  learnt  causality  in 
the  world  of  knowable  things,  gradually  forgets 
its  meaning  and  gives  the  name  to  a  fancied 
relation   between  known  things  on  the  one  hand 


70  REFUTATION  OF  NATURALISM  CHAP. 

and  something  unknowable  on  the  other.  Let  us 
explain  this  fully.  The  scientific  meaning  of 
'  cause '  is  what  the  effect  invariably  follows,  or 
more  briefly,  (though  somewhat  incorrectly),  an 
invariable  antecedent.  Contact  with  fire  is 
invariably  followed  by  burning  ;  it  is  therefore 
the  scientific  cause  of  burning.  The  contact  of 
the  organ  of  vision  with  light  is  invariably 
followed  by  the  sensation  of  colour  ;  light  there- 
fore is  the  cause  of  the  sensation  of  colour.  The 
contact  of  the  organ  of  touch  with  the  etherial 
vibration  called  heat  is  invariably  followed  by 
the  sensation  of  warmth  ;  heat  therefore  is  the 
cause  of  the  sensation  of  warmth.  The  contact 
of  the  organ  of  smell  with  particles  of  flow^er- 
pollen  and  other  things  is  invariably  followed  by 
the  sensation  of  smell ;  such  particles  therefore 
are  the  cause  of  smell.  The  combination  of 
oxygen  and  hydrogen  is  invariably  followed  by 
the  production  of  water  ;  such  combination 
therefore  is  the  cause  of  water.  This  is  one 
meaning  of  'cause'.  According  to  this  scientific 
theory  of  causation,  the  cause  of  an  effect  is  itself 
an  effect.  An  effect  or  number  of  effects  is  the 
cause  of  another  effect,  and  all  such  effects  are 
sensations.  We  do  not  know  and  cannot  con- 
ceive of  any  effect  or  event  which  is  not  a  sensa- 


SCIENTIFIC    CAUSE  7 1 

tion.  A  sensation  or  series  of  sensations  forming; 
the  cause  of  an  effect  may  not  be  the  object  of 
our  individual  knowledge,  but  to  believe  in  the 
actual  existence  of  such  a  sensation  or  series  of 
sensations,  it  must  be  believed  that  it  is  the 
object  of  a  superhuman  consciousness.  The 
flower-pollen  or  such  other  things  which  form 
the  cause  of  smell  are,  though  not  objects  of  our 
individual  consciousness,  nothing  but  visible  or 
tangible  objects ;  to  believe  in  their  existence 
therefore  is  to  believe  in  a  superhuman  spirit  as 
their  support.  Similarly,  the  particles  of  food 
which  cause  taste,  and  the  vibration  of  air  which 
causes  sound,  are  visible  or  tangible  objects, 
though  not  objects  of  our  individual  conscious- 
ness, and  are  therefore  dependent  on  some  super- 
human consciousness.  It  will  be  seen  therefore 
that  this  scientific  theory  of  causation  does  not 
carry  us  beyond  the  knowable  world.  The  causes 
of  sensation  assigned  by  it  are  themselves  sensa- 
tions, and  are  therefore  objects  of  knowledge. 
Scientific  causality  is  a  relation  that  can  exist 
only  between  sensible  objects — between  objects 
of  knowledge.  It  is  nothing  but  a  relation  of 
fixed  antecedence  and  sequence.  An  event  that 
follows  another  event  or  series  of  events  is  the 
effect  of  the   latter,    and   an   event   or   series   of 


72  REFUTATION"    OF    NATURALISM  CHAP. 

events  which  is  followed  by  another  event  is  the 
cause  of  the  latter.  If  '  cause '  means  this,  not 
unknown,  unknowable  and  inconceivable  thing 
can  be  the  cause  of  sensation. 

We  find  another  kind  of  causality  in  the 
knowable  world,  one  which  is  called  metaphysi- 
cal causality.  This  causality  also  cannot  carry 
us  out  of  the  sphere  of  knowledge,  for  it  too  can 
exist  only  between  known  realities.  We  fmd 
that  the  self,  as  a  subject  conscious  of  itself, 
is  experiencing  various  sensations,  connecting 
them  by  its  uniting  power  and  organising  them 
into  various  ideas,  and  is  willing  various  ends. 
In  this  case  the  self  and  its  actions  are  related  as 
cause  and  effect.  The  self  is  the  cause  of  these 
effects,  cause  in  the  sense  that  its  existence  is 
the  necessary  condition  of  the  production  of 
these  effects.  But  here  also  the  relation  of  causa- 
lity exists  between  known  things,  the  causes 
and  effects  being  both  known  or  knowable. 
Here  too  causality  does  not  carry  us  beyond  the 
knowable  world  and  gives  us  no  inkling  of  any 
unknowable  reality.  On  the  contrary,  the  cause 
here  is  consciousness  itself, — the  conscious  self — 
the  condition  of  all  knowledge,  something 
without  knowing  which  nothing  else  can  be  known 
and  all  actions  of  which  are  based  on  knowledge. 


METAPHYSICAL    CAUSE  73 

Whatever  the  self  does, — whether  it  feels 
sensations  like  colour  and  taste,  or  draws  an 
inference,  or  puts  forth  a  volition — it  does  every- 
thing consciously,  and  because  it  is  conscious. 
If  it  were  not  conscious,  it  could  not  do  all  this ; 
its  activity  depends  upon  its  consciousness.  If 
we  try  to  understand  'activity',  we  find  that  it 
necessarily  depends  on  consciousness,  that  it  is 
unmeaning  and  impossible  without  the  latter. 
What  is  unconscious,  therefore,  can  never  be 
active.  We  see  clearly,  then,  the  error  of 
Naturalism  and  Agnosticism.  The  unconscious 
and  unknowable  something  that  Naturalism  con- 
ceives as  the  cause  of  sensations  can  by  no 
means  have  causality.  It  cannot  be  a  cause  in 
the  sense  of  an  invariable  antecedent,  for  such 
a  cause  is  within  the  realm  of  knowledge,  and 
itself  requires  another  cause.  And  it  cannot  be 
a  cause  in  the  sense  in  which  the  self  is  the 
cause  of  mental  phenomena,  for  such  causality 
depends  on  consciousness.  Therefore,  the  un- 
knowable cause  conceived  by  Naturalism  is  not 
a  cause  in  any  sense.  It  is  a  cause  without 
causality,  an  unknowable  known  thing,  a  self- 
contradictory  expression,  a  mere  jumble  of 
words — it  is  nothing. 

The    reader  must  have  grasped  the  conclusion 


74  REFUTATinx    OF    NATURALISM  CHAP. 

we  have  so  far  arrived  at  by  our  discussion  on  the 
self  and  the  not-self.     To  what  does  knowledge — 
which  is  our  guide  to  belief — bear    witness?    Not 
to    any    unconscious  and  unknown  reality,  but  to 
knowledge  itself,  to  consciousness, — to  a  conscious 
self.     This      consciousness     has     two     sides     or 
aspects.     In  one  aspect  it  is  a  knower  and  known 
as   such,    and    in   another  it  is  only  known.     The 
first   is   called   subject,    and    the    second     object. 
These    two    aspects   can  be  distinguished,  but  not 
divided  or  separated.     People  try  to  separate    the 
object   from    the   subject — to  conceive  the  one  as 
apart  from    the    other ;  but    we    have    seen    that 
the   subject   is  the  necessary  support  of  the  object 
— that  nothing  remains  of  the  object  if  we  attempt 
to    conceive    it   out    of   relation    to    the    subject. 
\Ve     have    tried     to    show    that   what   we    call 
matter  is   conditioned    by    mind— that     the     one 
cannot   exist   except    in    relation    to,    except    as 
supported  by,   the    other.     Of   these    two    aspects 
of  consciousness  one  may  be  called  the    self,    and 
the    other    the    not-self ;    but    it  must    always  be 
remembered  that    the    self   and    the    not-self   are 
both  inseparable  aspects  of  one  indivisible  reality, 
— consciousness.     The     one     concrete    reality    is 
consciousness,    which  we  have  often  called  merely 
the  self.     The  term  'self  seems  to   be   sufficiently 


CONXLUSION  75 

expressive,  for  it  implies  both  subjectivity  and 
objectivity.  The  self  both  knows  and  is 
known.  It  is  to  this  self,  this  conscious  reality, 
that  knowledge  bears  witness.  Whatever  we 
perceive  by  direct  knowledge  is  included  in  this 
reality.  What  we  do  not  perceive  by  direct 
knowledge,  but  know  by  inference,  must  also  be 
believed  as  included  in  knowledge,  as  object  of 
•the  conscious  self.  If  the  reader  believes  that 
there  is  an  endless  world  in  endless  space,  that 
the  world  exists  independently  of  our  individual 
acts  of  knowing,  he  must  then  believe  that  there 
is  a  supernatural  Mind  supporting  the  world. 
That  the  same  Consciousness,  the  same  supreme 
Self,  supports  all  time  and  space,  all  objects 
of  this  diversified  world,  and  at  the  same 
time  manifests  itself  as  our  life,— that  even 
during  the  sleep,  oblivion  and  ignorance  of  our 
individual  lives  the  world  exists  in  one  eternal 
infinite  and  ever-waking  Self — all  this  we  shall 
prove  by  and  by.  Up  to  this  point  we  have 
come  only  to  the  conclusion  that  knowledge  or 
conciousness  is  the  support  and  cause  of  the  world, 
— that  nothing  can  exist  apart  from  consciousness. 


76  KNOWLEDGE    AND    THE    SENSES  CHAP. 

Section  4 — Knowledge  and  the  Senses 
There  is  perhaps  in  the  mind  of  some  of  my 
readers  a  lingering  doubt  as  to  the  conclusion  we 
have  just  arrived  at,  and  I  shall  try  in  this  sec- 
tion to  remove  it.  They  may  say, — We  take  it 
as  proved  that  all  objects  known  through  the 
senses, — colour,  smell,  warmth,  hardness  and  the 
rest — depend  on  consciousness,  are  nothing 
but  sensations.  But  are  not  the  senses  themselves, 
through  which  w^e  perceive  these  objects,  independ- 
ent of  consciousness  ?  Do  not  sensations  imply 
the  senses  ?  If  so,  we  must  conclude  that  the 
senses  existed  before  sensation  as  one  of  its 
factors,  and  as  such  are  not  dependent  on  consci- 
ousness. Now,  in  meeting  this  point,  we  must 
first  ask,  '  \\' hat  are  the  senses  ? '  When  this 
question  is  properly  answered,  all  difficulties 
vanish.  The  term  '  senses  '  bears  two  meanings. 
In  whichever  of  these  meanings  it  may  be  un- 
derstood, the  senses  are  found  to  be  objects  depend- 
ent on  consciousness.  It  must  always  be  remem- 
bered that  it  is  not  the  senses  that  perceive,  the 
real  percipient  being  the  self.  To  the  unreflective 
it  is  the  eyes  that  see,  the  ears  that  hear,  the 
tongue  that  tastes,  and  the  hands  that  touch. 
Every  thoughtful  person  knows  that  these  notions 
are  erroneous.     A   lifeless  bod}'  neither  sees  nor 


I  THE    SENSES    A?    POWERS    AND    ORGANS  77 

hears,  neither  tastes  nor  touches,  though  it  has 
eyes  and  ears,  a  tongue  and  hands.  It  is  the  self 
that  sees  and  hears,  tastes  and  touches.  But  it  is 
through  the  senses  that  the  self  does  all  this. 
Now  let  us  see  what  this  through  points  to. 
Seeing,  hearing,  tasting  and  touching  are  all 
actions  of  the  self.  Now,  the  fact  that  the  self 
can  see, — its  power  to  see, — may  be  called  its 
sense  of  sight.  But  this  power  or  sense  is  nothing 
independent  of  the  self,  it  is  identical  with  it. 
Similarly,  the  self's  power  or  sense  of  hearing  and 
its  power  or  sense  of  touching  are  identical  with  it. 
The  knower  and  the  power  of  knowing  are  not 
different  things,  but  the  same.  If  this  is  the  meaning 
of  '  the  senses,'  the  proposition  that  the  self  per- 
ceives through  the  senses,  that  is,  through  its  own 
power  of  perceiving,  does  not  imply  the  existence 
of  any  extramental  object  ;  it  is  only  a  somewhat 
roundabout  way  of  expressing  the  simple  truth  that 
the  self  perceives.  Now,  this  power  of  knowing, 
which  is  identical  with  the  self,  evidently  does 
not  depend  on  any  other  reality.  On  the  contrary 
it  is  that  on  which  all  other  things  depend.  As 
we  have  already  seen,  the  consciousness  of  self 
is  the  support  and  condition  of  the  consciousness 
of  other  things,  and  the  existence  of  all  other 
things  is  conditioned  by  the  existence  of  the  self. 


78  KNOWLEDGE    AND    THE    SENSES  CHAP. 

By  'the  senses',  we  mean,  in  the  second  place, 
the  bodily  organs  like  the  eyes  and  the  ears. 
Whether  we  consider  the  external  or  the  internal 
formation  of  these  organs,  they  are  in  every 
respect  things  physical — parts  of  the  objective 
world,  and  as  such  included  in  the  sphere  of 
knowledge.  The  self  illumines  or  reveals  them, 
as  it  does  other  physical  objects ;  and  as  other 
objects  exist  in  relation  to  the  knowing  self, 
so  do  they.  The  eyes,  the  ears,  the  nose, 
the  tongue,  the  skin,  the  nerves,  the  muscles,  are 
things  either  seen  or  visible,  touched  or  tangible. 
Whatever  we  have  said,  therefore,  of  things 
visible  and  tangible,  applies  to  them.  They 
cannot  exist  except  in  relation  to  consciousness. 
If  so,  if  these  objects  are  really  dependent  on 
the  conscious  self,  how  then  can  we  say  that  the 
self  knows  through  these  objects,  experiences 
sensations  through  them  ?  How  can  knowledge, 
apart  from  which  the  senses  cannot  exist,  be 
itself  dependent  on  the  senses  ?  We  do  not  in- 
deed mean  to  say  that  the  eyes,  the  ears,  and 
the  other  organs  are  dependent  on  our  individual 
perceptions,  our  acts  of  knowing,— that  they 
originated  in  the  course  of  the  growth  or  manifest- 
ation of  our  individual  knowledge.  That  they  are 
not   so   dependent,    that   they   existed  before  the 


I  MIND   ITSELF    BEYOND   SENSE  79 

manifestation  of  our  individual  perceptions,  is  in- 
deed beyond  doubt.  But  our  individual  perceptions, 
as  we  shall  see   by    and   by,    are    the   revelation 
of   an    objective    and  universal  Consciousness  on 
which     everything    depends    and   which   cannot 
depend  on  the  senses.     Because  the  senses  are  in- 
dependent  of   our  individual  perceptions,  it  does 
not  follow,  therefore,  that  they    are    independent 
of   all  knowledge,  and  the  condition  of  all  know- 
ledge.    In  fact  not  only  the  senses,    but    all    that 
we  perceive  through  them,  are  independent  of  our 
individual  perceptions.     They  all    existed   before 
the     individual    manisfestation    of  consciousness 
which  we  call    our    life.     But    as    other   objects, 
though  independent  of  our  individual  perceptions, 
are  yet  dependent  on    a   superhuman    Conscious- 
ness    revealed   by    our   perceptions,    so   are    our 
senses     dependent     thereon.     When    the    senses 
possess  all  the  characteristics  of  material   objects, 
they   must  be  held  as  dependent  on  consciousness 
on  the  same  ground  on  which   other   objects   are 
held  to  be  so  dependent.  They  too  exist  in  relation 
to    the    same    superhuman    Mind    to  which  other 
objects  owe  their  existence.     The  senses  can  have 
no  speciality  to  that  Mind.     It  is  absurd  to  think 
that    that    Mind   knows   through  the  senses.     As 
mind  is  the  necessary  condition  of  the  existence  of 


8o  KNOWLEDGE  AND  THE  SENSES         CHAP. 

the  senses,  how  can  mind  itself  be  dependent  on 
the  senses  ?  If  it  be  said  that  there  is  no  proof  of 
the  existence  of  a  superhuman  Mind,  we  can  at 
present  say  only  this  in  reply  that  if  so,  neither 
is  there  any  proof  of  the  existence  of  the  sense- 
organs  before  they  became  objects  of  our  in- 
dividual knowledge,  or  after  they  cease  to  be 
its  objects.  The  appearance  of  the  sense-organs 
and  other  material  objects  to  our  individual 
consciousness  is  the  only  basis  of  our  inferences 
about  them.  It  is  from  this  basis  that  we  infer 
that  these  objects  existed  even  before  this  appear- 
ance took  place.  Now  if  this  our  individual 
perception  is  a  valid  ground  for  the  the  inference 
referred  to,  it  is  a  valid  ground  for  another  in- 
ference, however  little  it  may  occur  to  the 
ordinary  or  even  the  scientific  understanding, 
namely  that  the  consciousness  in  relation  to  which 
these  objects  appear  is  not  itself  anything  new, 
anything  that  occurs  now,  but  that  its  individual 
form  only  is  new,  whereas  it  existed  even  before 
it  assumed  this  form.  However,  we  shall  discuss 
this  point  at  length  in  its  proper  place.  We  have 
shown  only  this  much  at  present  that  the  same 
evidence  that  proves  that  our  sense-organs  ex- 
isted before  they  appeared  to  our  individual 
consciousness,  also   proves   that   they   existed   in 


I  INDIVIDUAL    KNOWLEDGE    DEPENDENT    ON    SENSE  81 

relation  to  a  consciousness — the  same  conscious- 
ness in  essence,  as  we  shall  see,  in  relation  to 
which  they  now  appear.  As  these  organs  are 
dependent  on  that  consciousness,  it  cannot  depend 
on  them.  That  it  knows  through  these  organs, 
that  is,  through  objects  dependent  on  it,  is  an 
absurdity. 

But  though  consciousness  itself  cannot  be  de- 
pendent on  the  sense-organs,  it  is  evident  that 
its  manifestation  m  our  individual  lives  is,  in 
a  sense,  dependent  thereon.  It  is  superfluous  to 
point  out  that  without  the  action  of  our  eyes, 
ears,  nerves,  &c.  we  do  not  have  the  sensations 
of  colour,  sound,  touch  and  the  rest.  That  the 
action  of  the  sense-organs  is  the  scientific  cause, 
the  invariable  antecedent,  of  sensation,  is  beyond 
doubt.  But  the  scientific  cause  of  an  event  is 
not  its  sole  cause,  not  a  cause  that  satisfies 
reason.  Scientific  causes  are  themselves  effects 
and  call  for  other  causes.  The  ultimate  cause 
of  all  effects — their  metaphysical  cause — is  the 
self.  That  the  sense-organs  which  are  the 
scientific  cause  of  our  individual  perceptions  are 
not  independent,  that  they  too,  like  other 
objects,  are  dependent  on  the  self,  is,  we  hope, 
now  evident  to  the  reader. 


82  THE    SELF — UNIVERSAL   AND    INDIVIDUAL  CHAP. 

Section  5 — The  self — universal  &  individual 
From  what  the  reader  has  read  of  this  book 
it  may  seem  to  him  that  we  deny  the  unity  and 
permanence  of  the  world  and  reduce  it  to 
different  selves  and  their  transient  sensations. 
It  is  not  surprising  that  this  should  seem  to  be 
the  purport  of  what  we  have  so  far  said,  but  in 
reality  it  is  not  so.  When  the  reader  will  have 
gone  through  our  second  and  third  chapters, 
he  will  see  that  as  to  ordinary  belief,  so  to 
philosophical  knowledge,  the  world  is  one  and 
permanent.  In  this  matter  the  difference  between 
current  belief  and  philosophical  knowledge  is 
that  while  to  the  former  the  world  is  independ- 
ent, to  the  latter  it  is  dependent  on  the 
conscious  self.  However,  we  shall  give 
here  some  idea  of  this  truth — of  the  unity 
and  permanence  of  the  world — without  keeping 
the  reader  waiting  for  the  lengthy  exposition  of 
our  second  and  third  chapters.  We  have  proved 
in  this  chapter  that  there  is  no  independent  not- 
self,  what  appears  to  be  so  being  really  dependent 
on  the  self.  In  every  act  of  perception  we  know 
an  undivided  reality  of  which  the  one  side  is  the 
knowing  subject  and  the  other  the  known  object. 
If  the  reader  has  comprehended  the  truth  that  the 
known    object    cannot  exist  independently  of  the 


I  PERCEPTION-    REVEALS    A    UNIVERSAL    SELF  83 

knowing  subject,  and  that  the  latter  is  unmean- 
ing without  reference  to  the  former,  then  the 
object  of  our  first  chapter  has  been  gained. 

The  question  now  is.  Is  the  self  we  know  in 
every  act  of  perception  individual  or  universal  ?  In 
showing  that  colour,  taste,  smell,  sound  and 
touch  are  dependent  on  consciousness  we  have 
repeatedly  said  that  they  are  different  sensations 
of  different  selves.  But  here  and  there  we  have 
also  said  that  what  we  call  our  own  self  is  not 
merely  individual,  but  is  essentially  universal, 
all-comprehending,  eternal  and  infinite,  its  in- 
dividual manifestation  alone  being  finite  and 
transient.  This  truth  is  implied  in  the  explana- 
tion we  have  given  of  the  material  world.  The 
current  belief  is  that  the  material  world  exists 
independently  of  the  self,  and  that  in  our  acts 
of  perception  it  comes  into  relation  with  the 
latter,  the  relation  ceasing  with  the  cessation 
of  perception.  If  the  reader  has  followed  our 
explanation,  he  must  have  seen  that  this  is  not 
a  correct  description  of  perception.  The  true 
interpretation  of  perception  is  that  in  it  an 
indivisible  consciousness,  a  subject-object,  is 
manifested  in  a  finite  form.  In  that  reality  sub- 
jectivity and  objectivity  are  indissolubly  related. 
It   is   not   true   that   a    subject   and   an   object. 


84  THE    SELF — UNIVERSAL    AND    INDIVIDUAL  CHAP. 

essentiall}'  unrelated  to  each  other,  comes  into 
relation  for  a  time  :  it  is  an  indivisible  reality 
containing  the  two  moments  of  subject  and 
object  in  unity  and  difference  with  each  other 
that  is  manifested  in  every  act  of  perception. 
Thus  it  will  be  seen  that  our  self  has  not  really 
that  independence  of  or  separation  from  the 
world  of  objects  which  is  implied  in  calling  it 
individual.  Since  in  knowing  every  object 
we  know  the  self  as  indissolubly  related  to  it, 
where  is  its  separation  from  the  world  of  objects? 
It  is  because  the  true  character  of  perception  is 
not  comprehended  that  the  self  and  the  world  seem 
to  be  independent  of  each  other.  When  this — the 
true  character  of  perception — is  comprehended,  it 
is  seen  that  in  knowing  an  object  we  necessarily 
know  the  self  on  which  it  is  dependent — that 
it  is  impossible  to  know  an  object  without  know- 
ing the  self  on  which  its  existence  depends.  And 
the  self  we  know  is  no  other  than  the  self  we 
call  our  own.  It  is  the  self  I  call  my  own  which 
is  manifested  as  the  support  of  everything  I 
perceive.  It  is  the  self  I  call  my  own  that,  in 
my  perception  of  my  body,  is  manifested  as  that 
which  sees,  touches  and  understands  it — as  the 
subject  and  support  of  the  object,  the  body.  In 
perceiving     the     table     before     me, — in    seeing, 


I  TWO    ASPECTS    OF    THE    SELF  85 

touching  and  understanding  it,  I  know  my  own 
self  as  its  support.  Whatever  object  I  perceive, 
I  know  my  own  self  along  with  it  as  its  support. 
It  is  true  that  in  every  act  of  perception  the  self 
manifests  itself  as  finite,  that  is,  as  the  knovver 
and  support  of  a  definite  number  of  objects, 
but  that  it  is  essentially  infinite,  and  not  finite, 
is  evident  at  every  step.  That  what  was  un- 
known to  me  a  moment  before  is  now  known 
to  me,  that  every  day  what  was  unknown  before 
becomes  known,  shows  that  what  I  call  my  indivi- 
dual and  finite  self  is  not  essentially  individual 
and  finite,  but  is  in  essence  universal  and  infinite. 
If  the  reader  considers  all  this,  he  will  see  that 
the  self  we  call  our  own  has  two  aspects, 
individual  and  universal,  finite  and  infinite. 
That  the  self  is  essentially  one,  that  the  Supreme 
Self  is  the  self  of  all  cresitui'es—Sarvabhutdntardtmd, 
as  the  U panishads  call  him— the  reader  will  see 
by  and  by.  We  shall  expound  this  truth  at 
length  in  our  third  chapter.  For  the  present, 
let  the  reader  try  to  apprehend  the  truth  that 
in  every  act  of  perception  we  know  the  same 
self — the  self  we  call  our  own — as  an  individual 
self — 'vijndndtma  in  the  language  of  the  Vedanta — 
and  as  the  universal  Self — the  self  of  the  world 
(visvdtmd).     When    the    objects  perceived  by  me 


86  THE    SELF — UNIVERSAL    AND    INDIVIDUAL  CHAP. 

cease  to  be  the  objects  of  my  individual  percep- 
tion, they  seem  to  be  severed  from  my  self.  It 
seems  that  in  that  condition  they,  though  they 
may  form  the  objects  of  some  other  self,  are 
surely  not  the  objects  of  my  self.  But  the  reader 
vi^ill  see  that  we  necessarily  conceive  of  their 
existence  in  that  condition  as  dependent  on 
knowledge — the  knowledge  of  our  own  self. 
Unless  we  conceive  of  them  as  such,  no 
conception  of  them,  no  belief  about  them,  is 
possible.  As  the  table  before  me,  when  per- 
ceived through  the  senses,  is  presented  as  the 
object  of  my  self,  so  must  it  be  thought  of 
in  its  absence  from  my  senses  as  the  object 
of  my  own  self.  Unless  it  is  conceived  as  such, 
no  conception  of  it,  no  belief  about  it,  is  possible. 
And  it  is  evident  that  such  a  conception  and 
belief  is  necessary.  If,  in  our  acts  of  percep- 
tion, we  perceived  any  object  independent  of 
knowledge,  we  might,  even  on  the  cessation  of 
perception,  think  of  and  believe  that  object 
as  independent  of  knowledge.  But  in  per- 
ception we  do  not  come  across  any  such  object. 
What  is  manifested  in  perception  is  what  we  call 
our  own  self,  with  the  colours,  tastes,  touches  &c., 
which  are  indissolubly  connected  with  it.  If, 
therefore,    we   must   conceive   of   and  believe  in 


I  THE  TWO  ASPECTS  INSEPARABLE  87 

the  existence  of  the  object  of  perception  even  on 
the  cessation  and  in  the  absence  of  the  percep- 
tive act,  we  can  think  of  and  believe  in  it  only 
in  the  form  in  which  we  perceive  it,  namely  as 
our  own  self  and  its  objects.  Thus  a  close  inquiry 
into  the  nature  of  knowledge  and  belief  discloses 
the  fact  that  in  conceiving  and  believing  the 
universe  to  be  permanent,  connected  and  one,  we 
really  conceive  our  own  self  as  permanent,  as 
the  connecting  principle,  and  as  one.  The  truth 
that  the  world  is  permanent,  connected  and  one, 
means  this,  and  nothing  else,  that  the  selves  which 
at  first  right  appear  to  be  many  and  independent 
of  one  another  and  of  the  world,  are  essentially 
one,  indivisible  and  the  support  of  the  world. 
As  we  have  already  said,  the  self  we  call  our 
own,  has  two  aspects,  finite  and  infinite,  indivi- 
dual and  universal.  In  our  perception  of  nature, 
we  specially  realise  its  universal  aspect.  We 
then  see  that  it  is  the  self,  the  support,  of  the 
universe.  When,  on  the  other  hand,  we  abstract 
as  much  as  we  can  from  our  knowledge  of  nature 
and  attend  specially  to  self-consciousness,  we 
realise  specially  that  it  is  a  finite  or  individual 
self.  But  these  two  aspects  are  inseparable, 
though  distinguishable,  from  each  other.  The 
reader    will   realise    this    truth   more    and   more 


o8  THE    SELF — UNIVERSAL    AND    INDIVIDUAL  CHAP. 

clearly  as  he  proceeds.  He  will  see  by  and  by 
that  though  the  finite  selves  appear  to  be  in- 
dependent of  one  another  and  of  nature, 
there  is  nevertheless  an  essential  unity  behind 
this  discreteness.  We  have  already  stated  the 
fundamental  principle  of  this  exposition.  Though 
different  minds  feel  different  sensations,  these 
different  sensations  are  knowable  to  all, — there 
is  a  connecting  link  in  them.  The  reader  will 
see  that  the  Universal  Self  is  the  connecting  link 
and  that  it  is  because  the  Universal  Self  is  the 
inner  self  of  each  one  of  us,  that  it  is  possible  for 
us  to  know  the  different  feelings  of  different 
minds.  We  have  said,  moreover,  that  all  space 
is  connected,  and  the  self  is  the  connecting 
principle.  Each  one  of  us  directly  perceives  by 
his  senses  only  a  small  portion  of  space,  namely 
the  sentient  parts  of  our  bodies.  We  also  know 
objects  external  to  the  body  when  they  touch  it, 
but  such  knowledge  is  not  direct,  but  mediated 
by  inference.  However,  our  knowledge  of  space, 
be  it  mediate  or  immediate,  involves  in  it  the 
ideas  of  unity  and  infinity.  We  know  each  por- 
tion of  space  as  included  in  one  infinite  space. 
And  in  this  knowledge  of  one  infinite  space  is 
implied  the  knowledge  of  the  unity  and  infinity 
of  the   self.     We   could   not    know    one    infinite 


ANTICIPATION    OF    THE    THIRD    CHAPTER 

space  if  we  were  not  essentially  one  with  the 
one,  indivisible,  infinite  Supreme  Self.  We  shall 
try  to  make  this  truth  as  clear  as  we  can  in  our 
chapter  on  "  Unity-m  difference." 


CHAPTER  II 

THE  TEMPORAL  AND  THE  ETERNAL 

Section  i — Sensationalism  and  Subjective 
Idealism 

In  this  second  chapter  it  is  our  purpose  to 
establish  the  eternality  of  knowledge.  We  pro- 
pose to  show  in  it  that  the  consciousness  which 
manifests  itself  as  the  light  and  support  of  all  that 
we  know,  which  is  the  only  consciousness  of 
which  we  are  directly  aware,  which  is  not  subject 
to  our  individual  will,  but  is  the  cause  and  con- 
dition of  that  will,  which,  though  not  manifest 
in  our  hours  of  individual  ignorance,  oblivion 
and  sleep,  re-manifests  itself  independently  of  our 
individual  will  and  dispels  our  ignorance,  oblivion 
and  sleep— is  not  merely  our  individual  conscious- 
ness, but  is  ultimately  an  all-knowing  and  ever- 
waking  Self  in  which  the  world  eternally  exists. 

At  the  very  beginning  of  the  present  chapter, 
we  shall  give  an  exposition  of  two   philosophical 


II  EXPOSITION    OF    SENSATIONALISM  QI 

theories  which  are  opposed  to  the  truth  stated 
above,  and  then  refute  them  by  explaining  at 
some  length  the  eternality  of  knowledge.  They 
are  called  Sensationalism  and  Subjective  Idealism. 
The  former  contends  that  as  our  sensuous  know- 
ledge,— the  only  kind  of  knowledge  it  recognises — 
consists  only  of  sensations,  there  is  no  such  thing 
as  a  permanent  world.  We  are  not  directly 
aware  of  any  other  consciousness  than  our  own 
and  all  that  we  perceive  depend  on  that  con- 
sciousness. But  as  our  individual/  consciousness 
is  subject  to  ignorance,  oblivion  and  sleep,  and 
as  the  objects  known  by  us  are  continually  pass- 
ing out  of  our  consciousness,  these  objects 
cannot  be  called  permanent.  These  objects  are 
only  transient  states  of  our  mind  and  the  world 
is  nothing  but  a  series  of  flowing,  impermanent 
sensations.  What  is  now  is  no  more  next  moment, 
and  what  comes  next  moment  is  fresh  sensation. 
If  it  be  said  that  there  is  a  permanent  self  which 
supports  sensations,  the  reply  is  that  this  self  is 
nothing  but  the  memory — an  aggregate  of  recollec- 
tions, of  faint  images— of  past  sensations.  We 
know  this  self  only  as  the  percipient  and  re- 
collector  of  sensations,  and  as  nothing  else. 
When  therefore  it  falls  asleep  or  otherwise 
becomes  unconscious,  when  it  is  no    more    either 


92  SENSATIONALISM    AND    SUBJECTIVE    IDEALISM        CHAP. 

a  percipient  or  recollector  of  sensations,  it  cannot, 
in  any  intelligible  sense,  be  said  to  exist.  As 
its  very  existence  means  the  perception  of  sen- 
sations, how  can  it  exist  in  an  insentient  state  ? 
That  the  self  and  the  world  seem  to  be  permanent, 
is  the  result  of  the  association  of  ideas  and  ex- 
pectation consequent  upon  it.  Let  us  take  for 
example  the  table  before  us  and  explain  the  Sen- 
sationalist theory  of  the  world.  It  is  only  when 
I  see  the  table,  touch  it,  and  press  it  with  my 
hand  or  any  other  limb,  that  it  exists  actually  ; 
for  it  is  nothing  but  an  aggregate  of  sensations. 
When  I  cease  to  feel  these  sensations,  there  is 
no  proof  that  they  actually  exist.  And  if  they 
do  exist,  they  can  do  so  only  in  relation  to 
another  mind, — to  me  they  are  actually  nothing. 
But  to  me  they  exist  as  possibilities,  though  not 
as  actualities.  When  I  simply  see  the  table,  and 
do  not  touch  it  or  feel  my  hands  over  it  or  press 
it,  its  colour  only  is  actually  present  to  me  ;  but 
the  other  qualities,  though  not  actually  present, 
are  present  as  possibilities.  The  recollections 
of  the  sensations  of  colour,  coldness,  smoothness, 
hardness,  &c.,  which  I  experienced  by  seeing  and 
touching  it,  and  by  pressing  it  and  feeling  my 
hands  over  it,  exist  in  my  mind  in  an  associated 
form,  so  that  when  one  of  such  sensations    is   ex- 


II  EXPOSITION    OF    SEN'SATIONALISM  93 

perienced,    an    expectation    of   experiencing    the 
others    rises    in    the    mind.     When  I  only  see  the 
table  and  perceive  only   its    colour, — its  coldness, 
smoothness   and    hardness    exist   as  possibilities, 
though    not    actualities,    that    is,  there  exists  the 
possibility    of   their   being    experienced     on    the 
necessary    conditions   being    fulfilled.     We  have 
learnt  by  experience   that  on    putting    our   hand 
in  a  certain  place,  we  shall  feel  its   coldness,  and 
that  by  feeling  it  over  and  pressing    it   with    our 
hands   we    shall  experience    its   smoothness  and 
hardness.     It  is  this  expectation  of  experiencing 
the  sensations,  this  their   possible  existence,  that 
we    describe    in   practical   life   as  their  actual  or 
real  existence.     What  we  mean  by   saying    that 
the    table    is   cold,    smooth    and    hard,    that  the 
table  has  coldness,  smoothness  and  hardness,  even 
without  actually  experiencing    these   sensations, 
is   simply    the    fact    that    the  needful  conditions 
being  fulfilled,  there  is  a  possibility    of    our   ex- 
periencing these  sensations.     In  the  same  manner 
when,   by  simply  touching    the    table    and    even 
without   seeing    it,   we  say,  '  it  is  brown,'  'it  has 
a   brown    colour,'    we    mean    only    that  when  it 
comes  in  sight,  there  is  a   possibility    of   our    ex- 
periencing the  sensation  of  brown    colour.     Even 
when    the    table    is    quite  unperceived,  when  we 


94  SENSATIONALISM    AND    SUBJECTIVE    IDEALISM        CHAP. 

neither  see  it  nor  touch  it  nor  have  any  other 
sensations  of  it,  we  say  'it  is'  and  'it  is  brown, 
told,  smooth  and  hard,'  and  this  only  means 
that  the  proper  conditions  being  fulfilled, 
there  is  a  possibility  of  these  sensations  being- 
experienced.  i\nd  this  possibility  is  permanent. 
Long  experience  has  generated  in  us  a  firm  faith 
in  the  permanence  and  uniformity  of  the  laws 
of  nature.  We  believe  that  on  the  occurrence  of 
the  scientific  causes  of  sensations,  sensations  must 
arise.  Even  when  that  aggregate  of  sensations  we 
call  a  table  is  unperceived,  we  know  that  on  the 
necessary  conditions  being  fulfilled,  the  sensations 
which  constitute  it  will  be  experienced.  These 
sensations  exist,  not  as  barely  but  as  permanently 
possible  ;  so  that  when  unfelt  by  us,  they  may  be 
called  permanently  possible  sensations  or  "per- 
manent possibilities  of  sensation."*  In  the  same 
manner  all  natural  objects,  when  unperceived, 
are  nothing  but  permanently  possible  sensations. 
The  existence  of  the  world  means  its  existence 
as  an  aggregate  of  possible  sensations.  As  the 
world  cannot  exist  except  in  mind,  and  as  there 
is   no   proof   of    a    superhuman  mind,  and  as  the 

*  J.  S.  Mill.  See  his  Examination  of  Hamilton,  Chap. 
XI :  Psychological  Theory  of  the  Belief  in  an  External 
World. 


II  SENSATIONALIST    THEORY   OF   THE    SELF  95 

mind  of  man  and  other  animals  is  subject  to 
to  ignorance,  oblivion  and  sleep,  the  actual 
existence  of  the  world  is  not  permanent  ;  it  can 
be  called  permanent  only  as  an  aggregate  of 
permanently  possible  sensations. 

This  in  brief  is  the  Sensationalist  theory  of 
the  material  world.  It  is  also  the  theory  approved 
by  Subjective  Idealism.  To  both  the  objective 
world  is  nothing  but  a  series  of  transient  sensa- 
tions. But  the  two  schools  differ  a  good  deal  in 
their  theories  of  the  self.  To  Sensationalism  the 
self  is  as  much  a  series  of  sensations  as  the  world. 
Sometimes  it  is  found  that  the  self  can  exist  even 
without  experiencing  sensations  like  colour  and 
touch.  But  even  at  such  times  there  are  in  it 
faint  copies  or  representations  of  such  sensations. 
At  such  times  it  is  nothing  but  an  aggregate  of 
recollections.  The  remembered  sensations  are 
only  comparatively  faint  copies  of  actual  sensa- 
tions, and  the  self,  when  in  the  state  of  recollec- 
tion, is  only  an  aggregate  of  these  faint  copies. 
In  a  state  of  utter  oblivion  and  dreamless  sleep, 
there  is  no  proof  of  the  existence  of  the  self,  and 
in  fact  there  is  no  meaning  in  such  existence. 
It  can  very  well  be  siid  that  in  waking  the  self 
is  re-formed  by  the  re-appearance  of  past  recollec- 
tions.    However,    we    have  not  found  any  Sensa- 


g6  SEN'SATIONALISM    AND    SUBJECTIVE    IDEALISM        CHAP. 

tionalist  setting  forth  this  theory  without  hesita- 
tion and  inconsistency.  David  Hume  himself, 
the  father  of  Western  Sensationalism,  has  partly 
admitted  its  inconsistency.*  He  acknowledges 
his  failure  to  explain  how  a  series  of  transient 
sensations  persists  as  memory, — how  such  a  lapsed 
series  returns,  as  it  seems  to  do.  John  Stuart  Mill, 
partially  a  follower  of  Hume,  having  tried  hard 
to  establish  this  theory,  at  length  admits  that 
there  is  an  insurmountable  difficulty  in  establish- 
ing, it.  In  the  third  edition  of  his  bookf  al- 
ready referred  to,  he  abandoned  Sensational- 
ism and  accepted  Subjective  Idealism.  The 
insurmountable  difficulty  referred  to  by  Mill  is 
this  : — Sensations  are  transient  and  passing.  A 
sensation  that  passes  away,  passes  for  ever  and 
cannot  return.  What  succeeds  is  fresh  sensation, 
whether  vivid  or  faint.  Now,  memory  tells  us 
that  the  same  T  who  experienced  a  past  sensation 
experience  also  the  present, — that  though  the 
past  sensation  is  gone,  I  am  not  gone  with  it. 
Now,  if   the    self   were    nothing   but  a   series    of 

*  See  Hume's  Treatise  on  Human  Nature,  Part  IV.  Sec. 
VI.  and  its  Appendix.  See  also  Green's  Introduction  to 
Humes  Works. 

I  Examination  of  Hamilton,  Chap.  XII  and  the  follow- 
ing Appendix. 


II  WHERE   THE   THEORIES    DIFFER  97 

sensations,  this  verdict  of  memory  would  have 
no  meaning.  A  flow  of  transient  sensations  can 
by  no  means  know  themselves  as  a  permanent  'I.' 
The  self  therefore  is  a  permanent  reality.  It  is 
strange  that  Mill  acknowledges  this  truth  so  late, 
and  that  he  ignored  it  when  he  was  trying  to 
build  everything  in  earth  and  heaven  with  'expec- 
tation' and  'association  of  ideas',  which  can  have 
no  meaning  unless  the  permanence  of  the  self  is 
acknowledged.*  It  is  indeed  impossible  to  make 
any  assertion  except  on  the  supposition  of  its 
permanence. "j"  However,  the  difference  between 
Sensationalism  and  Subjective  Idealism  is  here, — 
the  latter's  admission  of  the  permanence  of  the 
self.  But  though  acknowleding  the  permanence 
of  the  self,  this  theory  does  not  acknowledge  the 
permanence  of  knowledge.  It  does  not  admit 
that  the  self  is  always  knowing  or  conscious, 
always  sopddhika  or  saguna,  in  the  language  of 
of  Indian  philosophy.  Certain  species  of  Subjective 
Idealism,  such  as  that  of  Sankara,  teaches  that  the 
self  is  ever-conscious  of  itself,  whether  in  the 
waking    or  dreaming  state  or  in  dreamless  sleep. 

*  See  a  short  but  nice  criticism  of  Mill's  "'Psychological 
Theory  "  in  Masson's  Recent  British  Philosophy. 

t  "  A  consistent  Sensationalism  must  be  speechless," — 
Green. 


go  SENSATIONALISM    AND    SUBJECTIVE    IDEALISM       CHAP. 

But  they  do  not  admit  that  the  consciousness  of 
objects  is  inseparable  from  the  consciousness  of 
the  self,  and  that  the  self  is  always  as  conscious 
of  objects  as  it  is  of  itself.  Let  us  give  a  some- 
what full  statement  of  the  theory. 

The  main  contention  of  Subjective  Idealism 
is  this  : — So  long  as  the  senses  work  the  self 
undergoes  modifications,  but  that  this  modified 
or  sopddhika  state  is  not  the  essential  nature  of 
the  self,  is  easily  seen.  The  objects  of  sense  are 
transient.  The  visible  world  exists  only  so  long 
as  we  keep  our  eyes  open  ;  it  disappears  as  soon 
as  they  are  closed.  In  the  same  manner  tangible 
objects  exist  only  so  long  as  we  touch.  Objects 
of  sense  are  transient — passing  in  the  ever-flowing 
current  of  time.  The  sensible  world  is  nowhere 
when  the  senses  cease  to  work.  It  is  only  the 
eternal,  unmodified,  nirupddhika  self  that  exists 
then.  It  may  be  objected  that  even  when  the 
senses  cease  to  work,  the  world  exists  as  the 
object  of  the  self's  memory — as  the  object  of 
pure  non-sensuous  knowledge.  But  where  is  the 
proof  for  this  statement  ?  Memory  too,  like  per- 
ception, is  only  a  transient  state  of  the  self. 
We  do  not  remember  always  all  that  we  perceive. 
Like  sensuous  knowledge  the  knowledge  furnished 
by    memory    too   passes   away.      And    then,     as 


II  ARGUMENT   FOR    SUBJECTIVE    IDEALISM  99 

to  the  state  of  sleep,  though  some  conscious- 
ness of  objects  persists  in  dreams,  it  entirely 
ceases  in  dreamless  sleep.  In  that  state  the 
self  is  conscious  only  of  itself  and  not  of 
any  object.  If  you  contend  that  self-con- 
sciousness cannot  exist  without  object-conscious- 
ness, let  us  admit  that  a  bit  of  object-conscious- 
ness persists  till  then.  But  this  does  not  prove 
the  permanence  of  this  diversified  world  of  ob- 
jects. If  it  be  said  that  though  the  individual 
self  forgets  the  world,  the  Universal  Self  does  not, 
and  that  his  knowledge  is  always  differenced,  the 
reply  is  that  there  is  no  proof  of  the  existence  of 
such  a  Supreme  Self,  with  a  differentiated  content 
of  knowledge.  Self-knowledge  is  the  only  basis 
of  the  knowledge  of  Brahman,  and  our  self- 
knowledge  bears  witness  only  of  an  eternal  un- 
differentiated Self  without  objects.  It  is  this 
undifferented  Self  that  is  the  seed  of  the  world. 
It  is  this  self  that  becomes  differentiated  through 
its  Maya  and  appears  as  the  world,  but  this 
differentiation  is  not  its  permanent  or  essential 
nature.  In  essence  it  is  pure  consciousness 
without  differences,  without  the  giinas  and  without 
objects.  It  is  not  a  knower,  not  a  subject  or 
agent  of  knowledge,  but  knowledge  itself. 

This  argument  in  favour  of  Subjective  Idealism 


lOO  KNOWLEDGE    A   UNITY-IN-DIFFERENCE  CHAP. 

seems  apparently  unanswerable,  but  on  a  some- 
what close  examination  it  is  found  to  be  extremely 
fallacious  inspite  of  its  apparent  validity.  Self- 
knowledge  is  indeed  the  basis  of  the  knowledge 
of  God,  but  the  Mayavadin,  the  Subjective  Idealist, 
does  not  really  understand  the  import  of  self- 
knowledge,  which  bears  witness,  not  of  an  un- 
differentiated self  without  objects,  but  of  an  Objec- 
tive Self,  a  World-soul,  with  an  infinitely  differen- 
tiated content  of  knowledge.  We  proceed  to 
explain  our  view  as  clearly  as  we  can. 

Section  2 — Knowledge  a  Unity-in-difference 

We  draw  the  reader's  attention  again  to  the 
second  of  the  two  principles  expounded  in  the 
first  section  of  our  first  chapter.  We  have  shewn 
therein  that  as  the  self  cannot  know  anything 
without  knowing  itself,  so  it  cannot  know  itself 
without  knowing  some  object  or  other.  As  self- 
knowledge  is  the  support  of  the  knowledge  of 
objects,  so  the  knowledge  of  objects  is  the 
constant  accompaniment  of  self-knowledge.  The 
self  can  know  itself  only  as  a  knower,  and  to 
know  itself  as  a  knower,  it  must  know  something 
which  it  can  distinguish  from  itself.  We  have 
seen  that  what  the  self  knows,  what  forms  its 
object,     is       really       within      knowledge     and 


FALLACY  OF  SUBJECTIVE  IDEALISM         lOI 

cannot  exist  independently  of  the  self, — that 
between  it  and  the  self  there  is  only  a 
distinction,  but  no  division.  Nevertheless  this 
distinction  is  necessary  for  knowledge,  knowledge 
being  impossible  without  it.  The  self  cannot 
know  itself  unless  it  knows  something  which  it 
can  distinguish  from  itself.  Knowledge  is  the 
synthesis  of  two  distinct  but  inseparable  ele- 
ments,— the  knowledge  of  self  and  the  knowledge 
of  objects.  In  the  absence  of  any  of  these  two 
elements  knowledge  is  impossible.  In  fact  they 
are  two  aspects  of  the  same  reality.  It  is  the 
same  indivisible  reality  that  wonderfully  com- 
prises this  unity  and  difference. 

It  must  now  be  seen  that  as  we  can  neither 
know  nor  conceive  a  self-knowledge  without  a 
knowledge  of  objects,  as,  besides,  it  is  something 
absurd  and  self-contradictory,  the  existence  of 
such  a  thing  is  incredible.  And  it  cannot  be  that 
what  is  unknowable  and  inconceivable  is  really 
believed  by  any  one.  It  must  therefore  be  of  the 
nature  of  those  absurdities,  accepted  by  popular 
belief  and  philosophical  theories,  some  of  which 
we  have  already  dealt  with.  We  thus  see  clearly 
the  fallacy  of  Subjective  Idealism.  The  'object- 
less knowledge',  the  'subject  without  a  knowledge 
of  objects'  which  it  speaks  of,  belongs  to  the  same 


KNOWLEDGE    A    UN'ITY-IN-DIFFEREN-CE 

class  of  things  as  the  Naturalist's  'unknown  object 
of  knowledge',  'unfelt  feeling',  'unknowable 
cause',  that  is,  'unknowable  object  of  knowledge'. 
A  mere  object  or  a  mere  subject,  a  mere  knower 
or  a  mere  knowable  is  not  a  reality.  The  only 
reality  is  a  conscious  self  which  is  a  subject-object, 
a  unity-in-difference.* 

In  whatever  way  we  may  look  upon  the  sub- 
ject, it  is  found  to  be  distinct  yet  related  to  the 
object.  The  subject  is  one,  the  object  manifold  ; 
but  the  'one'  unrelated  to  the  'many',  is  meaning- 
less :  'one'  means  'one  in  many'.  The  self  is 
permanent,  unchangeable  ;  but  the  permanent, 
the  unchangeable,  unrelated  to  the  transient,  the 
changeable,  is  meaningless  ;  'permanent'  means 
'permanent  among  the  transient',  and  'unchange- 
able' means  'unchangeable  in  the  midst  of  a  flow 
of  change.'  The  self  is  out  of  space  ;  it  is  the 
support  of  things  in  space,  but  is  not  itself  ex- 
tended. But  unless  it  knows  itself  as  distinct 
from  and  yet  related  to  things  extended,  it  can- 
not know  itself  as  out  of  space.  'Out  of  space' 
is  meaningless  except  with  reference  to  things  in 
space.     A  subject  without  objects,  self-conscious- 


*  See   Ferrier's   Institutes  of  Mctaphysic,   Section   III  : 
Ontology,  and  Caircl's  Hegel,  Chaps.  VII  and  VIII. 


II         ABSURDITY  OF  'AN  UNCONSCIOUS  SELF'       IO3 

ness  without  a  consciousness  of  objects,    is    there- 
fore meaningless  and  impossible. 

So  far  we  see  the  error  of  the  Subjective  Ideal- 
ism or  Mdydvdda  which  believes  in  an  objectless- 
consciousness.  We  now  proceed  to  show  the 
error — which  can  be  easily  done — of  that  form  of 
the  theory  which  teaches  the  doctrine  of  a  purely 
unconscious  self — a  self  which  can  and  does  be- 
come wholly  unconscious  at  times,  losing  both 
its  consciousness  of  itself  and  that  of  objects. 
The  first  thing  to  be  said  against  this  theory  is, 
that  as  the  self  manifests  itself  as  knowledge  and 
knowledge  alone,  as  it  is  a  conscious  reality  that 
we  know  as  self  and  call  and  understand  by  the 
name,  an  unconscious  self,  that  is  an  unconscious 
consciousness,  is  nothing  but  a  self-contradiction, 
a  meaningless  phrase.  It  is  nothing  more  real  or 
possible  than  the  self-contradictory  and  absurd 
things  we  have  already  dealt  with.  Something 
that  manifests  itself  as  consciousness,  is  known 
as  consciousness,  is  called  a  self  only  because  it 
is  conscious,  whose  selfhood  consists  in  cons- 
ciousness, whose  very  existence  depends  on  cons- 
ciousness— what  remains  of  it  when  bereft  of 
consciousness  ?  What  proof  is  there  that  it  then 
continues  to  exist  ?  How  can  a  thing  exist 
without    its   attributes  ?    How   can   a   conscious 


I04  KNOWLEDGE   A   UNITY-IN-DIFFERENCE  CHAP. 

thing   exist  without   consciousness  ?   For  it  to  be 
without     consciousness     is     to     cease   to   exist. 
Secondly,   if   it   be    admitted  for  a  moment   that 
even  when  bereft  of  consciousness,   something   of 
the   self   yet   remains,   that  an  attributeless  subs- 
tance still  persists,  the  Mayavadin,  the  subjective 
Idealist,    would  gain  nothing  by  this  admission. 
He  may  be  asked.  Why  call  this  substance  a   self 
and  not   matter  ?  How  does  a  self  without  cons- 
ciousness   differ   from    matter  ?    The    M^y^v^din 
thinks  that  this  attributeless   substance    can    and 
does  become  conscious  again,  and  hence   he  calls 
it   a   self   rather   than   matter.     But   that  is  im- 
possible.    What  has   once   become   unconscious, 
has  lost   all   its   knowledge,  can  never  again  re- 
cover its  lost   knowledge.     The    M^y^v^din    will 
perhaps   say,  you  characterise  as  impossible  what 
is  happening   in   our  daily  experience.     We  see 
every   day   how   in   sleep   we  lose  all  our  know- 
ledge— our  knowledge  of  self  and   knowledge   of 
objects — and   in  rewaking  recover  it.     What  can 
be   a   clearer   proof   than   this  of  the  fact   that 
the   self,    having    once   lost     its    consciousness, 
can     regain      it, — that     having     once     become 
nirguna   or   attributeless   it   can   again    become 
saguna,    possessed   of    attributes  ?     This   is   the 
Mayavadin's    argument.     We    proceed  to    show 


II  KNOWLEDGE    NEVER    LOST  IO5 

its  error.  We  shall  show  how  little  the  Maya- 
vadin  understands  the  meaning  of  experi- 
ence, to  which  he  appeals.  Let  us  suppose  that 
I  lose  my  knowledge  of  the  inkstand,  the  pen,  the 
paper  and  the  table  before  me,  and  with  that 
the  knowledge  of  my  own  self  that  constantly 
accompanies  it,  and  fall  asleep.  These  ideas  are 
all  gone,  for,  when  the  self  becomes  unconscious 
where  else  can  ideas  exist  ?  My  self,  the  essence 
of  my  life,  is  left  as  an  empty  receptacle.  In  due 
course  I  awake  and  regain  my  knowledge  of  the 
inkstand,  the  pen,  the  paper  and  the  table,  and 
that  of  my  own  self.  I  remember  that  I  knew 
these  things  before  I  fell  asleep  and  that  the  same 
self  that  knew  them  before  knows  them  now. 
The  question  now  is.  How  could  the  knowledge 
that  was  utterly  lost,  that  had,  as  it  were  dried 
up  and  left  its  receptacle  empty,  come  back 
again  ?  To  the  M^y^v^din,  knowledge  is  not 
permanent,  it  is  only  a  transient  flow  of  sensa- 
tions or  ideas.  Now,  past  knowledge,  that  is,  the 
past  flow  of  sensations,  died  away  in  sleep  and 
cannot  come  back.  What  comes  now  must  be 
fresh  sensation  or  sensations.  That  a  number 
of  fresh  sensations  are  being  experienced  now,  is 
indeed  a  fact,  but  it  is  also  a  fact  that  with  these 
fresh    sensations    have   come   certain   old    ideas. 


I06  KNOWLEDGE    A   UKITY-IN-DIFFERE\XE  CHAP. 

The  knowledge  that  the  new  sensations  are 
similar  to  the  old,  which  makes  it  possible  for 
me  to  recognise  the  things  as  known  before 
and  the  old  knower  as  identical  with  the  present 
knower,  implies  really  the  presence  of  old  ideas. 
How  could  these  old  ideas  come  ?  To  the  self 
which  lost  both  its  self-consciousness  and  object- 
consciousness  everything  must  appear  new.  To 
one  who  lost  the  old,  the  old  can  never 
come.  That  the  old  ideas  have  come  back,  con- 
clusively proves  that  they  were  not  lost,  that 
neither  self-consciousness  nor  object-conscious- 
ness was  really  lost,  that  the  self  did  not  become 
an  empty  receptacle.  It  is  proved  that  self-cons- 
ciousness, with  which  object  consciousness  is  in- 
separably blended,  though  it  does  not  manifest 
itself  in  the  form  of  the  individual  consciousness 
in  dreamless  sleep,  yet  remains  intact  in  that 
state,  otherwise  it  could  not  manifest  itself  again, 
as  it  does,  in  the  state  of  waking.  The  reader  will, 
it  is  hoped,  now  see  the  error  of  M^yavdda.  He 
will  see  that  though  both  the  Sensationalist  and 
the  Subjective  Idealist  make  much  of  the  "associa- 
tion of  ideas",  they  really  do  not  understand  its 
full  significance.  They  think  that  such  associa- 
tion is  possible  to  a  sleeping  and  forgetful  self, 
and  that  such  abstract  and  impossible  'association' 


II  WHAT    THE    'association    OF    IDEAS*    IMPLIES  I07 

is  the  basis  of  memory  and  experience.  But  this 
is  a  palpable  mistake.  What  can  the  'association 
of  ideas'  mean  to  one, — how  is  it  possible  to  one — ■ 
who  forgets  ideas  at  every  step,  who  loses  them 
and  even  the  consciousness  of  his  own  self  ?  How 
can  ideas  remain  associated  or  united  in  him 
who  at  every  step  becomes  devoid  of  ideas  ? 
Unless  the  objects  of  knowledge  are  indissolubly 
united  in  an  ever-waking  and  unforgetful  Self 
and  unless  this  Self  manifests  itself  in  our  indivi- 
dual life,  nothing  like  experience  and  memory  is 
at  all  possible.* 

We  have  already  said  that  the  consciousness 
that  forms  the  essence  of  our  life  is  not  dependent 
on  our  individual  will.  We  have  also  said  that 
what  we  call  our  individual  consciousness  is  not 
absolutely  individual.  Perhaps  the  reader  has 
now  got  a  glimpse  of  this  truth.  A  glimpse, 
however,  is  not  enough.  What  we  have  said 
briefly  in  this  section,  we  shall  explain  more  fully 
in  the  next.  We  shall  try  to  show  clearly  that 
knowledge  is  eternal,  that  it  has  neither  begin- 
ning nor  end,  and  that  not  a  particle  of  it  can 
ever  be  lost. 

*  See  Caird's  Philosophy  of  Kant  (old  edition)  p.  285, 
p.  452  and  sundry  other  places.  Also  Sankara's  commen- 
tary on  the  Brahma  Sutras,  II.  2.  31. 


I08  KNOWLEDGE  AND  WILL  CHAP. 

Section  3 — Knowledge  and  Will 
To  understand  the  truth  that  an  Eternal  Con- 
sciousness— ever- waking  and  unforgetting — is  at 
the  basis  of  our  life,  it  must  at  first  be  clearly 
seen  that  our  knowing — the  appearance  and  dis- 
appearance of  sensation,  memory,  and  under- 
standing in  our  life,  our  waking  and  sleep- 
ing— is  not  due  to  our  individual  volitions.  Our 
individual  volitions  are  dependent  on  sensation, 
memory  and  understanding,  in  a  word,  on  know- 
ledge. First  knowledge,  then  volition.  It 
is  impossible  for  the  will,  i.e.  the  mind  conceived 
as  capable  of  acting,  to  put  forth  a  volition 
unless  it  knows,  unless  it  understands.  It  is  there- 
fore evident  that  the  manifestation  of  knowledge 
in  our  life, — the  appearance  of  sensation,  memory 
and  understanding— is  not  dependent  on  our  indi- 
vidual volitions.  The  wonder  is  that  we  are  so 
blind  to  this  truth,  though  it  is  so  obvious.  We 
speak  so  egotistically  of  "my  knowledge",  "my 
understanding",  and  "my  life",  as  if  these  matters 
depended  on  our  individual  volitions,  as  if  our 
own  will  were  the  creator  of  our  knowledge,  un- 
derstanding and  life.  It  is  this  blind  egotism  that 
keeps  off  from  us  the  true  knowledge  of  God  and 
a  clear  realisation  of  his  presence.  However,  let 
us  discuss  a  little  the  truth  just  mentioned. 


II  KNOWLEDGE    NOT    SUBJECT   TO   WILL  IO9 

That  we  see,  hear  and  feel — that  these  innu- 
merable sensations  of  colour,  taste,  smell,  sound 
and  touch,  and  emotions  of  pleasure,  pain,  love, 
reverence  &c.  are  entering  our  mind  and  making 
our  life  possibe — are  these  dependent  on  our 
will  ?  Do  we  create  them  by  our  respective  voli- 
tions ?  It  is  evident  that  such  is  not  the  case.  Our 
individual  will  is  utterly  inactive  as  to  the  rise 
of  these  phenomena.  These  mental  events  must 
occur  first  before  our  will  can  act.  That  these 
diversified  phenomena  are  appearing  before  our 
mind  day  after  day,  moment  after  moment,  that 
wonderful  scenes  are  being  enacted  day  by  day 
and  moment  by  moment  on  the  stage  of  our 
mental  life  without  our  will  taking  the  least 
part  in  them — people  see  nothing  deep  and  mys- 
terious in  this.  They  do  not  pause  to  ask  who 
occupies  the  mind  and  plays  these  wonderful 
sports  with  it.  And  yet  no  other  scene  presents 
such  a  deep  significance.  However,  it  is  evident 
that  our  v/ill  has  no  hand  in  these  performances. 
When  these  phenomena  have  appeared,  our  will 
may  take  hold  of  them  and  put  forth  volitions. 
But  that  too  requires  memory.  When  once  these 
phenomena  have  disappeared,  the  will  cannot 
act  until  they  re-appear.  But  their  re-appear- 
ance is  entirely  irrespective  of  our  volitions.     We 


KNOWLEDGE   AND    WILL  CHAP. 

cannot  bring  them  back  by  our  will.  To  forget 
a  thing  is  for  it  to  be  "out  of  mind",  and  on 
what  is  out  of  mind,  out  of  knowledge,  the  will 
cannot  act.  It  is  only  on  something  before  it 
that  the  mind  can  act.  It  will  therefore  be  seen 
on  a  little  thinking  that  the  recurrence  of  ideas 
to  our  mind — our  remembrance — does  not 
depend  on  our  will.  If  it  is  due  to  any  body's 
will,  it  is  the  will  of  One  in  whose  hand  our  mind 
is,  who  nev4r  forgets  anything  and  who  is  play- 
ing with  the  mind  the  solemn  sport  of  forgetting 
and  remembering.  Like  perception,  memory  too 
seems  to  ordinary  people  to  be  a  plain  and 
simple  thing,  without  anything  mysterious  about 
it.  But  really  it  is  a  most  wonderful  and  mys- 
terious affair.  We  are  every  moment  forgetting 
the  most  useful  things  of  life — things  which,  if 
they  did  not  return  to  memory,  would  make  life 
impossible.  But  in  what  a  wonderful  way  they 
are  returning  every  moment  !  When  we  are 
deeply  intent  on  some  work,  we  forget  our  very 
name,  our  residence,  our  age,  the  place  and  the 
time  in  which  we  are,  our  house,  the  furniture, 
our  family,  friends,  the  whole  of  our  acquired 
experience, — all  things,  even  the  event  that  occur- 
red last  moment.  What  would  occur  if  these 
things   did  not  recur  in  time  !  A  total  suspension 


II  MEMORY   AND   WAKING    NOT    SUBJECT   TO   WILL  III 

of  memory  would  mean  our  reduction  to  almost 
an  inert  mass  of  matter,  for  even  the  least  action 
requires  memory.  This  act  of  writing  on  my 
part  would  be  impossible  if  the  memory  of  these 
writing  materials,  which  was  absent  a  moment 
before,  did  not  occur  in  time,  if  the  knowledge 
acquired  before  did  not  flow  into  the  mind 
moment  by  moment.  That  memory  which  is  so 
important  to  life,  without  which  life  would  be 
impossible,  is  not  in  the  hands  of  our  will.  In 
whose  hands  it  is,  we  shall  see  by  and  by. 

And  then,  waking  from  sleep  is  even  a  more 
mysterious  affair  than  perception  and  memory, 
and  yet  to  most  people  habit  divests  it  of  its 
mysteriousness.  In  profound  dreamless  sleep, 
perception,  memory,  and  even  self-consciousness 
disappear.  There  is  nothing  that  strikes  at 
a  man's  pride  so  much  as  sleep,  if  only  he 
understands  its  significance.  It  shows  clearly 
how  very  dependent  man  is.  The  wise  and  the 
ignorant,  the  rich  and  the  poor,  the  strong  and 
the  weak, — all  are  equally  helpless  and  depend- 
ent in  this  condition.  However,  to  awake  from 
it,  to  return  from  unconsciousness  to  conscious- 
ness, is  entirely  beyond  the  power  of  our  will, — 
sleep  comes  and  goes  independently  of  our  will. 
We  may  help — only  help  and  do  nothing  more — 


112  TIME  AND  EVENTS  CHAP. 

the  approach  of  sleep  by  voluntarily  making  our 
limbs  still  and  composing  our  thoughts,  but 
awaking  is  entirely  independent  of  our  will.  In 
sleep  we  lose  the  knowledge  both  of  our  body 
and  mind — our  very  self-consciousness  ;  any 
exercise  of  our  voluntary  powers  in  it  is  therefore 
out  of  the  question.  But  how  wonderfully  re- 
appears the  consciousness,  with  its  contents,  that 
had  vanished  !  It  might  as  well  not  re-appear 
at  all.  The  gates  of  conscious  life  that  were 
closed  might  not  open  again.  It  is  not  in  our 
power  to  re-open  them.  But  they  do  re-open. 
The  self-consciousness  and  object-consciousness 
that  had  vanished  re-manifest  themselves  and 
re-enact  the  scenes  of  conscious  life.  That  the 
agent  of  this  act  cannot  himself  sleep,  but 
must  be  ever- waking,  we  have  already  seen  in 
some  degree  ;  but  it  is  necessary  to  explain  this 
truth  at  greater  length. 

Section  4 — Time  and  Events* 

To  understand  that  knowledge  is   an   eternal 
reality, — that  there  was  no  time  when  knowledge 

*  See  Green's  Lectures  on  the  Philosophy  of  Kant  in  the 
second  volume  of  his  works,  pp.  72-81,  "The  Empirical 
Reality  of  Time."  See  also  an  inconsistency  of  Kant  on 
the  subject  of  time  pointed  out  in  Sec.  F,  of  the  same 
lectures,  pp.  50-57. 


II  RELATION    OF    TIME    TO    KNOWLEDGE  II3 

was  not,  that  no  time  comes  when  knowledge 
ceases  to  exist,  and  that  no  time  will  come  when 
knowledge  will  pass  away— we  must  understand 
the  relation  of  time  to  knowledge.  Those  who 
do  not  acknowledge  the  eternality  of  knowledge, 
those  who  think  that  knowledge  begins  with  the 
origin  of  animal  organisms,  that  the  knowledge 
of  living  beings  ceases  to  exist  at  times,  or  that  the 
source  and  cause  of  the  world  is  something  that 
was  unconscious  once,  became  conscious  at  some 
undefined  time,  and  may  or  will  become  un- 
conscious at  some  other  undefinable  time, — the 
fundamental  error  of  these  thinkers  is  that  they 
suppose  time  to  be  independent  of  knowledge — 
imagine  that  there  can  be  time  without  con- 
sciousness. We  now  proceed  to  show  their  error. 
We  have  already  seen  that  space  and  all  objects 
in  space  depend  on  knowledge.  If  we  can  show 
now  that  time  and  all  events  in  time  is  depend- 
ent on  knowledge,  all  nature  will  be  seen  to  be 
within  knowledge  and  the  foundations  of  Ideal- 
ism,— those  of  true  Theology — will  be  firmly 
laid.  In  the  present  section  we  shall  discuss  the 
nature  of  time,  and  in  the  next  the  relation  of 
time  to  knowledge. 

Space    means    the     relation     of    'here'    and 
'there' — the  connection    of  different   parts.     The 


114  TIME    AND    EVENTS 

elements  are  nothing  apart  from  the  connection 
and  the  connection  nothing  apart  from  the 
elements.  Space  consists  in  the  connection  of 
infinite  parts  ;  and  the  necessary  condition  of 
this  connection  is  consciousness.  The  reader  has 
known  this  already  with  reference  to  space.  As 
space  is  something  implying  relation,  so  is  time. 
Time  is  the  relation  of  'now'  and  'then'.  The 
reader  may  say  that  as  'now'  itself  implies  time, 
there  is  no  need  of  its  relation  to  'then'.  But 
the  fact  is  that  mere  'now'  means  nothing. 
Apart  from  its  relation  to  'then',  'now'  has  no 
meaning.  'After'  is  meaningless  without 
relation  to  'before',  and  'before'  has  no  meaning 
without  relation  to  'after'.  It  is  only  the  re- 
lation of  'now'  and  'then',  'before'  and 
'after'  that  is  called  time.  Without  relation  to 
one  another  'now'  and  'then',  'before'  and  'after' 
are  meaningless,  and  the  relation  itself  is 
meaningless  without  the  related  facts  'now'  and 
'then',  'before'  and  'after'.  Time  is  a  purely 
relative  term.  It  is  meaningless  except  as  a 
relation  between  'now'  and  'then',  'before'  and 
'after.'  'Now'  and  'then',  'before'  and  'after'  are  not 
mere  abstract  terms  ;  they  imply  events  and  have 
no  meaning  except  with  reference  to  events.  'Now' 
and  'then'   mean   'this    event'    and  'that   event' ; 


II  TIME   MEANINGLESS    WITHOUT    EVENTS  II5 

'before'  and  'after'  mean  an  antecedent  and  a 
sequent  event.  It  may  seem  to  the  reader  at 
times  as  if  'now'  and  'then',  'before'  and  'after' 
could  have  a  meaning  even  without  reference  to 
events — as  if  "the  event  has  happened  now" 
might  mean  that  'now'  has  some  meaning  even 
without  the  event ;  but  on  thinking  a  little,  he 
will  see  that  'now'  has  no  meaning  except  with 
reference  to  the  event.  Events  indeed  may  be 
of  various  kinds  ;  but  of  whatever  kind  they  may 
be,  'now'  vi/ill  apply  to  each.  From  this  it  may 
seem  as  if  'now'  were  some  thing  general  and 
events  only  particulars, — as  if  'now'  and  'this 
event  occurring  now'  were  not  the  same  thing. 
But  in  fact  the  general  has  no  meaning  apart 
from  the  particular.  An  event  may  be  of  any 
kind,  but  without  some  event  or  other  'now'  has 
no  meaning.  Many  a  time  comes  when  no  ex- 
ternal e^'ent — no  event  relating  to  the  world  in 
space — takes  place.  It  may  seem  at  such  a  time 
as  if  'now'  has  a  meaning  even  apart  from  events  ; 
but  even  at  such  a  time  events  do  occur.  At 
such  a  time,  a  flow  of  thoughts  passes  through  our 
minds  and  it  is  this  which  gives  the  meaning  to 
'now.'  Through  the  want  of  the  power  of  in- 
trospection we  fail  to  recognise  these  events  as 
events.     The  reader  therefore  sees   that   the   real 


H6  TIME    AND    EVENTS 


CHAP. 


meaning  of  'now'  and  'then',  'before'  and  'after', 
is  'an  antecedent  event'  and  'a  sequent  event', 
and  that  without  reference  to  events  these  words 
and  phrases  mean  nothing.  Consequently  the 
relation  of  things  or  facts  we  call  time  has  events 
for  its  related  facts.  Time  =  the  relation  of 
antecedents  and  sequents.  Time  is  nothing 
apart  from  events.  An  eventless  time  is  an  un- 
meaning and  impossible  thing.  On  the  other 
hand,  a  timeless  event  is  also  an  unmeaning  and 
impossible  thing.  We  have  already  said  that 
a  relation  is  nothing  apart  from  the  objects 
related,  and  the  related  objects  themselves  are 
nothing  apart  from  the  relation.  It  is  the  objects 
that  give  a  meaning  to  the  relation,  and  it  is  the 
relation  that  gives  meaning  to  the  objects. 

All  events  happen  in  time  ;  'happening'  means 
happening  in  time.  Every  event  is  an  event 
happening  now  or  then,  but  'an  event  happening 
now'  has  no  meaning  apart  from  its  relation  to 
'an  event  happening  then  ;  and  vice  versa.  Every 
event  therefore  is  related  to  other  events  as  antece- 
dent or  sequent,— there  can  be  no  event  which  is 
not  so  related.  An  event  unrelated  to  other  events 
is  one  that  does  not  happen  in  time,  that  is,  does 
not  happen  at  all.  'Happening',  as  we  have  seen, 
means  happening  in  time,  and  a    timeless   event 


n  'an  absolutely  first  event'  117 

is  an  unmeaning  and  impossible  thing.  What 
we  are  trying  to  explain  is  a  self-evident  truth, 
and  such  a  truth  is  seen  as  self-evident  as  soon 
as  its  meaning  is  comprehended.  It  is  only  to 
one  who  does  not  realise  its  meaning  that  it 
appears  to  be  not  a  truth.  The  reader  has  only 
to  read  thoughtfully  a  number  of  times  what  has 
been  said  on  the  subject,  and  its  truth  will  be 
evident  to  him. 

It  follows  from  what  has  been  said — we  men- 
tion it  only  to  make  it  explicit — that  there  can 
be  no  event  which  is  absolutely  first  or  absolutely 
last.  A  particular  series  of  events — one  before 
which  other  events  have  occurred  and  after  which 
other  events  will  occur — may  indeed  have  a  first 
or  a  last  event.  Of  the  series  a,  b,  c,  d, — a  may 
be  the  first  and  d  the  last ;  but  an  event  before 
which  no  other  event  has  at  all  happened,  or  after 
which  no  other  event  will  at  all  happen,  is  an 
impossibility.  We  can  indeed  talk  of  such  an 
event  just  as  we  have  already  spoken  of  and 
may  speak  of  several  other  absurd  and  self- 
■  contradictory  things ;  but  that  we  can  talk  of 
such  a  thing  does  not  make  it  any  the  less 
absurd  and  self-contradictory.  An  absolutely 
first  event  is  one  before  which  no  other  event 
has   happened ;  it   is   a   sequent  unrelated  to  an 


ii8 


TIME    AND    EVENTS  CHAP. 


antecedent.  But  a  sequent,  as  we  have  seen,  is 
unmeaning  without  reference  to  an  antecedent. 
Consequently  the  event  in  question  is  not  an 
absolutely  first  event,  but  has  an  antecedent. 
But  the  reader  will  perhaps  say  that  we  are 
arguing  in  a  circle  or  fighting  against  an  enemy 
created  by  ourselves.  He  will  perhaps  say,  "Why 
call  the  event  in  question  a  sequent  ?  If  it  were 
a  sequent,  it  would  indeed  be  necessarily  related 
to  an  antecedent."  But  really  we  are  helpless 
in  the  matter.  'An  absolutely  first  event'  can 
mean  nothing  but  one  before  which  no  other 
event  has  occurred.  It  has  therefore  a  'before,' 
and  if  a  'before,' — an  antecedent  time, — then  an 
antecedent  event  also,  for  an  antecedent  time 
has  no  meaning  without  an  antecedent  event.  As 
we  have  already  seen,  time  without  events  is  un- 
meaning and  impossible.  It  is  therefore  evident 
that  'a  first  event'  can  mean  only  'the  first 
event  of  a  particular  series.'  'No  other  event 
has  happened  before  this'  can  only  mean  that 
no  event  of  this  particular  series  or  kind  has 
preceded  it.  Events  belonging  to  other  series 
or  of  other  kinds  must  have  happened.  An 
absolutely  first  event,  before  which  no  other 
event  whatever  happened,  is  something  self- 
contradictory  and  impossible. 


J 


II  'an  absolutely  last  event'  119 

Like  an  absolutely  first  event,  an  absolutely 
last  event  also  is  an  impossibility.  xA.n  absolutely 
last  event  is  an  event  after  which  no  other  event 
happens,  that  is,  which  has  an  'after',  but  not  a 
sequent.  But  'after'  has  no  meaning  apart  from 
an  event,  an  eventless  time  being  unmeaning  and 
impossible.  An  absolutely  last  event,  an  event 
after  which  no  other  event  occurs,  is  therefore 
an  impossibility.  In  this  case  also  as  in  the 
preceding,  it  is  to  be  remarked  that  with  re- 
ference to  a  particular  series  or  kind  of  events 
it  may  indeed  be  said  that  no  other  event 
happened  or  will  happen  after  it.  But  that 
events  of  other  series  or  kinds  happened  or 
will  happen  after  it,  is  a  necessity.  An  absolutely 
last  event  is  something  self-contradictory  and 
impossible. 

One  more  truth  needs  to  be  made  explicit. 
We  have  seen  that  time  without  events  is  un- 
meaning and  impossible,  so  that  there  can  be  no 
time  in  which  no  event  occurs,  and  there  cannot 
be  an  absolutely  first  or  an  absolutely  last  event. 
It  is  also  clear  then  that  between  two  events 
there  can  be  no  time  when  no  event  occurs. 
Such  a  time  is  an  eventless  time,  a  relation 
without  related  objects,  and  is  therefore  some- 
thing  self-contradictory    and     impossible.      The 


120  TIME   AND   EVENTS  CHAP. 

existence  of  time  means  the  existence  of  events 
happening  in  time.  B,  instead  of  happening 
immediately  after  A,  may  happen  long  after 
it  ;  but  in  that  case  a  number  of  events  must 
happen  in  the  time  intervening  between  A  and  B, 
whether  those  events  are  or  are  not  of  the  same 
kind  as  A  and  B,  or  else  this  intervening  time 
has  no  meaning  whatever.  If  nothing  happens 
immediately  after  A,  then  it  has  an  'after',  but 
no  sequent.  Similarly,  if  nothing  happens 
immediately  before  B,  it  follows  that  it  has  an 
antecedent  time  without  an  antecedent  event. 
But  we  have  already  seen  that  'before'  and  'after' 
have  no  meaning  without  antecedent  and 
sequent  events.  It  is  therefore  evident  that  there 
can  be  no  time  without  events, — not  a  moment 
when  some  event  or  other  does  not  happen. 

We  saw  before  that  there  cannot  be  an  abso- 
lutely first  event — an  event  with  empty,  un- 
occupied time  before  it.  We  have  then  seen  that 
there  cannot  be  an  absolutely  last  event, — an 
event  with  unoccupied  time  after  it.  We  have 
seen,  to  put  the  matter  briefly,  that  all  time 
must  be  filled, — filled  with  events.  Now,  from 
these  truths  the  inference  follows  that  events 
form  an  infinite  series — a  series  without  be- 
ginning  and   end.     No   event   included   in    this 


MEANING   OF     INFINITE    TIME 


endless  series  is  unrelated  or  independent  ;  each 
is  necessarily  related  to  each.  That  'time  is 
infinite'  is  true  in  two  senses.  It  means,  first, 
that  events  form  an  infinite  series.  It  means, 
secondly,  that  he  who  is  the  necessary  condition 
of  this  relation,  the  cause  and  support  of  this 
infinite  series  of  events,  is  himself  infinite,  that 
is  eternal.  But  we  only  mention  this  truth 
here  ;  we  shall  explain  it  in  its  proper  place. 

Section  5 — Knowledge  and  Time* 

Having  seen  v/hat  time  means,  let  us  now 
discuss  the  relation  of  knowledge  to  it.  At  the 
very  beginning  of  this  discussion,  let  us  remind 
the  reader  of  the  conclusion  of  our  first  chapter, 
that  on  self  and  not-self.  Whatever  we  know, 
knew  or  shall  know,  whatever  we  think,  thought, 
shall  think  or  can  think,^ — everything  whose 
existence  is  believable^ — depends  on  knowledge. 
Events  therefore  depend  on  knowledge.  Every 
event  is  either  the  appearance  or  disappearance 
of  objects  of  knowledge  ;  consequently  all  events, 
present,  past  and  future,  are  objects  of  knowledge. 
Events    may    be    of   two    kinds.       One    kind    of 

*  See  Green's  Prolegomena  to  Ethics,  Chaps.  I  and  II, 
and  Green's  Lectures  on  the  Philosophy  of  Kant  (in  his 
Works  Vol.  II),  Sees.  C,  F  and  I.  See  also  Caird's  Philosophy 
of  Kant  (old  edition),  Part  Second,  Chaps,  v— ix. 


KNOWLEDGE    A\D   TIME  CHAP. 

events  happens  in  things  in  space,  for  instance 
my  act  of  writing.  Writing  is  possible  only  in 
connection  with  paper,  pen  and  ink,  and  all 
these  objects  are  in  space.  Events  of  this  class 
are  called  physical  actions  or  events.  There  is 
another  kind  of  actions  which  have  no  relation 
to  space,  at  any  rate  no  direct  relation,  for 
example  hearing  among  sensuous  actions,  and 
the  rise  of  such  purely  internal  feelings  as 
pleasure,  pain,  love,  hate.  But  both  these  kinds 
of  events  depend  on  knowledge. 

One  word  more  before  we  proceed  to  our 
main  discussion.  The  reader  has  already  become 
somewhat  familiar  with  the  thing  'sensation'. 
There  is  only  one  word  more  to  be  said  about  it. 
Sensation  has  two  forms.  The  one  is  its  rise  in 
particular  times  and  in  relation  to  particular 
antecedents.  In  this  form  we  shall  speak  of  it 
as  only  an  'event'.  The  other  is  the  form  in 
which  it  exists  unchanged  as  the  object  of  the 
unchangeable  conscious  self,  as  eternally  related 
to  it.  In  this  form  we  shall  often  speak  of  it 
as  'knowledge  of  events'.  Gradually  the  reader 
will  see  the  distinction  of  these  two  forms  of 
sensation. 

The  reader  has  seen  that  time  is  nothing 
apart   from    events    and    that  events  cannot  exist 


H  TIME    DEPENDS    ON    KNOWLEDGE  1 23 

apart  from  knowledge.  It  has  also  been  shewn 
that  events  form  an  infinite  series,  and  that  this 
infinite  series  of  events  is  internally  related,  no 
event  being  unrelated  to  another.  It  follows 
therefore  that  there  was  no  time  when  knowledge 
was  not,  and  that  no  time  will  come  when  there 
will  be  no  knowledge.  And  we  get  also  a 
glimpse  of  the  truth  that  this  knowledge,  with- 
out beginning  and  without  end,  is  one  and 
indivisible.  There  was  no  time  when  there  were 
no  events ;  but  events  depend  on  knowledge  ; 
therefore  there  was  no  time  when  there  was  no 
knowledge.  No  time  will  come  when  there  will 
be  no  events ;  but  events  imply  knowledge  ; 
therefore,  no  time  will  come  when  there  will  be 
no  knowledge.  All  events  are  mutually  related  ; 
but  objects  cannot  be  related  or  connected  unless 
there  is  something  common  in  them  to  connect 
them.  In  this  case  knowledge  or  consciousness 
is  that  common  link.  Consciousness,  though 
one  and  indivisible,  experiences  different  sensa- 
tions. Consciousness  therefore  is  the  uniting 
principle  of  events,  the  condition  of  the  relation 
we  call  time.  All  events  are  connected, — past, 
present  and  future  are  all  linked  together  in 
time ;  knowledge  or  consciousness  therefore  is 
one.     That  knowledge    is    the    uniting   principle 


124  KNOWLEDGE  AND  TIME  CHAP. 

of  events,  the  forger  of  the  chain  of  time,  and 
therefore  free  from  it,  transcending  it, — that  it 
is  unborn,  eternal  and  undying, — we  now  proceed 
to  explain  somewhat  more  fully. 

Let  us  suppose  that  four  events,  a,  b,  c,  d, 
occur ;  for  instance,  I  look  at  these  four  figures 
successively,  or  touch  this  piece  of  paper  four 
times,  one  after  another.  That  there  was  know- 
ledge before  the  first  of  these  events  occurred, 
that  other  events  occurred  before  it  and  that 
it  is  connected  with  them,  the  reader  already 
knows.  But  we  do  not  count  those  events  as 
belonging  to  this  series,  and  so  have  nothing  to 
say  of  them.  However,  consciousness,  let  us 
suppose,  which  existed  before  the  fiist  of  this 
series,  knows  this  event,  that  is,  it  manifests 
itself  as  a  sensation.  Consciousness  is  necessary 
even  for  this  first  event.  Then,  for  the  second 
event  to  occur  after  the  first,  it  is  necessary  that 
the  knower  of  the  first  should  also  know  the 
second  and  when  knowing  it  remember  the  first. 
The  firstness  of  the  first  and  the  secondness  of  the 
second  both  depend  on  this  unity  of  conscious- 
ness and  this  recollection.  Unless  the  first  and 
the  second  were  thus  related,  the  first  would  not 
be  first  and  the  second  second,  for  'first,'  'second', 
&c.,  are  all  correlative  terms.     And  their  correla- 


II  CONSCIOUSKESS    MAKES   TIME  1 25 

tion  depends  upon  the  unity  of  knowledge.  Unless 
antecedent  and  sequent,  first  and  second,  were 
united  in  one  consciousness — in  one  indivisible 
act  of  knowing — their  antecedence  and  sequence, 
their  firstness  and  secondness,  would  have  no 
meaning.  If,  with  the  passing  away  of  the  first 
event,  its  knowledge  too  had  passed  away,  had 
disappeared  altogether,  the  firstness  of  the  first 
and  the  secondness  of  the  second  would  have 
been  impossible.  It  is  because  the  knower  did  not 
change  or  pass  away  with  the  event,  but  remain- 
ing unchanged  connected  the  remembrance  of 
the  first  event  with  the  second,  that  the  second- 
ness of  the  second  became  possible.  Similarly, 
the  occurrence  of  the  third  event  also  depends 
upon  the  same  consciousness,  and  it  is  because 
the  latter  remained  unchanged  and  connected 
the  recollection  of  the  first  and  the  second  event 
with  the  third,  that  its  thirdness  became  possible. 
The  same  holds  good  of  the  fourth  and  the 
following  events.  The  reader  therefore  sees  that 
consciousness  is  the  real  maker  of  time  or  the 
chain  of  events.  In  the  first  place,  the  very 
possibility  of  an  event  depends  on  consciousness. 
In  the  second  place,  as  events  are  in  their  very 
nature  fugitive,  occurring  this  moment  and 
passing  away    in   the    next,  time  as  a  relation  or 


126  KNOWLEDGE    AND    TIME 

events  as  a  series  would  never  be  possible  unless 
the  recollection  of  such  fugitive  objects  persisted 
in  a  conscious  self.  Unless  it  so  persisted,  re- 
lations like  'before'  and  'after',  'now'  and  'then' 
would  not  be  possible  at  all.  It  is  because  the 
knowledge  of  'before'  persists,  that  'after'  be- 
comes possible.  It  is  because  the  knowledge  of 
'now'  does  not  pass  away  even  when  'now' 
passes  away,  that  'then'  becomes  possible.  It 
will  thus  be  seen  that  knowledge  is  the  support 
and  cause  of  time.  It  is  the  relation  of  'now' 
and  'then,'  of  'before'  and  'after,'  of  'past'  and 
'present,'  that  we  call  time.  But  it  is  only  con- 
sciousness— consciousness  that  persists  and  does 
not  pass  away — that  can  establish  this  relation. 
'Before'  and  'after'  can  be  connected  by  that 
alone  w^hich  does  not  pass  away  with  the  lapse 
of  events,  which,  in  losing  'before'  does  not  lose 
itself,  which,  even  when  the  antecedent  is  past, 
keeps  hold  of  its  knowledge  and  connects  it  with 
the  knowledge  of  the  sequent.  It  is  conscious- 
ness alone  which  can  do  all  this  ;  consciousness 
therefore  is  the  support  of  the  relation,  the  maker 
of  the  chain,  which  we  call  time. 

Now,  it  is  evident  from  what  we  have  already 
said  that  the  maker  of  the  chain  of  time,  the 
cause    and  condition  of  the  relation  we  call  time. 


n  CONSCIOUSNESS   ABOVE   TIME  1 27 

cannot  itself  be  in  time, — subject  to  time.  Con- 
sciousness cannot  be  one  of  the  things  whose 
relation  we  call  time.  That  without  relation  to 
which  events  cannot  occur,  whose  persistence 
and  unchangeableness  is  itself  the  cause  and 
condition  of  changes  taking  place  and  forming 
a  series,  cannot  itself  come  into  being  and  pass 
away.  What  we  call  the  birth,  life,  and  death 
of  a  conscious  being  are  events  or  series  of  events 
requiring  consciousness.  Consciousness  being  the 
cause  and  condition  of  these  events,  it  must  it- 
self be  above  birth,  death  and  change.  It  is 
clear  therefore  that  the  Consciousness  which 
forms  the  essence  of  our  life,  which  manifests 
itself  as  the  light  and  support  of  all  that  we 
know,  which,  taking  the  form  of  an  infinite 
variety  of  sensations,  and  uniting  them  with  its 
synthetic  power,  manifests  itself  as  this  wonder- 
ful world,  which  disappears  in  sleep  and  oblivion 
irrespectively  of  our  individual  volitions,  and 
re-appearing  in  awakening  and  memory  in  the 
same  involuntary  way  forms  the  web  of  our 
conscious  life,  which  we  mistake  for  and  take 
pride  in  as  merely  our  individual  consciousness,  but 
which  is  entirely  independent  of  our  individual 
volitions  and  the  very  root  of  our  voluntary 
activity — this    Consciousness,    we    say,  is  unborn, 


128  KNOWLEDGE    AND    TIME 

undying,  eternal,  without  beginning  and  without 
end.  That  our  individual  lives  have  a  beginning, 
is  doubtless.  But  what  does  this  beginning  mean  ? 
It  means  the  beginning  of  a  series  of  events, 
not  the  beginning  of  the  consciousness  forming 
the  cause  and  support  of  this  series.  This  con- 
sciousness existed  before  the  beginning  of  this 
series.  The  events  preceding  this  series,  though 
not  belonging  to  it,  are  necessarily  connected 
with  it,  and  the  condition  of  this  connection  is 
the  unity  of  consciousness.  The  preceding  events 
are  related  to  this  series  as  its  antecedents,  and 
this  relation  would  be  impossible  unless  the 
consciousness  forming  the  support  of  this  series 
were  identical  with  that  forming  the  support 
of  the  other.  It  is  evident  therefore  that  this 
Consciousness  is  without  beginning,  eternal.  That 
it  is  without  end,  undying,  needs,  we  hope,  no 
separate  proof ;  the  truth  will  be  evident  if  the 
line  of  argument  given  above  be  applied  to  it. 
Let  the  reader  think  how  great  a  thing  each  one 
of  us  is  holding  in  his  bosom, — how  great  a  thing 
is  manifesting  itself  with  everyone  of  our  sensa- 
tions, thoughts,  feelings  and  actions  !  Let  him 
think  of  this  and  wonder.  He  who  is  the  support 
of  the  infinite  variety  of  events  which  science 
speaks  of,  he  who  is  the  actor  of  that   grand   and 


GOD    IK    MAN  I2g 

wonderful  drama,  is  manifest  here  as  the  maker 
of  this  small  drama  of  my  life.  He  who  held 
and  whirled  in  his  hand  the  fiery  gas  from  which 
the  present  universe  arose,  who  scattered  un- 
numbered suns,  planets  and  satellites  in  infinite 
space,  who  is  bringing  out  millions  over  millior.s 
of  cosmic  phenomena  through  millions  and 
millions  of  years,  who  is  creating,  preserving  and 
destroying  millions  of  living  beings,  who  is  lead- 
ing the  world  on  through  endless  stages  of  pro- 
gress— it  is  that  infinite  Wisdom  and  Power 
which  shines  here  as  my  consciousness — as  the 
support  of  my  life !  We  need  not  say  more. 
If  the  reader  thoughtfully  reads  what  we  have 
said  above,  he  will  see  that  we  indulge  in  no 
poetic  fancy,  that  our  words  are  not  a  baseless 
and  passing  outburst  of  sentiment,  but  that 
they  are  necessary  truths  from  which  no  escape 
is  possible. 

Section  6 — The  Omniscience  of  God 

From  the  exposition  given  above  of  the  truth 
that  consciousness  is  the  maker  of  the  chain  of 
time,  the  source  of  the  stream  of  events  consti- 
tuting the  world,  it  follows  clearly  that  God  is 
omniscient.  We  have  shewn  that  though  events 
are  passing,  the    knowledge    of   events   does   not 

9 


130  THE    OMNISCIENCE   OF    GOD  CHAP. 

pass,  but  is  permanent.  As  we  have  seen,  events 
such  as  a,  b,  c,  d,  occur  successively,  but  the 
knowledge  of  each  of  them  persists,  and  uniting 
with  the  knowledge  of  the  sequent  makes  it 
possible  for  us  to  know  that  it  is  the  sequent. 
Though  events  pass  away,  their  knowledge  per- 
sists as  a  permanent  property  of  the  knower. 
Let  the  reader  now  understand  clearly  the  dis- 
tinction of  events  and  the  knowledge  of  events. 
Events  pass  away,  but  the  knowledge  of  events 
does  not  pass,  but  persists.  Events  indeed  cannot 
happen  without  relation  to  consciousness,  but  the 
very  nature  of  an  event  is  that  it  is  now,  but  the 
next  moment  is  not ;  one  moment's  event  does 
not  last  the  next  moment,  which  comes  with 
a  fresh  event.  The  stream  of  events  is  more 
rapid  than  even  that  of  a  most  rapidly 
flowing  river.  The  water  of  such  a  river  does 
not  stop  more  than  a  moment  in  a  single  spot. 
Even  so  is  the  stream  of  events, — events  following 
events  moment  after  moment.  But  the  knowledge 
of  events  does  not  pass  away.  While  the  stream 
of  events  flows,  their  knowledge  stands  still  as 
it  were  on  the  banks :  it  does  not  flow  with 
them.  Events  are  related  to  one  another  as 
antecedents  and  sequents.  Between  the  first  and 
the   last   event   of  a   series  there  is  always  some 


n  KNOWLEDGE    OF   EVENTS    NOT   AN    EVENT  I31 

distance  of  time ;  but  the  knowledge  of  these 
events  exists  in  the  self  as  an  indivisible  fact. 
It  indeed  exists  in  the  self  as  the  knowledge  of 
successive  events,  but  there  is  no  succession  of 
events,  no  distance  of  time,  in  it.  The  events  are 
successive,  but  there  is  no  succession  in  the 
knowledge  of  successive  events.  In  fact,  unless 
the  knowledge  of  successive  events  takes  the  form 
of  an  indivisible  fact  or  act  of  knowing,  it  can- 
not be  called  a  knowledge  of  events.  It  is 
therefore  evident  that  though  events  are  subject 
to  time,  the  knowledge  of  events  is  not  so, — it  is 
not  in  time  at  all.  And  what  is  not  subject  to 
time,  not  in  time  at  all,  can  never  flow  or  pass 
away.  It  follows  therefore  that  the  knowledge 
of  events,  whether  it  is  manifested  or  not  in 
our  individual  lives,  is  imperishable,  eternal. 
When  it  is  manifested  in  individual  life,  we  see 
that  it  is  of  a  nature  opposite  to  that  of  events, 
so  that,  even  when  it  disappears  from  individual 
life,  we  do  not  suspect  that  it  will  perish.  To 
flow,  to  pass,  to  perish,  is  not  in  its  nature, — 
is  opposed  to  its  nature.  We  are  going  to  show 
at  some  length  how  the  knowledge  of  events 
known  to  us  re-appears  even  after  disappearing 
from  our  individual  life,  and  thus  proves  that 
it  is  not  an  event  or  series    of   events,    but  some- 


132  THE    OMXISCIEXCE    OF    GOD  CHAP. 

thing  timeless  and  imperishable.  But  perhaps 
the  knowledge  of  many  events  does  not  appear 
more  than  once  in  individual  life,  and  there 
is  no  certainty  that  the  knowledge  of  those 
which  have  appeared  a  number  of  times  will 
appear  again.  But  the  very  nature  of  knowledge 
is  such,  it  is  so  deeply  stamped  with  permanence, 
that  even  if  it  has  only  once  manifested  itself, 
we  know  it  to  be  imperishable.  It  is  not  indeed 
ever-present  in  our  individual  lives,  but  it 
cannot  be  doubted  that  it  exists  permanently  in 
the  one  indivisible  Consciousness  which  forms 
the  cause  and  basis  of  our  individual  lives, 
which  is  infinitely  larger  than  these  lives,  and 
in  relation  to  which  the  knowledge  of  every 
event  manifests  itself.  What  piece  of  knowledge 
indeed  remains  permanently  in  our  individual 
life  ?  We  have  shewn  that  the  Consciousness 
which  manifests  itself  as  our  life  and  knowledge, 
and  which  is  in  its  nature  a  unity-in-difference^ 
is  unborn,  undying,  and  ever-wakeful.  But  in 
sound  sleep,  we  everyday  become  entirely  un- 
conscious. At  that  time,  the  eternal  Conscious- 
ness ceases  to  manifest  itself  as  our  individual 
consciousness.  But  this  disappearance  on  its 
part  is  not  its  destruction ;  for  it  re-manifests 
itself  as  the  light  of  our   life    after    the    hours   of 


II  THE    WITNESS    OF    MEMORY  I33 

sleep.  In  the  same  manner,  the  disappearance 
of  particular  pieces  of  knowledge  is  not  their 
destruction.  As  the  fundamental  Consciousness 
remains  imperishable  and  eternal,  despite  its 
occasional  disappearance,  so  the  particular  pieces 
of  knowledge  related  to  and  identical  with  it 
— the  knowledge  of  particular  events — remain 
imperishable  in  it  despite  their  occasional  dis- 
appearance from  individual  life. 

That  particular  pieces  of  knowledge,  the 
knowledge  of  particular  events,  though  occasion- 
ally disappearing  from  our  individual  life,  do 
exist  permanently  in  the  Consciousness  which  is 
the  basis  of  our  life,  and  re-appearing  in  our 
individual  life,  make  our  individual  experience 
possible— this  we  shall  prove  and  illustrate  by  a 
few  examples. 

Suppose  I  perceive  the  table  before  me,  see 
it  and  touch  it,  and  then  going  away  from  it, 
attend  to  other  things  and  forget  it.  At  another 
moment,  let  us  suppose,  I  perceive  it  again,  or 
without  perceiving  it,  remember  it  somehow  or 
other.  Having  perceived  it,  I  recognize  it  as  the 
table  known  before,  or  having  remembered  it, 
I  see  that  it  is  the  recollection  of  the  same  table 
that  I  perceived  before.  What  makes  this  re- 
membrance   possible  ?     If    the    consciousness    of 


134  THE  OMNISCIENCE  OF  GOD  CHAP. 

objects  were  merely  an  event,  a  passing  and 
perishable  thing,  if  it  were  not  a  timeless,  im- 
perishable thing,  the  object-consciousness  that 
had  once  left  the  mind  would  never  have  returned 
to  it.  But  in  this  fact  of  recollection  we  see 
that  it  is  the  old  object-consciousness  that  has 
come  back.  Certain  fresh  events  indeed  take 
place  in  seeing  and  touching  the  table  again  ; 
but  there  is  no  doubt  that  what  has  returned 
is  the  old  knowledge.  Recollection  is  not 
possible  without  a  union  of  the  past  and  the 
present ;  but  past  time  has  passed  away  for 
ever,  and  can  never  return.  Past  events  are 
gone  for  ever,  and  it  is  fresh  events  that  are 
taking  place  in  the  present.  What,  then,  related 
to  the  past,  comes  back  and  makes  recollection 
possible?  It  is  the  knowledge  of  the  past — ^the 
knowledge  of  past  events — which  did  not  pass 
away,  did  not  perish  with  the  events— it  is  that 
timeless,  imperishable  knowledge  that  has  re- 
appeared in  the  present  and  uniting  the  old  and 
the  new  made  recollection  possible.  Events 
in  the  form  of  sensations  of  colour,  taste  etc.,  that 
had  happened  when  the  table  was  first  perceived, 
passed  away  immediately,  and  it  is  fresh  events 
that  are  happening  now.  But  if  with  the  passing 
of  those  events  the  knowledge  of  them  had  also 


II  THE   WITNESS    OF    MEMORY  I35 

perished,  if  that  knowledge  had  not  escaped  the 
lapse  of  time  and  reappeared  now,  the  knowledge 
of  the  similarity  of  the  old  and  the  new  would 
not  have  been  possible ;  consequently  there 
would  not  have  been  such  a  thing  as  recollection, 
and  in  the  absence  of  a  consciousness  of  the 
past,  the  knowledge  that  the  new  is  new,  would 
also  have  been  impossible.  The  reader  therefore 
sees  that  though  the  knowledge  of  the  past 
sometimes  leaves  our  fmite  and  forgetful  mind, 
disappears  from  our  individual  life,  it  nevertheless 
re-appears  in  the  form  of  recollection  and  declares 
its  own  imperishableness.  On  the  one  hand,  we  are 
forgetful,  and  are  every  now  and  then  forgetting 
almost  everything  connected  with  our  life  ;  but  on 
the  other  hand,  there  is  in  us  as  the  eternal  support 
of  our  life,  as  our  very  consciousness,  One  who 
forgets  nothing,  and  who  brings  back  forgotten 
things  to  us  when  they  are  needed.  If  he  did 
not  re-manifest  himself  in  us  with  the  knowledge 
of  the  past,  our  life  would  be  quite  impossible.  Life 
without  memory  is  not  life, — consciousness  without 
remembrance  is  no  consciousness.  It  is  because 
the  remembrance  of  him  who  forgets  nothing  is 
manifested  in  us,  that  our  life  becomes  possible. 
It  is  because  the  knowledge  of  the  All-knowing  is 
manifested  as  our  knowledge,  that  we  know. 


136  THE  OMNISCIEN'CE  OF  GOD  CHAP. 

As     from    a   contemplation    of   memory    and 
oblivion  it  is   seen    that,    though    our   individual 
finite   mind    is   forgetful,    the  Supreme  Self  who 
is  the  support  of  our  life,  forgets  nothing,  and  that 
our  memory  is  the  re-appearance  of  his  knowledge 
in  our  mind,  so  from  a  contemplation  of  sleep  and 
re-awaking    it   is  seen    that    though   our   indivi- 
dual life    is   subject    to    sleep,    the    Supreme  Self 
whose    consciousness   we    share    is    ever-wakeful. 
In   the    state    of  sleep,  all  our  knowledge  rests  in 
him,  and   his   re-appearance    at   its   end   as  our 
consciousness  with   that  knowledge  is  our  awak- 
ing.    Sleep  appears  to  be  the    destruction    of   all 
our   knowledge — of   self-consciousness   as  well  as 
the    consciousness    of   objects.     What   is   sleep — 
sound   sleep — unless    one   becomes     wholly     un- 
conscious ?     This  is  scarcely  a  wrong  description 
of  sleep  so  far  as  our  individual  life  is    concerned. 
In   fact   our   individual    finite  mind  becomes  un- 
conscious in  that  state,    and    knowledge    entirely 
disappears     from     our   individual   life  ;     or   else 
sound    sleep    would   have   no   meaning.     But   if 
our   individual    life    were    all-in-all,    if   the  ever- 
wakeful  Supreme    Self   were   not   the  support  of 
our   life,    our   very  consciousness,  there  would  be 
no   difference   between    sound   sleep    and    death, 
between   re-awaking  and  re-birth.      In  that  case, 


f 


THE    EVER-WAKEFUL  I 37 

our  sleep  would  be  equivalent  to  death,  and 
re-awaking  to  re-birth  or  fresh  birth.  If  the 
disappearance  of  self-consciousness  and  object- 
consciousness  in  sound  sleep  were  their  real 
destruction,  we  should,  at  the  termination  of  sleep, 
awake — or  rather  'awaking'  is  not  applicable 
here — be  created  as  fresh  beings.  In  that  case 
there  would  be  no  identity  between  self- 
consciousness  as  before  sleep  with  self-conscious- 
ness as  after  it  and  no  consciousness  of  identity 
or  similarity  between  objects  perceived  before 
sleep  and  those  perceived  after  it.  For  a  feeling 
of  identity  between  the  former  and  the  latter 
self-consciousness,  the  former  must  not  pass  away 
but  remain  intact  and  re-appear  along  with  the 
latter.  If  self-consciousness  were  to  lapse,  it 
could  not  come  back, — its  coming  back  would 
indeed  be  a  meaningless  expression.  What  would 
come  or  rise  at  a  succeeding  time  would  be  a 
fresh  thing.  That  the  same  thing  is  true  of 
object-consciousness,  has  already  been  shown. 
The  re-appearance,  therefore,  of  our  self-cons- 
ciousness and  object-consciousness  after  sleep 
proves  beyond  a  doubt  that  though  in  the  hours 
of  sound  sleep  they  do  not  appear  in  our  indi- 
vidual life,  they  are  not  then  destroyed,  but 
remain  intact  in    the   Supreme    Self   who    is   our 


138  THE   OMNISCIENCE   OF   GOD  CHAP. 

consciousness.  When  we  are  fast  asleep,  he  re- 
mains wakeful  and  holds  in  his  hand  our  entire 
conscious  life,  and  at  the  termination  of  sleep  re- 
manifests  himself  as  our  consciousness  and  there- 
by makes  us  re-awake.  It  is  this  which  makes 
possible  the  identity  of  both  our  self-consciousness 
and  object-consciousness,  in  fact  our  entire 
experience. 

If  the  knowledge  of  events  is  eternal,  it 
follows,  besides,  that  the  knowledge  of  those 
events  which  took  place  before  the  beginning  of 
our  individual  life,  existed  and  do  exist  eternally 
in  the  Supreme  Self.  The  events  to  which  history 
and  tradition  bear  testimony,  the  endless  variety 
which  the  different  sciences  discover,  the  far  far 
off  past  of  which  science  itself  knows  nothing, 
were  and  are  doubtless  objects  of  the  Infinite  and 
Eternal  Mind.  He  who  is  the  Maker  of  the  chain 
of  time,  who  unites  all  events  by  his  eternal 
knowledge,  cannot  lose  the  smallest  piece  of 
knowledge,  cannot  forget  even  the  most  fugitive 
event.  It  is  evident,  therefore,  that  though  the 
greater  part  of  the  universe  is  hidden  from  our 
individual  consciousness,  and  though  the  part 
of  it  known  disappears  from  it  every  now  and 
then,  it  is  ever-present  as  an  object  of  the  eternal 
knowledge  of  God. 


II  GOD  S    KNOWLEDGE    OF   THE   FUTURE  I39 

Since,  despite  the  transiency  of  events,  the 
knowledge  of  events  is  timeless  and  permanent, 
another  truth,  already  hinted  at,  is  proved  from  the 
same  fact.  As  the  knowledge  of  events  is  timeless, 
it  is  evident  that  it  not  only  lasts  after  events,  but 
exists  before  the  occurring  of  events.  Though 
it  appears  with  events,  it  is  not  born  with  them. 
Events  are  indeed  its  manifestations,  but  they 
are  not  its  birth  ;  it  exists  before  them.  From 
the  distinction  we  have  already  pointed  out 
between  events  and  the  knowledge  of  events,  it 
is  evident  that  the  latter  not  only  cannot  perish, 
but  cannot  be  born.  Its  very  nature  being  the 
very  reverse  of  a  flow,  a  succession, — the  relation 
called  time  not  at  all  entering  into  it, — it  can 
neither  come  into  nor  pass  out  of  existence.  It 
follows,  therefore,  that  all  that  has  happened  exist- 
ed before  its  happening  in  the  eternal  knowledge 
of  God,  and  that  all  that  will  happen  already 
exists  in  that  knowledge.  Sharing  in  a  very 
small  degree  in  the  Eternal  Consciousness,  we  know 
only  so  much  of  its  nature  and  mode  of  mani- 
festation that  an  infinite  series  of  events  has 
happened  in  the  past  and  an  infinite  series  will 
happen  in  future.  But  we  know  very  little 
what  particular  events  have  occurred  in  the  past, 
and  much  less  what  will   happen   in    the    future. 


140  THE  MYSTERY  OF  CREATION  CHAP. 

But  to  him  who  is  the  source  of  events,  the 
Maker  of  the  chain  of  time,  nothing  can  be  un- 
known. The  past  and  the  future  must  be  as 
clear  to  him  as  the  present.  Since  nothing  exists 
apart  from  him,  since  all  events  have  happened, 
are  happening  and  will  happen  in  relation  to 
him,  all  must  be  known  to  him.  From  the  fixed 
unalterable  laws  which  guide  the  actions  of 
nature,  science  infers  the  nature  of  events  that 
took  place  before  the  birth  of  sentient  beings 
and  the  rise  of  sensations.  It  records  the  childhood 
and  youth  of  the  present  world  and  makes  sure 
predictions  about  its  future.  These  laws  are 
only  the  modes  of  God's  self-manifestation, — 
the  modes  in  which  he  reveals  himself  in  the 
form  of  this  variegated  and  wonderful  world  of 
sense.  To  him,  therefore,  neither  the  past,  the 
present  nor  the  future  can  be  unknown.  He  is 
all-knowing,  all-seeing, — ever  shining  in  his  own 
eternal  light. 

Section  7 — The  Mystery  of  Creation 

We  said  in  the  beginning  of  this  chapter  that 
we  would  prove  the  eternality  of  knowledge 
and  thereby  show  the  error  of  May^vada.  The 
reader  perhaps  sees  that  error  now.  That  theory 
emphasises  only  the  aspect  of  oneness  and  eternal- 


IT  THE    FINITE    RELATIVE,    KOT    ILLUSORY  I4I 

ity  in  knowledge  ;  it  does  not  see  that  there  is  a 
necessary  duality  in  it  and  that  an  Eternal  un- 
related to  change  is  unmeaning.  We  have  shown 
the  error  of  the  M4y4  theory  by  explaining  these 
two  truths.  But  we  must  admit  that  though 
we  have  shown  the  error  of  the  May^  theory, 
we  have  not  been  able  to  explain  the  mystery 
of  creation.  It  is  indeed  evident  that  the  stream 
of  creation,  without  beginning  and  without  end, 
is  flowing  on  in  relation  to  a  Supreme  Being 
who  is  infmite,  eternal,  omniscient,  all-com- 
prehending, and  the  life  of  the  individual 
self,  its  finite  knowledge  and  power  being  a 
reflection  of  his  infinite  knowledge  and  power. 
There  can  be  no  doubt  that  the  world  and  the 
individual  self  are  relative  truths  dependent  on 
God,  and  are  not  illusions.  But  we  cannot  say 
that  we  clearly  understand  how  change  takes 
place  in  relation  to  the  Unchanging  and  the 
finite  exists  in  the  Infinite.  Creation  is  still  a 
mystery  to  us  and  we  doubt  if  man  will  ever  be 
able  fully  to  explain  this  mystery.  We  proceed 
to  show  what  the  mystery  is.  We  have  said  that 
though  the  stream  of  events  is  ever-flowing,  the 
knowledge  of  events  exists  eternally  in  the 
Supreme  Self.  Past,  present  and  future  all  exist 
in    his    knowledge.       What   has   happened     was 


142  THE  MYSTERY  OF  CREATION  CHAP. 

known  to  him  before  it  happened,  and  what  will 
happen  is  already  known  to  him.  Now,  the 
question  is,  If  it  be  so,  what  is  the  meaning  of 
happening,  of  events,  of  change  ? 

If  everything  is  ever-present  to  God,  what  is 
the  meaning  of  the  past  and  the  future  ?  What 
does  time  mean  at  all  ?  We  have  seen  that  an 
event  means  the  appearance  or  disappearance  of 
an  idea,  of  a  known  object.  But  appearance 
and  disappearance  are  impossible  to  the  eternal 
Consciousness.  To  it  everything  is  ever-present, 
ever-manifest.  For  appearance  and  disappea- 
rance, therefore,  an  individual  self  or  a  number 
of  such  selves  is  necessary.  It  is  to  such  selves 
alone — in  the  conscious  life  of  such  selves — that 
the  appearance  and  disappearance  of  the  eternal 
ideas  of  the  Divine  mind  is  possible.  Creation 
or  change,  then,  comes  to  mean  the  origination 
of  the  individual  self  from  the  Supreme  Self,  the 
continuance  of  the  stream  of  individual  life  in 
him  and,  if  possible,  its  final  merging  in  him. 
The  whole  process  of  creation — origination, 
preservation  and  dissolution — is  the  manifestation 
of  the  Universal  Life  in  the  individual,  whether 
the  individual  be  a  man,  or  some  being  higher  or 
lower  than  man.  It  was  shown  in  the  first 
chapter    that    in    the    world   of   space  there  is  no 


THE    MYSTERY    DEFIKED  I43 

such  thing  as  an  unconscious  reality.  In  this 
chapter  it  has  been  shown  that  in  the  world  of 
time  also  there  is  no  such  reality  or  any  event  which 
is  the  change  of  such  a  reality, — that  every 
change  is  a  change  that  relates  to  consciousness, 
to  God,  and  that  to  suppose  an  independent 
material  world  and  changes  in  such  a  world,  is 
due  to  ignorance.  It  will  now  be  seen  that  there 
is  a  sense  in  which  the  material  world  may  be 
called  illusory,  as  the  Mayivadin  calls  it.  But 
the  M^y^v^din  goes  further.  He  says  that  there 
has  really  been  no  creation,- — that  origination, 
preservation  and  dissolution, — all  events,  all 
changes,  are  illusory,  imaginary.  But  we  have 
shown  that  creation  is  not  imaginary,  that  events 
form  a  series  without  beginning  and  end,  and  are 
a  reality  dependent  on  God.  But  is  the  meaning 
we  have  given  to  creation,  namely  that  it  is 
the  manifestation  of  the  Divine  Life  as  the  life  of 
the  individual,  a  perfectly  intelligible  one  ?  What 
is  in  him  eternally,  he  manifests  as  the  life  of 
the  individual — he,  the  ever-manifest,  eternally 
revealed  to  himself,  manifests  himself  partly  in 
the  stream  of  time — is  not  this  a  mystery  ?  How 
does  he  who  is  eternal  manifest  himself  as  the 
changing  world  and  the  changing  life  of  the 
individual,  remaining  eternal  all  the  same  ?     How 


144  THE  MYSTERY  OF  CREATION  CHAP. 

does  he  who  is  all-knowing   appear   as    ignorant 
in  the  life  of  the  individual  ?     There    can   be   no 
doubt    that  he   does  so,  and  it  is  also  true  that  an 
Eternal  and  Infinite    unrelated    to    the    changing 
and  the  finite  is    meaningless.     Nevertheless,    the 
Eternal  becoming  changeful  and  at  the  same  time 
remaining   eternal,    the    All-knowing    becoming 
ignorant    and   at    the    same    time  remaining  all- 
knowing,  the  Infinite  becoming  finite  and   at   the 
same    time    remaining    infinite — all  this  seems  to 
involve  a  contradiction.     This   apparent   contra- 
diction   is    the    mystery   of  creation,  and  it  is  his 
failure   to    explain    this    mystery   that    leads   the 
M^y^vadin     to     call    creation     illusory,    due    to 
ignorance,  and  to  ascribe  to  God  a   power   under 
the  name  of  'Miyl'  as  the  cause  of  this  ignorance. 
He  calls  it  'May^,'  (an  illusion-producing  power) 
because    it    makes    us    mistake    as   real    what  is 
unreal.     But    the    ascription    of    such    a   power 
to  God  does  not  in  the  least  explain    the   mystery 
of  creation.     If  error  is  real,  so  is  the    individual, 
the  subject  of  error.     If  the    individual   were   un- 
real, to  whom  would  real  error  belong  ?     And  if 
the  individual  is  real,  the  power    which  produces 
or  manifests  it  cannot  be  called  May^ — a  power  of 
illusion.     We    thus  see  clearly  the  error  of  i\My^- 
vida.     This    theory    deserves   respect   so  far  that 


II  REALITY   OF    THE    INDIVIDUAL  I45 

it  sees  the  mystery  of  creation — sees  that  creation 
is  not  perfectly  intelligible.  But  its  attempt  to 
solve  the  mystery  is  a  failure.  Its  conclusion — 
that  creation  is  illusory,  imaginary, — is  evident- 
ly an  error.  However,  that  the  individual  is  not 
illusory,  not  due  to  Maya,  not  merely  vydvahdvika, 
conventional, — that  it  is  paramarthika,  real,  and 
that  the  moral  relation  of  God  to  man,  God's 
love  and  holiness,  are  svarupa  lakshanas,  absolute 
attributes,  and  not  merely  tatastha  lakshanas, 
relative  attributes — all  this  we  shall  explain  to 
the  best  of  our  power  in  our  third  and  fourth 
chapters. 


10 


CHAPTER  III 

UNITY  AND  DIFFERENCE 

Section  i — the  Unity  and  Infinitude  of  God 

We  have  already  tried  to  show  that  the 
Consciousness  which  supports  the  world  is  one 
and  indivisible,  and  that  the  human  conscious- 
ness is  a  reproduction  of  that  Consciousness.  We 
have  also  seen  that  there  is  an  element  of 
necessary  difference  in  that  indivisible  Conscious- 
ness. However,  we  shall  discuss  this  subject 
more  particularly  in  this  chapter. 

We  have  seen  in  our  first  chapter  that  space 
is  an  affair  of  infinite  addition,  that  it  consists 
of  infinite  parts  infinitely  divisible  and  that  the 
link  uniting  these  parts  is  consciousness.  It  is 
because  these  parts  exist  together  in  the 
presence  of  an  indivisible  Consciousness  that  they 
are  connected.  In  fact  their  connection  means 
nothing  more  than  their  presence  to  such  a 
Consciousness,     This  connection,   which  we  call 


SPACE   ONE    AND    INFINITE  I47 

space,  is  one  and  infinite.  Each  of  us  perceives 
at  a  time  only  a  small  portion  of  space,  and  each 
perceives  a  distinct  portion.  But  we  know  that 
there  is  more  space,  infinite  space,  beyond  the 
portion  which  each  one  of  us  perceives.  We 
have  already  seen  that  space  is  a  necessary  form 
of  perception,  that  we  cannot  perceive,  think 
or  believe  space  as  absent.  Therefore,  though 
our  direct  perception  is  confined  to  very  small 
limits,  we  are  sure  that  infinite  space  extends 
beyond  these  limits.  Though  infinitely  divisible 
on  the  one  hand,  space,  we  know,  is  infinitely 
addible  on  the  other.  We  cannot  imagine  any 
limit  to  space.  That  we  cannot  imagine  any 
limit  to  space,  is  not  merely  a  weakness  of  our 
minds, — space  itself  is  an  affair  of  infinite  addi- 
tion. It  means  nothing  more  than  such  an 
affair.  This  matter  is  so  simple  and  clear  that 
we  feel  it  is  not  necessary  to  say  much  upon  it. 
The  reader  may,  if  he  pleases,  try  to  see  if  he 
can  think  space  as  having  a  limit.  To  think 
that  space  has  a  limit,  one  must  suppose  it  as 
ending  somewhere  beyond  which  there  is  no 
space.  But  to  suppose  a  'beyond'  is  to  think  of 
space  outside  the  fancied  limit.  It  is  impossible 
to  think  of  a  limit  to  space, — the  idea  itself  being 
absurd  and  meaningless.     Now,  as  it  is  necessary 


THE   UKITY   AND    IXFIXITUDE    OF    GOD 

that  space  should  be  thought  of  as  infinite,  so 
it  is  necessary  to  think  of  it  as  one.  As  we  have 
seen,  space  consists  of  the  connection,  the  unity, 
of  different  parts,  parts  which,  though  distinct, 
are  inseparable.  No  portion  of  space  can  be 
separated  from  any  other  portion.  Two  distinct 
parts  of  space  may  lie  millions  of  miles  apart 
from  each  other,  but  they  are  united  by  the 
intervening  portions  of  space  which  are  connected 
with  them  and  with  one  another.  Each  of  us 
indeed  perceives  different  portions  of  space,  but 
these  portions  are  connected  in  the  way  already 
mentioned.  All  spaces  are  included  in  one  in- 
finite space.  In  knowing  this  one  infinite  space 
we  know  the  Infinite  Consciousness  in  relation  to 
which  it  exists — the  same  consciousness  that  we 
call  our  own.  It  is  this  consciousness  which  lies 
at  the  basis  of  this  affair  of  infinite  addition. 
The  infinitude  of  space  really  means  the  infinitude 
of  God,  both  being  different  aspects  or  expressions 
of  the  same  truth.  That  time  also  is  one  and 
infinite,  that  the  one  and  indivisible  Cons- 
ciousness is  the  maker  of  this  infinite  chain  of 
time,  and  that  he  is  eternal  and  knows  all  time, 
past,  present  and  future — we  have  explained  at 
length  in  our  last  chapter,  and  nothing  more 
need  be  said  about  it  here.     We   hope  now   that 


THE    OXE    IN    THE    MAN'V  149 

the  reader  sees  somewhat  clearly  the  main  argu- 
ment for  the  infinitude  of  God  in  relation  to  space 
and  time,  and  for  his  unity  and  indivisibility. 
It  will  be  seen  that  as,  in  order  to  understand 
the  eternality  of  God,  it  is  not  necessary  to  know 
the  innumerable  events  of  infinite  time,  nay,  not 
•even  a  large  number  of  events,  a  comprehension  of 
the  nature  of  time  and  change  being  enough  to  give 
us  an  idea  of  the  Timeless,  the  Eternal,  to  convince 
us  that  consciousness,  the  consciousness  that  consti- 
tutes our  self,  is  eternal,  so,  in  order  to  see  that  God 
is  infinite  and  all-comprehending,  it  is  not  necess- 
ary to  know  everything  in  space,  nay,  not  even 
a  large  number  of  things.  To  know  the  nature  of 
space  is  to  know  the  nature  of  the  Spaceless,  the 
Infinite.  \Mien  the  relation  of  two  portions  of 
space  is  known,  it  is  seen  that  the  consciousness 
that  connects  the  one  with  the  other  is  spaceless,one, 
indivisible,  infinite.  The  mind  that  knows  two 
things  to  be  different  is  in  both  of  them  indiffer- 
ently as  their  support.  The  difference  is  not 
without  but  within  the  mind.  The  unity  is 
fundamental,  primary,  the  difference  secondary. 
He  who  knows  both  'here'  and  'there',  is  equally 
in  both.  He  who  knows  both  'far'  and  'near' 
is  equally  in  both.  In  fact  'far'  and  'near'  are 
applicable  only  to  the  body,  they  are    unmeaning 


150  UMTY-IK-DIFFERENCE  CHAP. 

with  reference  to  the  self,  'far'  and  'near'  both 
existing  in  relation  to  the  self.  It  will  thus  be 
seen  that  in  knowing  space,  we  know  the  knower, 
the  support,  of  space  as  spaceless.  In  knowing 
the  elements  of  difference,  division,  mediateness- 
and  plurality  existing  in  space,  we  know  the 
consciousness  that  supports  space — the  same 
that  we  call  our  own  consciousness — as  one,  in- 
divisible, immediate  and  one.  These  two  aspects, 
or  moments  of  knowledge  are  so  closely  related, 
that  it  is  impossible  to  separate  them.  These 
two  classes  of  truths — oneness  and  difference, 
unity  and  duality,  divisibility  and  indivisibility, 
mediacy  and  immediacy,  the  one  and  the  many, 
are  so  mixed  up  in  knowledge,  that  it  is  in  their 
union  that  knowledge  is  possible.  Abstract  one 
of  them,  and  knowledge  becomes  impossible. 
Unity-in-difference  is  a  fundamental  and  necessary 
characteristic  of  knowledge. 

Section  2 — Unity-in-difference 

It  is  doubtful  if  the  above  proof  of  the  funda- 
mental unity  of  consciousness  will  be  satisfactory 
to  all.  To  it  it  will  be  naturally  objected  that 
we  evidently  see  consciousness  to  be  many  in 
number.  The  self  of  each  individual  is  distinct 
and  apart  from  one  another.     Each  of  us  knows,. 


Ill  THE    UNDERLYING    UNITY  151 

understands  and  thinks  separately.  In  the  pre- 
sence of  this  apparent  difference,  is  not  the  proof 
of  the  unity  of  consciousness  only  a  metaphysical 
ingenuity  ?  How  many  times  it  has  been  admit- 
ted in  the  first  chapter  of  this  book  that  the 
sensorium  of  each  of  us  is  distinct.  How  is  it 
asserted  now  that  the  same  consciousness  is  the 
support  and  life  of  each  individual  ?  Now,  we 
proceed  to  answer  this  objection  to  the  best  of 
our  power.  There  is  indeed  no  doubt  that  each 
of  us  knows  distinctly,  that  one's  sensations  are 
not  the  sensations  of  another,  one's  memory 
not  the  memory  of  another,  and  one's  actions 
not  the  actions  of  another.  It  is  not  our  purpose 
to  deny  this  infinite  difference  in  the  world. 
To  deny  it  is  possible  only  to  the  extremely 
foolish  or  the  blind.  But  we  are  going  to  show 
that  there  is  a  wonderful  unity  in  the  midst  of 
this  infinite  diversity.  The  sensoriums  and 
understandings  of  different  people  are  indeed 
different,  but  not  unconnected  ;  there  is  a  wonder- 
ful connection,  a  wonderful  unity,  between  them. 
The  only  explanation  of  this  unity  is  that  the 
same  Consciousness  lies  at  the  root  of  all.  If 
the  individual  selves  were  quite  apart  from  one 
another,  it  is  certain  that  they  could  not  know 
one     another, — that     no      connection     between 


152  UMTV-IK-DIFFEREN'CE  CHAP. 

self  and  self  would  be  possible.  But  we  find  a 
wonderful  unity  among  individual  selves.  They 
are  connected  by  knowledge,  feeling  and  action. 
If  the  consciousness  of  niy  friend  before  me  were 
not  fundamentally  the  same  as  mine,  I  could  by 
no  means  know  that  he  is.  In  that  case  even 
the  thought  of  his  existence  would  not  have 
risen  in  my  mind.  I  should  then  have  been  shut 
up  in  the  closed  and  solitary  chamber  of  my 
life,  and  the  states  of  my  own  mind  would  have 
been  the  only  objects  of  my  knowledge.  But 
the  fact  is  that  I  know  him  and  that  though  my 
sensorium  and  understanding  are  different  from 
his,  a  wonderful  mental  intercourse  is  going 
on  between  us.  I  not  only  know  his  existence, 
but  am  exchanging  thoughts  and  feelings  with 
him.  I  express  my  thoughts,  and  he  knows  and 
understands  them.  He  gives  out  his  own 
thoughts,  and  I  know  and  understand  them. 
An  interchange  of  feelings,  of  love,  esteem, 
sympathy  &c.,  is  proceeding  between  us.  What 
makes  all  this  possible  ?  The  effort  I  make  in 
uttering  my  words  is  my  individual  action.  The 
sound  I  hear  as  the  result  of  my  effort  is  a 
sensation  of  my  individual  mind.  The  mind  of 
my  friend  is  not  under  the  control  of  my  will, 
and  yet  by  some  mysterious  means  sounds  similar 


ni  EXPLANATION    OF   SPIRITUAL    INTERCOURSE  I53 

to  those  I  hear  are  produced  in  his  mind,  the 
meanings  I  understand  are  understood  by  him, 
and  the  feelings  of  pleasure  or  pain  I  experience 
are  experienced  by  him.  This  connection  bet- 
ween self  and  self,  this  exchange  of  thoughts 
and  feelings  between  them,  cannot  have  any 
other  reasonable  explanation  than  this  that  the 
same  Consciousness  lies  at  the  root  of  the  con- 
nected selves.  The  connection  of  different  things 
implies  something  common  in  them.  That  my 
thoughts  and  feelings  become  the  thoughts 
and  feelings  of  another  mind,  can  only  mean 
that  the  underlying"  Consciousness  of  both  minds 
is  the  same.  The  same  Spiritual  Principle,  it  is 
evident,  lies  at  the  root  of  both  lives,  binds  them 
together  and  makes  them  dance  to  the  same 
tune.  Either  we  must  say  that  there  is  no 
•connection  between  different  minds,  each  existing 
alone,  confined  to  its  own  subjective  states,  that 
the  wonderlully  rich  and  varied  spiritual  rela- 
tions of  the  world  are  quite  illusory,  or  we  must 
admit  that  the  same  Infinite  Consciousness  under- 
lies all  individual  minds  as  the  common  source  of 
their  thoughts  and  feelings  and  makes  these 
relations  possible. 

The  more  the  reader  thinks  of  these    spiritual 
relations,    the    more    will   he    wonder    and     the 


154  UNITY-IN-DIFFERENCE 

more  will  this  grand  faith  be  confirmed  in  him  that 
underlying  the  innumerable  diversities  of  the 
world  there  is  a  single  undivided  Conscious- 
ness which  binds  together  all  varieties,  all  space 
and  all  time.  This  spiritual  relation  is  not 
confined  to  persons  near  one  another ;  it  knows 
no  distance  of  time  and  space.  I  share  in  the 
same  thought  that  inspired  the  sage  Emerson 
on  the  other  side  of  the  globe.  His  and  my 
mental  phenomena  are  indeed  numerically 
different,  and  yet  our  thoughts  are  at  bottom 
one !  The  sentiment  that  thrills  in  the  songs 
of  the  English  poet  Tennyson*  touches  my  heart 
and  makes  it  thrill  with  the  same  feeling.  The 
union  of  my  heart  with  his  is  undoubted.  The 
same  hymn  of  praise  that  transported  the  soul 
of  the  ancient  sages  of  India,  uplifts  my  soul  too 
and  knits  me  in  spiritual  communion  with  them.  In 
the  same  way,  the  profound  meditation  of  Buddha, 
the  deep  wisdom  of  Plato,  the  living  faith  of  Jesus, 
and  the  enraptured  love  of  Chaitanya  draw  my 
soul  and  bind  me  in  a  deep  spiritual  relationship 
to  these  great  souls,  far  apart  as  they  are  from 
one  another  in  time  and  space.  Either  these 
relations  are  imaginary  and  meaningless,  or, 
if  they  are  true  in  any   sense,    if   they    have   any 

*  The  poet  was  living  when  this  was  written. 


Ill       PRESENCE   OF   THE    INFINITE    IN    UNIVERSAL    TRUTHS    I55 

meaning,  it  is  evident  that  an  undivided,  all- 
pervading  Consciousness  constituting  the  life  of 
all  rational  beings  is  the  only  explanation,  the 
only  cause,  of  these  relations. 

Look  at  the  other  side  of  this  truth,  the  one 
we  have  briefly  shown  in  the  first  part  of  this 
chapter.  On  the  one  hand,  I  am  only  a  small 
individual  confined  in  time  and  space,  my 
direct  knowledge  restricted  to  very  small 
limits.  I  can  perceive  at  a  time  only  a  very 
small  portion  of  time  and  space,  and  the 
direct  objects  of  my  sensuous  knowledge 
are  only  my  individual  sensations.  But  on  the 
other  hand  I  know  infinite  time  and  space.  I  do 
not  indeed  know  all  the  particulars  that  fill 
infinite  time  and  space,  but  in  one  sense,  in  a 
real  sense,  I  know  infinite  time  and  space.  The 
particular  objects  that  occupy  particular  portions 
of  space,  the  particular  events  that  occur  in 
particular  times,  are  not  indeed  fully  known  to 
me  ;  they  are  not  indeed  manifested  in  my 
individual  life  ;  but  the  universal  truths  relating 
to  time  and  spece,  truths  that  lie  at  the  basis 
of  all  knowledge,  truths  that  are  self-evident  and 
necessary,  are  clearly  known  to  me.  That  space 
is  one  and  infinite,  that  events  form  an  infinite 
series,    that   past,   present   and   future   are     knit 


156  UXITY-IN-DIFFERENCE  CHAP. 

together  in  an  indissoluble  link,  and  that  the 
unity  of  knowledge  is  the  condition  of  all  relations 
— these  necessary  truths  are  certainly  known 
to  me.  These  truths  are  the  necessary  forms  of 
all  knowledge.  However  different,  therefore, 
knowledge  may  be  with  reference  to  particular 
matters,  however  various  may  be  the  forms 
assumed  by  knowledge  in  particular  times  and 
spaces  in  relation  to  particular  objects,  I  know 
surely  its  general  forms.  And  I  know  even 
more.  I  know  to  a  large  extent  the  various 
thoughts,  feelings  and  volitions  of  different  minds. 
Though  restricted  to  small  limits  of  time  and 
space  with  reference  to  direct  perception,  1  know 
many  truths  relating  to  very  distant  places  and 
very  ancient  times.  From  this  it  is  evident  that 
there  is  in  me  a  strange  combination  of  the  great 
and  the  small,  the  finite  and  the  infinite,  the 
individual  and  the  universal.  On  the  one  hand, 
I  am  small,  finite  and  individual ;  but  on  the 
other  hand  there  is  in  me  something  that  is  really 
very  great,  in  fact  nothing  less  than  infinite  and 
universal.  It  is  because  the  Infinite  exists  in  me 
as  my  Higher  Self,  my  Supreme  Self,  that  I  can 
transcend  my  individuality,  can  know  thruths 
beyond  my  individual  life,  can  acquire  necessary 
and  universal  truths,   and   can    hold   communion 


in  MAN    NOT    MERELY   FINITE  157 

with  the  Infinite.  A  merely  finite  being,  a  mere 
individual,  far  from  knowing  any  other  higher 
truths,  cannot  even  know  that  he  is  finite  and 
individual.  But  one  who  has  known  himself  to 
be  finite  and  individual,  has,  in  knowing  only  this 
much,  transcended  his  finitude  and  individuality. 
One  who  can  go  beyond  onself,  can  know  truths 
outside  his  individual  life,  can  acquire  universal 
truths,  is  not  merely  finite,  merely  individual ; 
the  finite  and  the  infinite,  individuality  and 
universality,  are  inseparably  blended  in  him.  As 
it  is  true  on  the  one  hand  that  we  are  finite  and 
individual,  so  it  is  equally  true  on  the  other  that 
the  infinite,  universal  and  all-knowing  Being  is 
the  cause,  support  and  light  of  our  finite  and  in- 
dividual lives.  Knowledge  everywhere  is  charac- 
terised by  this  necessary  unity  and  difference. 
Every  individual  self  is  lighted  by  the  Infinite- 
Light.* 

Section  3 — Dualism,  Monism  and  the  Doctrine 
OF  Unity-in-difference 

The     reader     must    already    have    seen    that 
the  Theism    we    are    trying    to    establish  in  this 

*  See  Principal  Caird's  Introduction  to  the  Philosophy  of 
Religion :  the  latter  portions  of  chaps.  IV  and  V  and 
portions  of  chap.  VIII. 


158  DUALISM,    MONISM   AND   UNITY-IN-DIFFERENCE      CHAP. 

treatise  is  different  both  from  current  Dualism 
and  current  Monism.  The  Dualism  which  ima- 
gines God  and  man  to  be  entirely  apart  from 
each  other,  is  not  real  Theism,  but  only  a 
species  of  Deism.  When  such  a  Dualism 
says  that  God  is  the  support  of  the  world  and 
the  life  of  man, it  really  contradicts  itself.  A 
God  from  which  man  and  the  world  can  exist 
apart,  independently,  cannot  be  their  support. 
Such  a  Dualism  is  really  opposed  to  deep  worship 
and  spiritual  communion.  If  God  is  outside  my 
self,  how  can  he  know  and  move  my  heart  ?  And 
how  is  it  possible  for  me  to  see,  hear  and 
touch  him,  to  have  any  deep  relations  with 
him  ?  Those  among  the  Dualists  who  are  not 
very  thoughtful,  may  hold  the  truths  about  man's 
<ieeper  relations  to  God  as  blind  beliefs,  and 
may  be  devoted  to  the  culture  of  deep  spiritual- 
ity. But  it  seems  evident  that  the  more  thought- 
ful and  subtle  among  them  will  often  doubt 
these  deeper  truths  and  will  evince  no  depth 
of  communion  and  fervent  love.  On  the  other 
hand,  current  Monism  too,  which  denies  the 
element  of  necessary  difference  in  knowledge, 
cannot  be  called  true  Theism.  Such  Monism 
declares  God  to  be  a  subject  without  objects, 
an  Eternal  without  relation  to    change,    and   an 


Ill  SPIRITUAL    DEFECTS   OF    MONISM    AND    DUALISM  I59 

Infinite  without  relation  to  the  finite.  Blinded  by 
Mayavada,  it  denies  the  reality  of  objects,  changes 
and  limits.  But  a  subject  apart  from  objects  has 
no  meaning.  An  unchangeable  unrelated  to  change 
is  meaningless.  The  Infinite  ceases  to  have  any 
sense  if  the  reality  of  limits  is  denied.  Objects, 
changes  and  limits  are  undoubtedly  relative. 
They  doubtless  depend  on  the  subject,  the 
eternal  and  the  infinite.  But  because  they  are 
relative,  they  do  not  cease  to  be  true.  They  are 
relatively  true.  Current  Monism,  by  denying 
their  truth,  makes  its  Absolute  unmeaning. 
An  Absolute  without  necessary  relations  with 
objects,  changes  and  limits  is  no  Absolute.  By 
the  Absolute  we  mean  something  great  which 
supports  objects,  events  and  limits,  and  because 
it  supports  them,  is  distinct  from  them.  The 
Monist's  Absolute,  therefore,  which  is  without 
difference,  is  no  Absolute.  The  only  real  Absolute 
is  he  who  is  at  once  one  and  different,  who  is  a 
Subject  eternally  supporting  objects,  an  Eternal 
•ceaselessly  producing  change  and  an  Infinite 
€ver  sustaining  the  finite.  Objects,  change  and 
finite  selves  eternally  exist  in  him  as  powers, 
properties  or  manifestations.  Objects  and  events 
are  real,  though  relative,  to  the  Subject  and  the 
Eternal.    That  they  eternally  exist  in  the  Subject 


l6o  DUALISM,    MOXISM  AND   UN'ITY-IN-DIFFERENCE      CHAP. 

and  the  Eternal,  that  the  knowledge  of  objects 
is  ever-present  to  the  Subject,  and  that  events 
form  an  infinite  series,  we  have  already  shown. 
We  shall  now  speak  a  word  or  two  on  the 
real  existence  of  finite  knowledge  in  the  Infinite. 
This  consciousness  I  call  my  own,  which  is  the 
essence  of  my  life,  is  doubtless  the  manifestation 
of  the  Infinite  Consciousness.  But  as,  on  the  one 
hand,  it  is  undoubted  that  it  is  a  manifestation 
of  the  Infinite  Consciousness,  so,  on  the  other 
hand,  there  is  no  doubt  that  it  is  finite,  that  it 
is  only  a  partial  reproduction  of  the  Infinite. 
Its  difference  from  the  Infinite  Consciousness  is 
therefore  as  true  as  its  unity  with  it.  Its  partial 
and  finite  character  is  real,  and  not  imaginary 
or  due  to  ignorance.  It  is  not  through  error 
that  I  suppose  my  knowledge  to  be  finite ;  its 
finitude  is  real,  undeniable.  Though  knowing 
and  fully  admitting  my  knowledge  to  be  one 
with  the  infinite  knowledge,  I  am  obliged  to 
say  that  it  is  only  a  part  of  that  knowledge. 
That  I,  seated  in  this  room,  perceive  only  the 
objects  contained  in  it  and  do  not  perceive  those 
out  of  it,  that  my  knowledge  of  various  other 
things  is  limited,  that  I  can  do  only  a  fixed 
number  of  things  and  cannot  do  many  more, 
that  I  can  love  only  a  small  number  of  persons  and 


REALITY   OF    LIMITS  l6l 

cannot  love  all,  that  the  holiness  I  have  acquired 
is   imperfect,    that    my    faults  are  numberless, — 
these  are  not  fancies  due  to  ignorance,  but  facts. 
To   be   brief — the    existence    of   the  finite  is  un- 
doubted.      Besides,    though    this,    my    life,    was 
manifested    at    a     particular     time,     yet     it     is 
doubtless    that    it    ever   existed    in    the    Eternal 
Mind.       It   follows    therefore    that    the     Infinite 
Consciousness,     notwithstanding     its     perfection 
and   indivisibility,    eternally    holds  within     itself 
the   limitations   and  imperfections  of  the  world. 
The    Monist's   Infinite,    without     difference     and 
activity,  is  not  the  real  Infinite.     The  real  Infinite 
is  he  who  is  the  support    and   cause   of  all    that 
is   finite  and  is  yet  beyond  all  limitations.     That 
the    existence    of  the    finite    in    the    Infinite    is  a 
mystery  not  quite  intetligible,    we    have    already 
seen.     And    we  have  also  seen  that  to  pronounce 
the  finite  to  be  illusory  and  to    call    the   creative 
power    of  God   by    the    name    of   Maya,  is  not  a 
solution    of    the    mystery.       According     to     the 
Mayavadin,  the  individuality  and  finitude  of  man 
is    only    apparent     \'  vydvahdrika )   and    not    real 
{pdvamdrthika),— it   is  only  from    the  standpoint 
of     ignorance    that    it    seems    real ;     it   is    not 
real    from    the    standpoint    of    knowledge,    from 
which    the    Infinite    and    Absolute,   without   any 

II 


l62         DUALISM,    MONISM    AND    UNITY-IN-DIFFERENCE        CHAP. 

difference,  is  alone  real.  We  have  alread}'  shown 
the  error  of  this  view  ;  but  a  few  more  ^vords  on 
the  subject  may  make  it  somewhat  clearer.  The 
Mayavadin  says  the  idea  of  individuality  (jiva- 
bhdva)  is  due  to  ignorance.  Now,  we  ask— whose 
ignorance?  There  can  be  no  ignorance  in  the 
Absolute,  who  is  all  knowledge.  But  ignorance 
surely  exists;  therefore,  the  finite  individual,  the 
subject  of  ignorance,  exists  too.  That  ignorance 
is  iiegative,  privative,  admits  of  no  doubt.  But 
as;  its  existence  as  a  want,  as  an  imperfection,  is 
doubtless,  and  as  there  can  be  no.  ^ivant  or  imper- 
fection in  the  Infinite  arid  Perfect  Being,  there 
can  be  no  doubt  of  the  existence — existence  in 
relation  indeed  to  the  Perfect — of  the  individual 
as  the  subject  of  ignorance,  of  imperfection. 
Therefore,  though  unable  to  explain  the  mystery 
of  creation,  to  explain  clearly  how-  the  finite 
exists  in  the  Infinite  in  unity  and  difference,  we 
arrive  at  this  undoubted  conclusion  that  the 
existence  of  the  individual  is  not  merely  apparent, 
not  due  to  ignorance,  but  is  real.  The  individual 
is  real,  not  merely  phenomenally  real,  but  truly 
real, — real  in  relation  to  the  Absolute.  As 
ignorance,  as  a  privation,  a  negation,  confirms 
this  inference,  so  love  and  holiness,  as  perfections, 
as  positive  virtues^    confirm    the    same    inference. 


Uh  .  .,     ,;.;;TH;z;.. WITNESS    OF   LOVE  163 

Love  and  holiness  imply  relation  and  thus  differ- 
ence. One  person  loves  another,  and  is  just  to 
another.  As  there  are  love  and  holiness  in  the 
world,  it  is  not  absolutely  monistic, — there  must 
necessarily  exist;  differences  in  it.  Those  who 
acknowledge  ■  the.  reality  of  love  and  holiness, 
must- see  in  them  irrefutable  proofs  of  the  doctrine 
of  unjty-in-difference.  They  v^all  see  that  in  all 
tlie  loving  relations  of  father  and  son,  husband  and 
vv^ife  ■  &c.,  unity  and  difference  are  both  implied. 
Similarly,  in  truth,  justice,  obedience,  and  such 
other  .ethical  relations,  they  will  see  the  same 
unitj'-in-difference.  The  Monist  may  attribute 
these  relations  to  ignorance,  but  he  will  find 
ignorance  itself  inexplicable  by  his  theory.  That 
ignorance  is  a  sure  proof  of  difference,  we  have 
already^  seen.  -The  real  ultimate  truth  therefore 
is  neither  Dualism  nor  Monism,  but  Unity-in- 
difference. 

We  have  nov,-  to  see  tliat  the  spiritual  dangers 
seen  in  Monism  are  not  to  be  found  in  the 
doctrine  taught  by  us.  The  finite  self,  feeling 
its  own  want  of  wisdom,  love  and  holiness,  anj:! 
knowing  the  all-knowing,  all-loving  and.  all- 
holy  Supreme  Self  to  be  present  within  it  as  its  life 
and  support,,  will  ever  worship  him  with  love, 
prav    toi-.him      for   wisdom,    love    and    holiness 


164         DUALISM,    MONISM    AND    UNITY-IN-DIFFERENCE      CHAP, 

and  strive  after  deeper  and  deeper  spiritual  union 
with  him  day  by  day.  There  are  two  condi- 
tions of  worship  and  spiritual  life.  The  first  of 
them  is  that  the  object  of  worship  must  be  in 
the  inmost  heart  of  the  worshipper,  that  there 
must  be  an  inseparable  connection  between 
the  two, — that  the  worshipper  must  be  entirely 
dependent  on  the  object  of  worship.  The  second 
condition  is  that  there  must  be  a  clear  difference 
between  the  worshipper  and  the  object  of 
worship, — that  the  latter  must  be  infinitely 
greater  than  the  former.  Current  Dualism  is 
opposed  to  the  first  of  these  conditions.  When 
the  worshipper  says  to  the  object  of  worship, 
"Thou  art  my  life,  my  inmost  self,  I  cannot  live 
a  moment  without  thee,  I  am  nothing  apart  from 
thee,"  current  Dualism  opposes  this  deep  flow  of 
devotion  and  says,  "Why  so  ?  I  am  indeed  made 
by  God,  but  I  am  independent  of  him,  apart 
from  him.  To  say  that  man  cannot  live  a 
moment  without  God  is  to  deny  man's  freedom." 
Similarly,  whenever  any  high  truth  implying 
the  inseparable  relation  of  God  and  man  is 
uttered,  whenever  man's  love,  holiness  and  power 
are  explained  as  reflections  of  God's  love,  holi- 
ness and  power,  current  Dualism  smells  Monism 
in    such    explanations,     protests     against     them 


Ill  CONDITIONS    OF    TRUE    WORSHIP  165 

and  thus  keeps  aloof  from  higher  faith  and 
spiritual  exercises.  On  the  other  hand,  current 
Monism  is  against  the  second  condition.  When- 
ever the  worshipper,  feeling  his  own  littleness 
and  the  greatness  of  the  object  of  his  worship, 
approaches  at  the  feet  of  the  latter,  reverently 
praises  his  infinite  perfections,  and  bowing  down 
in  humility  says,  "  I  am  the  eye  and  thou  the 
light,  I  am  unloving,  but  thou  art  loving,  I  am 
sinful,  but  thou  art  holy,  save  me  from  my  blind- 
ness and  from  my  sins,  and  make  me  one  of  thy 
humblest  servants,"  current  Monism,  unable,  on 
account  of  its  blindness  to  the  difference  between 
the  finite  and  the  Infinite,  to  solve  the  mystery  of 
this  sweet  Dualism,  sees  only  ignorance  and  senti- 
m.entalism  in  it.  It  says,  "All  is  Brahman, — who 
worships  whom?"  It  is  only  the  Idealism  that 
sees  both  the  elements  of  unity  and  difference 
in  knowledge  which  constitutes  the  true  basis 
of  deep  spiritual  life.  It  sees  the  object  of  wor- 
ship in  the  worshipper  and  the  worshipper  in 
the  object  of  worship  ;  the  teacher  in  the  disciple 
and  the  disciple  in  the  teacher ;  the  devotee  in 
the  Lord  and  the  Lord  in  the  devotee.  The 
object  of  worship,  the  Lord  with  infinite  perfec- 
tions, is  himself  the  life  of  the  worshipper.  Faith, 
love,    humility,    ardour, — all    the    constituents  of 


l66         DUALISM,    MONISM    AKD    UKITY-IN-OIFFEREN'CE      CHAP. 

worsbip-^are  infused  by  him  into  the  heart  of 
the  worshipper,  who  cannot  advance  a  step  in 
the  path  of  v/orship  without  his  inspiration.  It 
is  therefore  evident  that  he  who  is  worshipped 
is  the  main  cause  of  worship  and  that  his  activity 
is  its  necessary  condition.  But  on  the  other  hand, 
true  worship  is  not  possible  without  difference. 
Worship  arises  from  the  union  and  relation  of 
the  perfect  and  the  imperfect ;  though,  therefore, ^ 
the  worshipper  lives  in  the  vvorshipped,  and- is 
inspired  by  him,  the  one  is  distinct  from  the 
other.  The  aspirations  and  activity  of  the  wor- 
shipper, though  derived  from  and  sustained  by 
the  worshipped,  are  yet  different  from  and  in 
this  sense  independent  of  him.  In  the  act  of 
worship,  unity  and  difference  are  wonderfully 
blended.  Neither  pure  Dualism  nor  pure  Monism 
can  afford  a  true  basis  of  worship.  The  doctrine 
of  unity-in-difference  alone  affords  a  rational  basis 
of  worship.  Looked  at  either  as  theories  or 
as  systems  of  spiritual  culture,  Dualism  and 
Monism  are  both  only  one-sided  and  not  absolute 
truths.  The  absolute  truth  is  their  harmony 
in  the  doctrine  of  unity-in-difference.  True 
religion    is    like    the    shield    of    Avantinagar     in 


Ill 


/ 


CONDITIONS    OF   TRUE    WORSHIP  167 


the  story  :  one  side  of  it  is  monistic  and  the  other 
dualistic* 


T0315?31Mf  3 


*  The  story  refefi-ed'  to' 'is  as  follows:  A'shieidV'bf 
which  one  side  was  made  of  gold  and  the  other  of  silver, 
hung  from  the  palace-gate  of  the  ancient  city  of  Avanti- 
nagar.  Two  horsemen  approaching  it  from  opposite  direc- 
tions admired,  one  its  golden,  the  other  its  silvery,  brilliance, 
utterly  ignorant  of  its  dual  character.  Having  differed, 
they  came  to  high  words,  and  ultimately  to  blows.  They 
wete  separated  and  reconciled  by  a  third  person  who 
showed  them  both  sides  of  the  shield. 


CHAPTER  IV 
THE  PERFECT  AND  THE  IMPERFECT 

Section  i — The  Divine  Love  and  Holiness 

We  have  now  finished  the  exposition,  so  far 
as  our  limited  powers  allowed,  and  so  far  as 
was  possible  in  the  scope  of  this  little  book,  of 
what  are  called  in  the  language  of  Western 
Theology  the  metaphysical  attributes  of  God. 
We  have  seen  that  he  is  the  true — the  cause 
and  support  of  all  things  ;  that  he  is  intelligence, 
all-knowing,  the  ruler  and  searcher  of  all  hearts ; 
that  he  is  infinite, — the  support  of  all  space  and 
time  ;  and  that  he  is  one,  without  a  second,  and 
yet  with  an  element  of  necessary  difference  in 
him.  We  shall  now  say  something  on  the  moral 
attributes  of  God,  that  is,  on  his  perfect  love 
and  holiness.  But  our  discussion  of  these  attri- 
butes will  not  be  as  long  as  we  could  wish  it 
to  be.  For,  a  full  discussion  of  the  subject  pre- 
supposes one  on  the  foundation  of   morals.     But 


IV  THE    SAME    METHOD    HERE   AS    ELSEWHERE  l6g 

discussion  on  the  foundation  of  morals  forms 
no  part  of  the  scheme  of  this  little  book.*  With- 
out entering  into  such  a  discussion,  and  having 
regard  to  the  limited  scope  of  this  book,  we 
proceed  to  a  brief  treatment  of  the  subject.  To 
those  who,  notwithstanding  differences  as  to  the 
way  in  which  we  arrive  at  ethical  truths,  hold 
the  common  view  that  morality  is  a  real  thing, 
that  duty  is  not  a  mere  pursuit  of  pleasure,  but 
something  higher,  that  the  distinction  of  right 
and  wrong  is  a  real  distinction,—  to  them,  we 
hope,  our  treatment  of  the  subject  will  give 
some  satisfaction.  The  method  we  have  adopted 
in  our  previous  chapters  in  coming  to  truths 
about  the  nature  of  God,  will  be  adopted  in  this 
chapter  also.  Whether  we  deal  with  the  meta- 
physical or  the  moral  attributes  of  God,  the 
light  of  self-knowledge  is  the  brightest 
manifestation  of  the  light  of  God.  As  we  obtain 
the  clearest  evidence  of  God  as  the  true,  the 
intelligent  and  the  infinite,  in  our  soul,  so  in  the 
soul  is  to  be  found  the  clearest  evidence  of  his 
perfect  goodness  and  holiness.  Those  theologians 
who,  instead  of  looking  within,  seek  for  evidences 
of     the     Divine    goodness    and    holiness    in    the 

*  On   this   subject   see  the  author's  Philosophy  of  Brdh- 
moism,  Lecture  vii :  Conscience  and  the  Moral  Law. 


170  THE    DIVINE    LOVE    AN'D    HOLIKESS  CHAP. 

events  of  the  external  world,  are  only  shallow 
thinkers,  and  their  efforts  necessarily  come  to 
nought.  It  is  impossible  to  prove  the  perfect 
love  and  holiness  of  God  exclusively  from 
such  data.  The  iriference  on  the  Divine  love 
and  holiness  drawn  from  the  happiness 
and  order-  found  in  the  world  will  surely  be 
shaken  by  instances,  not  rare  in  the  world,  of 
unhappiness,  imperfection  and  disorder.  The 
faith  in  the  Divine  goodness  that  remains  un- 
shaken <^ven  in  the  midst  of  the  greatest  trials,  is 
not  based  on  any  external  evidence  :  it  is  due 
to  light  within.  Let  us  see  what  this  internal 
evidence  is.  Notwithstanding  all  my  unloving 
and  sinful  acts,  there  is  something  in  me  which  is 
always  loving  and  holy.  It  is  because  it  always 
remains  loving  and  holy  that  1  characterise  my 
and  other  people's  unloving  and  holy  acts  as  such. 
It  is  the  judge  of  all  that  is  loving  and  unloving, 
all  that  is  holy  and  unholy.  It  is  this  Which  calls 
men  loving  or  unloving,  holy  or  unholy,  and 
it  is  this  which  compels  us  to  believe  in  an  all-lov- 
ing and  all-holy  Person.  This  faith  is  inherent 
in  the  nature  of  the  self,  because  its  own  nature 
consists  of  unalloyed  love  and  holiness.  In  fact 
it  is  the  direct  manifestation  of  the  Perfect  Being. 
It  is  this  which  is  called'  "  conscience  "    or    "  the 


IV  THE   HIGHER    SELF    IN    MAN  I7I 

voice  of  God."  This  all-loving  and  all-holy 
Consciousness  exists  in  every  man  as  his  Higher 
Self.  Ethical  truths  such  as  "Truth  is  to  be 
followed  and  untruth  to  be  avoided,"  "Truth  is 
beautiful  and  great  and  untruth  ugly  and  mean"  ; 
"  Justice  is  to  be  followed  and  injustice  avoided," 
"  Love  is  heavenly  and  hate  hellish, — there  is 
an  impassable  difference  between  love  and  hate," 
"Unselfishness  is  infinitely  superior  to  selfishness; 
there  is  an  infinite  gulf  between  holy  thoughts, 
holy  looks,  holy  words  and  holy  acts  on  the  one 
hand  and  unholy  thoughts,  unholy  looks,  unholy 
words  and  unholy  acts  on  the  other" — truths 
like  these,  we  say,  are  revealed  to  us  as  essential 
features  in  the  character  of  our  Higher  Self. 
They  do  not  appear  to  us  as  mere  abstract 
principles.  The  Eternal  Consciousness  lying  at 
the  basis  of  our  life  manifests  himself  as  the 
living  embodiment  of  these  principles  and  makes 
us  understand  clearly  that  he  is  infinitely  superior 
to  our  lower  self,  subject  to  animal  passions 
and  impulses,  and  makes  us  feel  without  a  doubt 
that  the  lower  self  is  to  be  sacrificed  to  him,  as  he 
alone  is  our  rightful  king,  -When  principles  like 
the  above  are  revealed  to  us  and  conquers,  if  only 
for  a  moment,  our  lower  self,  when  our  thoughts, 
feelings  and  desires  become  perfectly  holy,    when 


172  THE    DIVINE    LOVE    AND   HOLINESS  CHAP. 

not  a  tinge  of  unlovingness  and  unholiness  re- 
mains in  our  hearts,  when  the  soul  is  full  of  the 
sweet  perfume  of  holiness,  and  the  heart,  full  of 
love,  embraces  the  whole  world,  when  love  and 
holiness  are  to  us  things  no  more  outward,  but 
wholly  inward,  the  breath,  the  very  flesh  and 
blood,  of  our  soul, — in  such  rare  moments,  the 
direct  object  of  our  knowledge  is  not  merely  an 
abstract  ideal,  but  a  perfectly  loving  and  holy 
Person.  Charmed  with  the  transcendent  beauty 
of  this  Supreme  Person,  the  worshipper  exclaims, — 

"  Who  art  thou,  standing  in  the  garden 
of  my  heart  ? 

Many  beautiful  forms  have  I  seen,  but  not  such 
a  form  as  this."* 
At  such  a  moment,  the  distinction  of  the  finite 
and  the  Infinite  is  not  indeed  obliterated ;  the 
metaphysical  perfections  of  God  do  not  indeed 
come  down  to  man  and  make  him  omniscient 
and  omnipotent  ;  neither  are  those  innumerable 
kind  and  holy  acts  revealed  to  us  which  proceed 
out  of  the  infinite  power  and  wisdom  of  God  ; 
but  the  main  features  of  his  moral  perfection  are 
really  revealed  to  us.  It  may  be  said  that  at 
such    times   we    are    aware    only    of  a  particular 

*  Brahmasangit  :  Hymn  No.   493    in   the   9th   edition 
published  by  the  Sadharan  Brahmo  Samaj. 


IV  WITNESS    OF    CONSCIENCE  1 73 

State  of  our  soul.  But  in  fact,  as  there  is  no  such 
thing  as  "  a  mere  sensation  "  or  "  a  mere  idea," 
but  the  total  concrete  reality  is  a  self  with  a 
sensation  or  an  idea,  so  there  is  no  such  thing  as 
a  mere  state,  a  mere  state  of  perfect  love  and 
holiness.  What  we  know  at  such  moments  is 
not  a  mere  state,  but  a  living  Self — a  Person  of 
perfect  love  and  holiness.  It  is  true  that  we  are 
not  always  conscious  of  the  presence  of  this 
perfect  Person, — that  we  are  often  deprived  of 
his  light  and  are  consequently  led  to  delusion 
and  sin  by  the  promptings  of  low  desires.  But 
this  does  not  affect  in  the  least  the  perfect  love 
and  holiness  of  God.  As  the  image  of  nature, 
even  when  absent  from  our  knowledge,  exists 
for  ever  in  the  Eternal  Consciousness  which  con- 
stitutes our  life  ;  as  our  self-consciousness,  even 
when  disappearing  in  deep  sleep,  remains 
intact  in  the  eternal,  ever-waking  Consciousness, 
so,  perfect  love  and  holiness,  when  disap- 
pearing from  our  individual  heart  and  will  after 
their  momentary  manifestation  to  us,  exists 
permanently  in  the  eternal  Person  who  is  our  life, 
and  revealing  themselves  to  us  at  times,  judges 
every  thought,  feeling,  look,  word  and  act  that 
proceed  from  us  and  thus  leads  us  on  and  on  in 
the  path  of  love  and  holiness. 


174  THE    DIVIKE    LOVE    AND    HOLINESS  CHAP. 

Wherever    there    is    moral    struggle,  in  what- 
ever soul  the  seed  of  ethical  life   has    germinated, 
be    it    in  the  smallest  degree,  there  is  manifested 
this  higher  self,  more  or  less.     Not  that  every  one 
can     recognise     this    higher    self   as    the    direct 
manifestation   of    the    Perfect   Being.     As    many 
cannot   recognise    the    light    of    the    self   as    the 
direct  manifestation  of  the  Divine  light,  so    there 
are    many    who    cannot    recognise    this   light   of 
conscience    as    the    direct    manifestation    of    the 
perfect    Light    of  Holmess.     Though  revealed  as 
conscience,  he  remains  unknown    to  many.     But 
whether   known    or  unknown,  it  is  his  manifesta- 
tion   that    makes  ethical  life  possible.     It  is  from 
the    mutual    opposition    of  the    higher   self    and 
the     lower,     from     the   •  conflict     of   conscience 
with  impulse — that  ethical  struggle  rises.     A  soul 
is  not  inconceivable — perhaps  there  may  be  such  a 
class    of  men — in    which  ethical  struggle  has  not 
yet  had  the  smallest  beginning,-  a  man  who  has 
come  up  to  the  human  stage  so  far  as  his  body  is 
concerned,  but  who  is  entirely  subject  to  his  lower 
desires,    who    remains    practically  in  thestage  of 
a  brute.     The  absence   of    conscience    in    such    a 
person    does    not    any    way  make  conscience  the 
less  real.     It  is  in  the  ethical  life  that  conscience 
is    manifested,    and    there  alone  is  its  light  neces- 


iV  CONSCIENCE    OMNIPRESENT  1 75 

sary.  It  exists  in  all  ^Mho  belong  to  the  ethical 
world,  be  they  virtuous,  or  yjcious,  wise. or  foolish, 
civilised  or  uncivilised.  -In  calmer:  mQments, 
when  the  eye  of  conscience  is  not  dimmed  by  the 
excitement  of.  brutal,  passions,  at  such  a  time,  if 
even  a  most  degraded  sinner  is  asked,  "Which  is 
better,  love  or  hate?  virtue  or  vice?  If  you 
get  without  oppressing  others,  without  com- 
mitting sin,  all  for  which  you  oppress  others, 
— ^food,  clothing,  pleasure,  fame,  honour,  power 
&£.,-'— will  you  persist , in,  sinning  ?"  he  will  say 
without  hesitation^-'':IvPve ;  and  virtue  indeed  are 
superior  to  hate  and  vice  ;  if  I  get  w'ithout 
oppression,  without  sin^  ail  that  I  desire,  I 
shall  desist  from  my  sinful  life."  This  natural 
respect  for  and  leaning  towards  love  and  holiness 
exists  in  every  man.  It  is  not  indeed  equally 
deep  in  all.  Its  depth  varies  according  to 
varia;tionS:  in  education,  civilisation  and  culture. 
But  a  general  ideal  of  perfect  love  and  holi- 
ness exists  in  all  m.ore  or  less.  The  more  brightly 
it  exists  in  a  man,  the  greater  is  his  respon- 
sibility and  the  more  strenuous  is  the  struggle  of 
virtue  and  vice  in  him. ,  ..However,  it  is  this 
manifestation  of  Gocjjj  int^ith^t^soul  which  is  the 
clearest  evidence  of  his  fperfiect  love;  and  holinqssi 
He   says    clearly    in    the    soul,    ''1    ajm.i  perfectly 


176  THE    DIVINE    LOVE   AND    HOLINESS  CHAP. 

loving,  perfectly  holy."  This  clear  voice  of  him 
in  the  soul  makes  us  sure  of  his  nature.  Not 
that  we  never  doubt  this  voice  ;  we  do  some- 
times have  doubts.  But  such  a  doubt  is  suicidal, 
it  kills  itself.  We  proceed  to  show  how  it 
does  so. 

Certain  seemingly  harmful  and  seemingly 
unjust  actions  in  the  world  make  us  sometimes 
doubt  the  perfect  love  and  holiness  of  God. 
What  we  perceive  are  mere  actions ;  we  have 
no  direct  knowledge  of  their  moral  quality, — 
whether  they  proceed  from  love  or  hate,  virtue 
or  vice.  And  it  is  impossible  to  have  such  know- 
ledge. W^e  are  directly  aware  only  of  our  own 
motives ;  the  motives  of  other  minds  cannot 
be  direct  objects  of  our  knowledge.  But  as 
actions  similar  to  the  natural  actions  referred  to 
are  often  seen  to  proceed  from  hate  and  wicked- 
ness when  done  by  man,  we  are  led  to  think, 
on  a  superficial  view,  that  God,  the  doer  of  these 
actions  in  nature,  is  unloving  and  unjust.  But 
if,  when  such  doubts  occur  to  us,  we  look  at 
the  light  of  God  within,  we  at  once  see  their 
absurdity.  It  is  only  God's  actions,  not  his 
feelings  and  desires,  that  appear  in  nature.  The 
latter  are  manifest  only  in  our  souls.  In  the  soul 
he   manifests   himself   as  the  embodiment  of  per- 


IV  DOUBT    OF   DIVINE   PERFECTION   ABSURD  177 

feet  love  and  holiness.  Here  his  moral  perfection 
is  an  object,  not  of  inference,  but  of  direct 
perception.  Therefore,  the  doubt  that  he  is 
unloving  and  unholy  in  the  world,  is  vitiated  by 
the  contradiction  that  God  is  perfectly  loving 
and  not  perfectly  loving,  perfectly  holy  and  not 
perfectly  holy.  So  it  is  evidently  suicidal.  With- 
out, we  see  only  a  number  of  his  actions,  we 
do  not  see  his  feelings  and  desires.  But  within, 
he  manifests  himself  as  perfectly  loving  and  per- 
fectly holy.  Therefore,  though  the  actions  are 
enigmatical, — their  exact  purpose  unintelligible — 
there  can  be  no  doubt  that  they  do  not  proceed 
from  any  absence  of  love  or  holiness. 

But  suppose  that  what  we  have  interpreted 
as  the  direct  manifestation  of  God  in  the  soul 
is  not  accepted  as  such  and  is  explained  only 
as  his  action,  and  the  love  and  holiness  in  man's 
heart  is  represented  only  as  his  own  ideal  of  per- 
fection. Now,  even  if  such  an  interpretation  of 
the  facts  be  accepted — an  interpretation  which 
we  consider  as  inadequate — the  doubt  referred 
to,  the  doubt  of  God's  perfect  love  and  holiness, 
may  be  shown  to  be  absurd.  Such  a  doubt  really 
suggests  that  God  has  created  a  being,  that  is 
man,  who  is  higher  than  himself, — has  given  to 
his  creature  what  is  not  in  himself.  It  really  says 
12 


178  THE    DIVINE    LOVE   AND   HOLINESS  CHAP. 

that  not  only  are  such  saints  and  philanthropists 
as  Buddha  and  Jesus  higher  than  God, 
but  even  worms  like  ourselves  sometimes 
rise  higher  than  he,  for  we  too  sometimes  feel 
inclined  to  embrace  the  whole  world,  we  too 
are  sometimes  charmed  with  the  beauty  of  holi- 
ness, and  when  we  do  so,  we  are  really  filled  with 
pure  love  and  holiness.  And  this  doubt  also 
says  that  God,  though  partly  unloving  and  un- 
holy, has  made  man  so  that  he  loves  perfect 
love  and  holiness  and  hates  hatred  and  unholi- 
ness ;  in  other  words,  the  Father  has  made 
the  soil  so  that  the  more  he  grows  up  the  more 
will  he  hate  and  abuse  the  Father  and  the  more 
will  he  incline  towards  that  (that  is,  perfect 
love  and  holiness)  which  the  Father  does  not 
like,  and  at  last  fully  rebelling  against  him, 
strive  after  the  establishment  of  that  kingdom  of 
love  and  righteousness  which  he  is  supposed  to 
hate.  What  an  idea  !  It  makes  the  Divine  Father 
a  greater  fool  than  the  most  foolish  of  human 
fathers,  for  even  a  human  father  never  teaches 
his  son  to  hate  and  rebel  against  him. 

It  will  thus  be  seen  how  very  groundless  are 
the  doubts  about  God's  perfect  love  and  holiness, 
and  how  shallow  and  superficial  are  those  writers 
who     fill     their     books     with     such     worthless 


iV  CONFIRMATION    1-ROM    THE    ORDER    OF    NATURE         179 

doubts  and  are  admired  as  deep  philosophers 
by  their  thoughtless  readers.  The  sceptic  sits 
in  judgment  over  God  because  he  cannot  explain 
certain  enigmatical  events  in  nature.  He  does 
not  see  that  the  ideal  of  love  and  holiness  in  his 
soul  which  leads  him  to  judge  God,  is  revealed 
by  God  himself.  The  love  and  holiness  on  which 
he  takes  his  stand  in  criticising  God,  in  setting 
him  down  as  unloving  and  unjust,  are  the 
clearest  proofs  of  the  Divine  love  and  holiness 
and  the  strongest  refutation  of  his  erroneous 
conclusion,  for  they  prove  that  it  is  not  want 
of  love  and  holiness,  but  something  else,  from 
which  such  actions  proceed. 

This  argument  from  conscience  is  the  main 
proof  of  God's  perfect  love  and  holiness.*  The 
order  and  innumerable  beneficent  adaptations 
in  nature  confirm  this  proof  in  a  thousand  ways. 
With  the  help  of  these  adaptations  man  is  continu- 
ally advancing  towards  greater  and  greater  com- 
fort and  happiness  and  rising  higher  and  higher 
in  the  scale  of  moral  excellence.  We  are  not 
going  to  describe  these  beneficent  designs  in 
detail.      They   fill    man's   inner   and    outer   life, 

*  On  this  subject,  see  Dr.  James  Martineau's  Study  of 
Religion,  Bk.  II,  Chap.  II,  and  Green's  Prolegomena  to 
Ethics,  Bk.  Ill,  Chap.  II. 


i8o  god's  love  to  individuals  chap. 

— the  home,  the  village,  the  town,  the  field,  the 
river,  the  hill  and  the  ocean.  All  sciences  loudly 
proclaim  the  beneficence  of  nature.  In  the  world, 
the  good  is  the  rule, — it  is  the  good  that  is 
progressive.  Painful  and  enigmatical  events  are 
transient  and  vanishing.  With  such  events  we 
shall  deal  in  some  detail  at  the  end  of  the 
present  chapter. 

Section  2 — God's  Love  to  Individuals 

God's  love  to  man  seems  at  first  sight  to  be 
only  general.  It  seems,  on  a  superficial  view, 
that  he  takes  care  of  man  only  in  a  general  way 
and  that  every  man  individually  is  not  the 
object  of  his  love.  But  on  a  somewhat  closer 
view  a  speciality  is  found  underlying  this 
generality.  When  we  contemplate  somewhat 
deeply  the  love  of  God,  it  is  found  that  as  he 
exists  as  the  life  of  every  soul,  as  the  Inner 
Ruler  and  Searcher  of  every  heart,  so  he  is  the 
Father,  Mother,  Friend,  Teacher,  Guide,  Saviour, 
and  Lord  of  every  person.  Every  human  heart  has 
a  deep  and  sweet  relation  with  him,  and  this 
relation  is  becoming  gradually  deeper  and  sweeter. 
We  insert  here  a  portion  of  a  sermon  preached 
by  the  present  writer  in  the  Mandir  of  the 
Sadharan    Brahmo   Samaj  on  the  love  of  God  to 


IV  GOD  S    DIRECT    DEALINGS    WITH    EVERY    MAN  lOI 

individuals.  The  first  few  words  of  this  extract 
have  been  said  once  or  twice  before  in  this  book, 
but  a  repetition  of  them  here  will  not  perhaps  be 
unpleasant. 

"When  we  look  at  the  relation  of  God  and 
man  in  the  light  of  self-consciousness,  this  truth 
becomes  very  clear,  and  our  faith  in  it  becomes 
gradually  brighter.  It  is  needless  to  say  that 
in  order  to  understand  this  relation,  deep  thought 
and  meditation  are  necessary.  To  those  who 
neglect  this  knowledge  as  only  dry  philosophical 
doctrine,  and  not  seeing  its  necessary  relation 
to  higher  spiritual  life,  are  indifferent  to  its 
culture,  the  higher  truths  about  the  love  of  God 
and  his  constant  activity  always  remain  dim 
and  covered  with  doubts  and  appear  like  dreams. 
But  when  the  deep  and  constant  relation  of  God 
with  the  soul  is  realised  by  deep  meditation,  the 
truth  of  his  incomparable  love  grows  bright. 
What  does  self-consciousness  show  us  ?  It  shows 
that  my  life  rests  in  God  in  all  conditions, — in 
waking,  oblivion,  dream  and  sleep.  In  no  state 
of  my  life,  not  for  a  single  moment,  am  I  under 
any  blind  force.  At  all  times,  in  all  states,  I 
live  in  him.  And  I  have  no  power  which  is  not 
derived  from  him,  which  does  not  rest  in  him. 
This  imajre    of    the    congregation    before    me    is 


l82 


GOD  S    LOVE    TO    INDIVIDUALS  CHAP, 


painted   by   God  himself  on  my  mind, — this  per- 
ception is  entirely  a  spiritual  phenomenon.     It   is 
not    the    body    that   sees,    and  a  material  object 
cannot  make  one  see.     It  is    the    soul    that   sees, 
and   it  is  the  soul  that  shows ;  seeing  is  a  state  of 
the  soul.     Thus  it  is  seen    that,    seeing,    hearing, 
smelling,    tasting    and  touching  are  all  spiritual 
phenomena, — the  contact  of  soul  with  soul.    And 
it    is   only    he    who  is    within  the  soul,  in  whose 
hand  the  soul  is,  to  whom  the  soul  is  as    a   play- 
thing, that  can  produce  these  phenomena.  Again, 
when    we    look   at    our   life    from   another  side, 
when    we    see    that    we    are  extremely  forgetful, 
but   at   the    same    time    memory    is    ever   active 
in    us,   that  though  we  are  forgetful,  our  life  goes 
on  quite  smoothly  without  any  difficulty,    we  are 
surprised  to  see  the   deep    relation    of    God   with 
the  soul.     This  very  moment,  when  we  are  think- 
ing of  God  in  this  Mandir,  how    many    things    of 
our   life    we  have  forgotten  !  Now  we  have  lost, 
so  to  say,  the  whole  of  our  past  life.     But  as   we 
are  speaking,  things  lost  or  forgotten  are    coming 
back  to  the  mind.     When  we  re-enter  the  world,, 
everything  will  occur  to  the  mind  again  in    time. 
Thus   we    are   forgetting  things    every   now  and 
then  and  remembering    them    again.     Where    do 
the    events    of   our   past  life  go  when  we  forget 


IV  WITNESS    OF    MEMORY    AND    RE-WAKING  183 

them,  and  where  do  they  come  from  again  ?  And 
who  brings  them  back  ?  When  we  think  of  these 
things,  we  feel  extremely  surprised.  How  near 
my  soul  is  he, — how  closely  related  is  my  soul 
to  that  all-seeing  and  ever-waking  Spirit  who 
holds  these  things  in  him  and  returns  them  to 
me !  The  soul  is  really  a  plaything  to  him. 
Again,  when  we  sleep  and  become  unconscious, 
utterly  inert  and  inactive,  and  lose  knowledge, 
memory,  understanding,  power,  everything,  in 
whom  does  the  soul  then  live  ?  In  that  helpless 
state,  who  preserves  the  lost  things  of  life  ?  And 
who  wakes  us  in  time  and  gives  us  back  the 
lost  contents  of  life  ?  Not  awaking  would  be 
quite  possible ;  why  then  do  we  awake  ?  And 
who  wakes  us  ?  And  even  when  awakened,  we 
might  not  get  back  those  things.  In  that  case 
our  life  would  be  reduced  to  the  state  of  an 
infant.  Who  carefully  gives  them  back  and 
resumes  the  solemn  play  of  life  ?  It  is  he, — that 
sleepless,  ever-waking  Person, — who  is  the  con- 
stant support  of  the  soul,  and  of  whom  the  soul 
is  a  plaything.  Thus  we  see  that  every  soul  is 
deeply  and  directly  related  to  the  Supreme  Being. 
Whatever  elements  are  required  for  the  sustenance 
and  advancement  of  our  life,  he  gives  directly 
to  every  soul.    Knowledge,  feeling  and  power,  of 


184  god's  love  to  individuals  chap. 

which  our  life  consists,  are  not  under  our  own 
control.  He  directly  gives  these  to  us  and  thus 
keeps  us  alive.  Every  soul,  every  human  life, 
is  a  field  of  his  incessant  activity.  What  we  call 
the  world  is  an  aggregate  of  such  fields. 

"  When  we  look  at  the  face  of  God  in  the 
light  of  this  blessed  knowledge  revealed  in  the 
soul,  we  are  charmed  and  struck  dumb  with 
awe.  We  then  see  that  the  general  providence 
of  God  is  a  mere  meaningless  phrase.  To  say 
that  God  loves  us  in  a  general  way,  is  to  ascribe 
human  imperfection  to  him.  Or  if  general 
providence  has  any  meaning,  that  meaning  is 
that  the  aggregate  of  special  providences  or 
dispensations  may  in  a  sense  be  called  general 
providence.  It  is  indeed  true  that  God  works 
by  general  laws.  But  this  does  not  make  our 
individual  relation  to  him  general.  He  works 
by  general  laws,  but  the  fields  of  his  activity 
are  particular.  He  deals  specially  and  ceaselessly 
with  individual  souls.  From  morning  to  evening, 
and  from  evening  to  another  morning,  all  day 
and  night  his  loving  activity  goes  on  in  our 
hearts  and  in  our  lives.  It  is  he  who  wakes  all, 
calls  the  heart  to  utter  his  name  and  sing  his 
praise  at  the  break  of  day,  takes  us  out  to  enjoy 
the  cool  morning  breeze,  bathes  us  in  cool  water, 


IV  THE    BESETTING   GOD  185 

the  direct  manifestation  of  his  love,  and  makes 
us  take  our  food,  the  direct  embodiment  of  his 
grace.  Is  it  mere  poetry  to  say  that  he  makes 
us  eat?  Is  the  truth  merely  this,  that  I  eat? 
Certainly  not.  I  could  not  see  my  food  unless 
he  showed  it  to  me  as  the  eye  of  my  eyes.  Not 
a  particle  of  the  food  could  exist  unless  he  sup- 
ported it.  And  unless  he  infused  strength  into 
my  body  moment  by  moment,  my  eating  and 
drinking  and  all  other  acts  would  be  impossible. 
In  what  are  merely  physical  or  human  acts  to  the 
eye  of  the  shallow  and  the  unbelieving,  where 
the  shallow  see  only  the  cook  or  the  members 
of  their  families  or  only  a  number  of  material 
things,  the  closely  observing  believer  sees  the 
living  presence  of  God  and  is  overwhelmed  with 
feeling.  It  is  thus  that  God  sustains  and  nurses 
us.  He  himself  exists  in  the  body,  digests  our 
food,  circulates  our  blood  and  performs  all 
other  functions  of  the  body.  Present  in  our  field 
of  work,  he  infuses  strength  into  our  body  and 
mind  and  makes  us  work.  Ever  related  to  the 
body  and  the  mind,  he  accompanies  us  wherever 
we  go  and  saves  us  from  the  innumerable 
dangers  that  beset  our  daily  life.  It  is  he 
who  gives  us  rest  and  peace  when  our  labours 
are  at  an  end.     It  is  he   who,    when   we   study, 


iS6 


GOD  S   LOVE   TO    INDIVIDUALS  CHAP. 


makes  us  see  as  the  eye  of  our  eyes,  and  imparts 
to  us  the  light  of  knowledge  through  our  reason 
and  understanding.  It  is  he  who  calls  us  to 
worship,  makes  us  join  our  hands  and  close  our 
eyes,  composes  our  thoughts,  reveals  himself  to 
the  soul  as  truth,  love  and  holiness,  refreshes 
our  heart  with  love  and  peace,  and  braces 
the  soul  with  the  strength  of  holiness.  It  is  he 
who,  as  our  conscience,  gives  commandments  to 
the  soul,  saves  it  from  sin,  leads  it  to  virtuous 
acts,  and  holding  before  it  higher  and  higher 
ideals  of  spiritual  life,  allures  it  to  heaven. 
It  is  he  who  leads  us  to  the  virtuous  and  the 
pious,  makes  us  hear  their  sweet  words  as  the 
ear  of  our  ears,  enables  our  mind  to  understand 
them,  and  impresses  them  on  our  hearts.  Bridg- 
ing over  great  distances  of  time  and  space, 
he  leads  us  to  the  assembly  of  the  ancient 
Aryan  sages  and  makes  us  listen  to  their  deep 
teachings,  shows  us  the  figure  of  the  Buddha 
in  profound  meditation  under  the  Bodhi-tree, 
makes  us  hear  the  blessed  words  of  Jesus  seated 
on  the  mountains  of  Canaan,  leads  us  to  Calvary 
and  shows  us  that  touching  and  wonderful  scene 
of  self-sacrifice,  and  taking  us  to  old  Nadia, 
makes  us  dance  in  the  excitement  of  love  with 
the     love-maddened    devotees    assembled     there. 


IV  THE    DIVIN'E    LOVE    OVERWHELMING  187 

Thus  taking  us  into  the  company  of  innumerable 
devotees,  thinkers  and  workers,  old  and  new, 
he  shows  the  soul  the  beauties  of  heaven  and 
leads  it  to  salvation.  If  I  multiply  my  activity 
for  myself  millions  of  times,  it  will  not  equal 
his  activity  for  me.  Where  then  is  that 
generality  of  providence  that  we  hear  of? 
Everything  about  it  is  special.  The  whole  of 
my  life,  I  see,  is  a  field  of  his  special  providence. 
I  lie  steeped  in  the  ocean  of  his  special  love. 
Whatever  I  see,  hear,  gain,  enjoy  or  suffer,— 
all  are  waves  of  this  ocean  of  special  love. 
The  sun,  the  moon,  water,  air,  the  earth,  1113' 
house,  my  family,  my  friends,  society,  good  books, 
good  men,  knowledge,  love,  peace,  holiness, 
all  are  waves  of  that  love.  I  lie  floating  on  that 
ocean  ;  his  love  is  endless,  boundless,  unspeakable. 
It  is  because  I  cannot  realise  his  love  fully  that 
I  am  able  to  live  ;  a  full  realisation  would  be 
too  much  for  the  feelings  and  unbearable  to  the 
heart.  When  I  realise  it  a  little,  when  I  see 
how  wicked  I  am,  how  base  and  ungrateful,  how 
very  indifferent  to  him,  and  how  very  busy  with 
the  worthless  things  of  the  world,  while  on  the 
other  hand,  he  is  heaping  mercies  on  my  head, 
and  plunging  me  in  an  ocean  of  love  which 
cannot    be    paid    back,    my     heart     swells     up, 


THE    MYSTERY   OF    EVIL 

and   seems   bursting.     Then    I    sing  quite  heart- 

ily- 

'The  weight  of  thy  love 

I  can  bear  no  more  ; 
My  heart  cries  out  and  bursts 

when  I  see  thy  love  ; 
I  take  refuge  in  thy  fearless  feet'* 
"When   shall    I    know  his  love,  feel  it  deeply, 
be  loving,  and   never   know  dryness  !  When  will 
it  be  that, — 

'Maddened  by  love  I  shall  laugh  and  cry, 
Shall  float  in  the  ocean  of  divine  bliss, 
Shall  madden  others  with  my  madness. 
And  shall  disport  for  ever  under  the 

feet  of  God! 't 
May    the    Merciful   soon    bring    such  a  happy 
day !" 

Section  3 — The  Mystery  of  Evil 

We  have  set  forth  to  the  best  of  our  power 
the  proof  of  God's  perfect  love  and  holiness. 
It  is  now  time  for  us  to  speak  of  certain  enig- 
matical events  in  nature  which  seem  to  conflict 
with  the  divine  perfection.     The  subject  is  a  very 

*     Hymn.   No.  322  in  Brahniasangit :     Ninth  Edition, 
pubhshed  by  the  Sadharan  Brahmo  Samaj. 
t  Hymn  No.  703  in  the  same  collection. 


THE    REAL   FOUN'DATIOK    OF   FAITH  lOg 

difficult  one,  and  for  its  very  difficulty  demands 
a  lengthy  discussion.  But  it  does  not  fall  with- 
in the  scope  of  this  book  to  discuss  the  subject 
fully.*  We  shall  say  only  a  few  words  briefly 
on  the  subject. 

The  first  remark  that  we  have  to  make  is 
that  for  establishing  our  faith  on  a  firm  ground 
a  discussion  of  such  events  is  not  absolutely 
necessary.  The  real  foundation  of  faith  is  internal 
evidence.  So  long  as  man  does  not  clearly  see 
the  nature  of  this  evidence,  he  remains  busy 
with  the  discussion  of  external  events.  Not  that 
when  this  evidence  becomes  clear  such  a  dis- 
cussion becomes  quite  unnecessary  ;  but  in  that 
case,  faith,  resignation,  hope  and  peace  no  more 
depend  on  such  discussions.  Where  the  intellect 
fails  to  understand,  the  soul  rests  on  the  bright 
light  of  reason  within  and  hopes  that  with  the  pro- 
gress of  knowledge  the  unintelligible  will  become 
intelligible.  A  few  years  of  friendship  and  mu- 
tual respect  make  us  trust  a  human  friend  so 
much,  that  even  when  we  see  him  doing  a 
number  of  enigmatical  and  seemingly  wrong 
actions,    we    do    not   at   once  set  them  down  as 

*  See  Dr.  Martineau's  excellent  treatment  of  this 
subject  in  his  Study  of  Religion  Bk.  II,  Chap.  III.  See 
also  Hedge's  Reason  in  Religion  :  "The  Old  Enigma." 


igO  THE  MYSTERY  OF  EVIL  CHAP. 

such,  but  believe  that  in  time  we  shall  see  the 
reasonableness  of  such  actions.  We  naturally 
accuse  a  man  of  extreme  suspiciousness  and 
meanness  of  heart  in  whom  we  do  not  see  such 
trust.  If  such  confidence  is  reasonable  in  regard 
to  a  puny  and  imperfect  human  friend,  how 
much  more  reasonable  it  is  in  regard  to  our 
greatest  Friend, the  Supreme  Being.  It  is  impossible 
that  with  the  particle  of  knowledge  given  to 
us  we  should  penetrate  into  the  meaning  of  all 
the  acts  of  the  Infinite.  Therefore,  even  if  we  fail 
to  give  a  reasonable  explanation  of  the  seeming 
€vils  of  the  world,  our  intuitive  faith  in  God's 
goodness  remains  unshaken. 

Our   second  remark  on  the  subject  is  that  the 
explanation   which   some    sceptics    offer   of     the 
enigma  is  quite  unacceptable.     They   think    that 
the    evils    of   the    world    are  due  to  the  fact  that 
God  has  not  been  able    to    bring   entirely   under 
his   control    the  original  uncreated  matter  which 
forms   the   substance    of    the    world.      We  have 
shown    in    the    proper   place    that  what  we  call 
matter  is  entirely  dependent    on    mind,    so    that 
there    is   no    meaning  in  God's  bringing  it  under 
his  control.     We  have  also  shown  that  it  is  only 
consciousness    that    can     have     efficiency, — that 
efficiency   and   consciousness   are   inseparable,  so 


SEEMING    EVILS  igi 

that  an  unconscious  object  opposing  God  is  also 
meaningless.  Thirdly,  we  have  also  shown  that 
there  can  be  no  power  in  the  universe  except  an 
infinite  and  indivisible  Mind,  and  that  all  finite 
powers  are  reproductions  of  this  infinite  Power. 

Our  third  remark  is  that  many  events  in 
nature  which  seem  to  be  evils  are  only  blessings 
in  disguise.  With  the  progress  of  human  know- 
ledge many  events  and  things  that  formerly 
seemed  to  be  harmful  have  been  proved  to  be 
beneficial.  The  effect  of  storms  and  fires  in 
purifying  the  air,  the  beneficence  of  famines  and 
epidemics  in  checking  over-population  and  pro- 
moting sympathy  and  benevolence,  the  various 
usefulness  of  many  poisonous  animals  and  plants, 
and  the  wonderful  power  for  good  possessed  by 
the  apparently  dreadful  lightning,  are  no  longer 
unknown  to  any  one.  That  the  troubles  and 
trials  of  life  chasten  and  soften  the  heart,  bring 
experience  and  foresight  to  the  understanding 
and  strength  to  the  will,  is  known  to  every 
thoughtful  person.  If  we  had  space  enough, 
we  might  have  dwelt  long  on  the  subject.  It  is 
to  be  hoped  that  with  the  gradual  advancement 
of  human  knowledge  the  real  nature  of  many 
other  things  now  seeming  to  be  evils  will  be 
revealed. 


ig2  THE    MYSTERY   OF   EVIL  CHAP. 

Our  fourth  remark  is  that  the  process  of 
creation  is  not  yet  at  an  end.  The  world  is  not  a 
completed  thing ;  its  creation  is  still  going  on 
and  it  has  not  yet  reached  perfection.  Science 
proves  that  the  visible  world  has,  from  the  state 
of  a  fiery  gas,  become  gradually  cool,  hard  and 
suitable  for  the  habitation  of  living  beings,  and 
that  its  suitableness  is  continually  increasing. 
Natural  cataclysms  are  becoming  fewer  and 
fewer  and  with  the  gradual  increase  of 
man's  power  and  knowledge  many  means  have 
been  discovered  for  protecting  him  from  such 
cataclysms.  The  world  is  going  on  from  im- 
perfection to  perfection.  The  divine  purpose  in 
regard  to  the  world  is  not  yet  fully  revealed, 
but  is  being  gradually  revealed.  It  is  unavoid- 
able that  in  the  course  of  this  gradual  develop- 
ment of  the  world  many  imperfections  should  be 
seen  in  it, — that  it  should  fall  short  of  the  ideal 
of  perfection  revealed  by  God  himself  in  the 
human  mind.  But  the  Creator  cannot  be  blamed 
for  this  imperfection,  for  it  is  continually  vanish- 
ing. If  vanishing  imperfection  is  an  evil,  there 
is  indeed  evil  in  the  world,  but  such  evil  does 
not  conflict  with  the  goodness  of  God.  Now,  it 
may  be  asked,  "Why  this  gradual  development  ? 
What   means   this  slow  process  of  improvement  ? 


IV  CREATION    MUST    BR    A    PROCESS  IQJ 

Why  did  not  God  make  the  world  perfect  from 
the  beginning?"  Of  course  none  but  God  himself 
can  give  a  satisfactory  answer  to  these  questions. 
What  little  we  understand  of  the  matter  we  may 
put  briefly  as  follows:  (i)  The  only  idea  we 
have  of  a  thing  subject  to  time  is  that  it  should 
grow  gradually.  Time  implies  a  process,  in 
this  case  a  process  of  growth.  (2)  Even  if  it 
were  possible  for  the  universe  to  come  out  perfect 
from  the  Creator's  hand,  it  would  not  be  desir- 
able. In  that  case  man  would  understand 
nothing  of  its  nature.  Science  depends  on  the 
study  of  process — of  a  process  of  growth.  There 
would  have  been  no  science  without  a  process  of 
growth,  and  so  an  important  characteristic  of 
human  nature  would  have  been  impossible. 
(3)  Not  only  science,  but  other  characteristics  of 
humanity  would  perhaps  have  been  impossible  in 
that  case.  It  is  because  the  world  is  a  process  of 
growth  that  man  is  active.  There  are  wants 
in  nature,  and  to  remove  them  man  has  to 
struggle  against  them,  and  in  this  struggle  he 
is  coming  into  constant  relations  of  sympathy, 
co-operation  and  competition  with  fellow-men. 
In  this  consists  the  manhood  of  man.  If  the 
world  were  a  perfect  object  without  process 
and    development,    these   relations  and  the  man- 

13 


194  THE  MYSTERY  OF  EVIL  CHAP. 

hood    they  make     possible     would     have     been 
impossible. 

Fifthly,    what   has   been    said  of  the  world's 
imperfection  and  the  process  of    growth    through 
which  it  is  passing,  applies  more  clearly  to  man's 
individual  and  social  life.     God    is  one,    infinite 
and  perfect.     He    cannot   make    another   infinite 
and  perfect  being.     There  cannot  be    more    than 
one  infinite  and  perfect   being.     God's   infinitude 
and    perfection    cannot    be  communicated  to  any 
other  being.     This  does  not    imply    any   absence 
of   power   in    God.     That  the  impossible  cannot 
be  done,  does  not  bespeak    any    want    of   power. 
As    it   does  not  imply  any  want  of  power  in  God 
that   he    cannot   make    two    and    two  five,  so  it 
implies  no  want  of  power  in  him  that  he    cannot 
make  man,  whose  life  is  subject  to  time,    perfect. 
A   created   object   must   necessarily  be  finite  and 
imperfect.     Something  which  begins  to  be,    must 
be  such  that  it  can  make  continual   progress,    but 
can    never  be    perfect.      Imperfection     must    be 
inherent    in    it,    and    this    inherent    imperfection 
must  be   unavoidable  to  it.     Whatever  progress 
it  makes  towards   perfection,    some    imperfection 
must  always  stick  to    it.     Infinite   power,    know- 
ledge,   love,    peace    and    holiness   can  belong  to 
God   alone.     Created   beings   must  be  limited  in 


IV  A    CREATED    BEIXG    MUST    BE    LIMITED  195 

these  attributes.  The  creatures  of  a  perfectly 
good  God  must  indeed  be  progressive,  but  a 
creature  must  necessarily  be  imperfect.  This 
imperfection  may  in  a  sense  be  called  an  evil, 
but  this  evil,  that  is,  the  want  of  perfect  good, 
is  unavoidable  for  created  beings.  For  them 
there  is  no  meaning  in  a  good  free  from  this 
€vil.  The  very  idea  of  a  created  being  is  this, — 
he  can  expect  from  an  omnipotent  and  perfectly 
good  Creator  only  this — that  he  should  make 
gradual  progress  from  evil  towards  good,  that  is 
from  imperfection  towards  perfection.  Such 
progress  is  his  only  good.  And  man  and  his 
condition  exactly  correspond  to  this  idea.  Under 
the  providence  of  God  he  is  making  continual 
progress  towards  power,  knowledge,  civilisation, 
happiness,  love  and  peace.  Whatever  evils  we 
see  in  his  life  are  but  forms  of  his  inherent  im- 
perfection as  a  created  being.  Imperfection  in 
knowledge  and  power  is  itself  an  evil  in  one 
sense,  though  this  evil  does  not  conflict  with 
the  divine  goodness.  And  then  a  certain  amount 
of  pain  as  the  result  of  this  imperfection  is  also 
unavoidable.  The  ultimate  explanation  of  evil 
is  this  imperfection  inherent  in  created  nature. 
In  seeking  an  explanation  of  many  particular 
painful   events   we  see  behind  them  this  inherent 


ig6  THE    MYSTERY    OF    EVIL 

imperfection  of  man — his  want  of  knowledge, 
power  «&c.  Where  the  cause  of  some  painful 
event  cannot  be  clearly  discovered,  we  ought 
to  trust  in  the  light  within  and  believe  that 
it  must  be  due  to  some  such  unavoidable  cause. 

The    conclusion    of  the  whole  matter  is  there- 
fore this : — There  is    really   no    conflict   between 
the  omnipotence  and  the  perfect  love  and  holiness 
of  God  on   the    one    hand   and    the    imperfection 
of   created   beings   and  the  pain  consequent  upon 
it  on  the    other.     Notwithstanding    the    omnipo- 
tence  and  perfect  goodness  of  God,  the  imperfec- 
tion of  created  beings  and  a   certain   amount   of 
pain     resulting    from    it    are    unavoidable.     But 
this   pain    is,    in  most  instances,  the  harbinger  of 
higher     happiness    and   spiritual    progress.     And 
pain  of  all  forms  is  transient.     With  the    progress 
of  man   pain    is    disappearing   from    the    world. 
Our  intuitive  faith  in  God's  perfection    is   there- 
fore untouched   by    the    evil   seen    in  the  world. 
But  inspite  of  this  clear   witness   of   knowledge, 
our   weak   faith    is    often    shaken  by  the  several 
trials     of    life.     Nothing  but    deep    communion 
with  God  in  worship  and    the    hearty    enjoyment 
of  his  love  can  remedy  this  weakness  of  faith. 

We    have    explained  almost  all  the  attributes 
in  which    God   reveals   himself   to    man    and   in 


IV  THE    DIVINE    BLISSFULNESS  197 

which  his  devotees  worship  him.  These  main 
attributes  have  under  them  innumerable  sub- 
attributes  which  perhaps  need  not  be  particularly 
expounded  here.  When  faith  is  established  in 
these  fundamental  attributes  and  the  soul  ad- 
vances in  religious  life  in  the  light  of  such 
faith,  these  sub-attributes  are  gradually  revealed 
to  it.  One  attribute,  which  may  be  reckoned 
as  a  fundamental  attribute  and  which  devotees 
make  an  object  of  devout  meditation,  has  received 
no  particular  exposition  in  this  book.  It  is  the 
blissfulness  (dnanda)  of  God.  The  cause  of  our 
not  taking  it  up  is  that  it  scarcely  admits  of 
metaphysical  exposition  and  is  not  an  object 
of  metaphysical  doubt.*  The  blissfulness  of  God 
is  more  an  object  of  feeling  and  enjoyment  than 
of  thought  and  discussion.  Discussion  enables 
us  to  see  only  so  far  that  a  state  of  perfect 
knowledge,  love  and  holiness  is  also  a  state  of 
perfect  bliss.  It  is  imperfection,  it  is  want,  that 
causes  pain,  while  perfection  is  the  source  of 
bliss.  The  Perfect  One  therefore  is  perfectly 
blissful.  But  perhaps  devotees  scarcely  contem- 
plate God's  blissfulness    in    this   light.     It   is   his 

*  This  was  written  before  the  appearance  of  Mr. 
F.  H.  Bradley's  Appearance  aud  Reality,  in  which  the 
subject  is  elaborately  dealt  with. 


ig8  THE    MYSTERY    OF    EVIL  CHAP. 

manifestation  as  bliss  in  moments  of  deep  devo- 
tion— 'Ananda-YUpam-amvitam  yadvihhdti — *  that 
is  particularly  the  object  of  adoration  and  enjoy- 
ment. It  is  when  he  reveals  himself  in  deep 
communion  as  the  life  of  our  life,  that  we  feel 
him  as  blissful.  It  is  when  the  heart  swells  on 
seeing  the  Perfectly  Loving,  as  the  ocean  swells 
through  the  attraction  of  the  moon,  that  we 
feel  him  as  blissful.  It  is  when  the  heart,  finding 
no  joy  in  earthly  things,  thirsts  after  seeing  the 
Unseen  in  his  matchless  beauty  and  is 
charmed  by  the  merest  glimpse  of  that  beauty, 
that  we  feel  him  as  blissful.  Blessed  is  the  Blissful 
(Anandarupam),  the  Nectarful  {Amritarupam), 
May  his  bliss,  his  nectar,  fill  the  whole  world  ! 


*  The  Mundaka  Upanishad,  11 


Supplementary  ghapters 

CHAPTER  A 
THEISTIC  PRESUPPOSITIONS  OF  SCIENCE* 

We  have  seen  in  our  fourth  lecture  how  mind 
and  nature,  in  their  relation  as  subject  and 
object,  reveal  a  conscious  unity  which  at  once 
constitutes  this  relation  and  transcends  the  limi- 
tation implied  in  it,  and  how  our  knowledge 
of  time  and  space  also  involves  the  knowledge 
of  an  infinite  and  eternal  Consciousness  in  re- 
lation to  which  all  things  in  time  and  space 
exist,  and  which  is  also  the  inmost  self  of  all 
intelligent  beings.  The  method  we  employed 
in  arriving  at  these  truths  is  called  the  metaphysi- 
cal— the  method  of  a  science  which  claims  to 
be  the  science  of  all  sciences,  for  it  deals  with 
the  fundamental  principles  of  all  special  sciences 
— the   principles    underlying    all    knowledge  and 

*  Lecture  V  of  the  author's  Philosophy  of  Brdhmaism. 


200  THEISTIC    PRESUPPOSITIONS    OF   SCIENCE  CHAP. 

reality.  As  we  saw  in  the  last  lecture,  in  all 
acts  of  knowing,  the  concrete  reality  known  is  a 
subject-object — an  indivisible  consciousness  with 
objects  necessarily  related  to  it.  In  no  act  of 
knowing,  as  we  saw,  do  we  know  a  mere  object 
unrelated  to  a  subject  or  a  mere  subject  unrelated 
to  an  object,  a  finite  subject  unrelated  to  the 
Infinite  or  a  bare,  colourless  Infinite  without  any 
relation  to  things  finite.  Now,  it  is  this  essential 
relation  of  the  object  to  the  subject  and  the 
finite  to  the  Infinite  which  it  is  the  special  pro- 
vince of  Metaphysics  to  show  forth  and  on  a 
practical  recognition  of  which  all  religion,  truly 
so  called,  is  based.  But  it  will  be  seen  that  all 
special  sciences,  sciences  dealing  with  particular 
things  or  particular  aspects  of  things,  are, — in 
so  far  as  they  retain  their  speciality,  in  so  far  as 
they  avoid  dealing  with  the  general  principles 
of  all  sciences  and  do  not  intrude  upon  the 
subject-matter  of  other  sciences, — based  on  an 
abstraction  of  this  fundamental  relation.  They 
speak  of  objects  as  if  they  were  realities  independ- 
ent of  a  subject,  and  of  finite  intelligences  as  if 
they  were  distinct  realities  unconnected  with  one 
another  and  independent  of  the  Supreme  Intelli- 
gence or  God.  This  abstraction  is  indeed 
necessary  for  the  existence  and  elaboration  of  the 


A  SPECIAL   SCIENCES    BASED    ON    ABSTRACTION  20I 

Special  sciences.  Their  function  of  finding  out 
the  qualities  and  relations  of  special  things 
would  not  be  helped,  but  would  rather  be  ham- 
pered, by  constant  references  to  metaphysical 
truths — to  their  relation  to  the  Supreme  Reality 
of  whi:h  they  are  parts  or  manifestations.  But 
what  is  unfortunate  is,  that  not  only  the  un- 
reflective  and  unscientific  mass,  but  many  men  of 
science  also  are  not  aware  that  the  special  sciences 
proceed  upon  an  abstraction,  and  that  really 
there  is  only  one  absolute  science,  the  science 
of  the  Supreme  Reality  or  God,  and  all  special 
sciences  are  only  ramifications  of  that  one 
absolute  science, — all  dealing  with  relative  truths 
— truths  that  rise  into  absoluteness  only  when 
they  are  looked  at  in  the  light  of  the  one  Abso- 
lute Truth.  Most  scientific  men  mistake  the 
abstraction  of  objects  from  the  mind  and  of  the 
finite  from  the  Infinite  as  a  real  separation,  and 
do  not  feel  the  need  of  rounding  off  the  special 
sciences  by  showing  their  necessary  relation  to 
Metaphysics  or  Absolute  Science.  They  do  not 
see  that  the  knowledge  imparted  by  the  special 
sciences  does  not  amount  to  real  or  absolute 
knowledge  unless  it  is  seen  in  relation  to  the 
knowledge  of  the  one  Absolute  Reality  that 
shines  through  all.     Now,  this  attitude  of  scienti- 


202  TIIEISTIC    PRESUPPOSITIOXS    OF    SCIENXE  CHAP. 

fic  men  is,  in  these  days,  doing  the  greatest 
harm  to  religion.  The  world  is  happily  growing 
more  and  more  scientific  day  after  day.  Scientific 
methods,  the  methods  of  observation  and  generali- 
sation, are  being  applied  to  all  departments  of 
nature  and  society.  Blind  dependence  on  author- 
ity is  giving  way  to  free  and  unbiased  thought 
in  all  concerns  of  life.  Religion,  which  was 
the  last  human  concern  to  rest  upon  authority ,^ 
is  itself  tending  to  become  a  science,  and  has 
already  become  so  to  some  choice  minds.  But 
to  the  great  majority  of  reflective  men  it  is  not 
yet  a  science,  and  such  men  seem  to  swing 
between  two  extremes.  One  portion  seems  still 
to  be  trying  to  feel  after  a  foundation  of  faith 
independent  of  science,  while  the  other  has  run 
to  the  opposite  dogmatism  of  supposing  the 
special  sciences  as  sources  of  absolute  knowledge 
and  of  rejecting  as  superstition  everything  that 
does  not  come  within  their  sphere.  People  of 
this  class  naturalh'  look  upon  the  truths  of 
religion  as  no  truths  at  all,  and  can  be  won  back 
over  to  religion  only  if  they  can  be  shown  that 
the  principles  that  guide  scientific  thought,, 
commonly  so-called,  are  not  fundamental  prin- 
ciples leading  to  true  or  absolute  knowledge, — 
that  they    need    to   be    re-criticised    and   seen    in 


A  METAPHYSICAL    CONCEPTIONS    IN    SCIENCE  203. 

relation  to  principles  that  are  really  fundamental, 
and  that  when  this  is  done,  it  is  seen  that  the 
sciences,  instead  of  being  opposed  or  indifferent 
to  religion,  instead  of  being  sceptical  or  agnostic 
as  regards  religious  truths,  are  really  so  many 
revelations  of  God.  This  will  be  clear  if  we 
examine  the  basal  conceptions  of  the  various 
sciences, — the  fundamental  principles  which  they 
take  for  granted  in  their  investigations  of  the 
phenomena  of  nature  and  mind.  Such  an  ex- 
amination will  show  that  these  conceptions  are 
really  metaphysical  and  are  direct  attestations  or 
expressions  of  the  truths  of  religion.  Now,  our 
proposed  survey  of  the  fundamental  conceptions 
of  science  must  necessarily  be  a  very  brief  and 
hurried  one,  as  it  must  be  limited  by  the  limited 
scope  of  this  lecture.  But  I  think  it  will  give 
you  sufficient  food  for  reflection  and  afford  hints 
which,  if  developed  by  thought  and  study,  will 
convince  you  that  the  agnostic  or  sceptical  aspect 
of  modern  science  is  a  false  appearance,  the 
result,  not  of  true  scientific  insight,  but  rather 
the  absence  of  it  on  the  part  of  scientific  men, 
due  rather  to  a  circumscribed  view^  of  the  nature 
and  requirements  of  science  than  to  a  truly 
scientific  vision  of  mind  and  nature. 

Now,    the   sciences   so  far  recognised  as  such 


204  THEISTIC    PRESUPPOSITIOXS    OF    SCIENXE  CHAP. 

may  be  divided  into  three  main  groups,  the 
Physical,  the  Biological  and  the  Moral.  In  the 
first-mentioned  group  are  such  sciences  as  Physics, 
Chemistry,  Geology  and  Astronomy  ;  the  second 
includes  Botany,  Physiology,  Zoology  and  the 
like  ;  and  the  third  comprises  Psychology,  Logic, 
Ethics,  Sociology,  Politics,  etc.  The  fundamental 
conceptions  employed  in  the  physical  group  are 
those  of  substance,  casuality  and  reciprocal 
action  ;  those  used  in  the  biological  are  life  and 
growth  ;  and  those  on  which  the  moral  sciences 
are  based  are  individuality  and  social  unity. 
Now  I  shall  show,  by  a  brief  examination  of 
these  various  conceptions,  that  they  are  really 
metaphysical  and  presuppose  the  fundamental 
truths  of  religion. 

Let  us  begin,  then,  with  the  conception  of 
substance.  This  idea  implies  that  all  changes  are 
changes  of  something  which  remains  unchanged 
and  undiminished,  that  all  changes  are  changes 
in  form  or  appearance,  but  that  what  undergoes 
or  presents  the  changes  remains  always  identical 
with  itself.  For  an  example  we  need  not  go 
far.  The  book  in  my  hand  consists  of  materials 
which  have  gone  through  many  changes.  The 
paper  it  is  made  of  assumed  its  present  shape 
after    many    transformations,    and  it  may  still  go 


A  CONXEPTIOX    OF   SUBSTANCE  205 

through  many  more,  I  might  now,  if  I  were 
so  minded,  put  it  into  the  fire  of  the  light  before 
me,  and  it  would,  in  the  course  of  a  few  minutes, 
be  reduced  to  ashes.  How  great  would  be  the 
change  it  would  then  undergo  !  Both  its  visible 
and  tangible  shape  would  be  changed.  But  we 
should  still  believe  that  the  substance  of  which 
it  is  composed  would  remain  quite  undiminished 
in  quantity  and  identical  with  itself.  Even  if  we 
supposed  the  matter  it  consisted  of  to  be  so 
rarefied  as  to  be  invisible  and  intangible,  we 
should  still  believe  it  to  remain  undiminished  in 
quantity  and  identical  in  its  essential  qualities. 
Now,  what  is  that  persistent  element  in  it  which 
under  so  many  changes  of  form  and  appearance 
we  believe  to  be  identical  with  itself?  It  is  plain 
that  it  is  nothing  sensuous, — no  presentation  or 
appearance  to  sense,  for  we  suppose  all  its 
sensuous  appearances  as  changeable.  It  is  true 
that,  under  all  its  changes  of  form,  we  still 
ascribe  to  it  the  essential  quality  of  occupying 
space  and  the  power  of  offering  resistance  ;  but 
as  we  cannot  conceive  space  except  as  filled  with 
visible  or  tangible  materials,  and  as  the  power 
of  offering  resistance  is  nothing  like  the  sensible 
state  or  feeling  we  call  resistance,  the  essential 
properties   we   ascribe    to  material  substance  are 


2o6  THEISTIC    PRESUPPOSITIONS    OF    SC1E^•CE  CHAP. 

not    actually    sensuous   qualities.      We    conceive 
it   as    a   mere    capability    of  presenting  sensuous 
appearances  under   certain   conditions,    and   not 
as   actually   possessing   sensuous     qualities.      In 
using    the    conception    of     substance,     therefore, 
science  goes  beyond  sense  and  beyond    its   proper 
method    of   observation    and  generalisation.     No 
sensuous  experience  and  no    amount    of   observa- 
tion,   however   vast   and   searching,    can  give  us 
the  idea  of  substance  ;  and  yet  no  experience  and 
no    observation    is   possible    without  it.     It   is  a 
pure,    non-sensuous   conception   brought   by    the 
mind  itself  to    experience    as    one  of  its  essential 
constituents.  It  is  in  fact  a  fundamental  principle 
of  thought,  an  essential  form  of  the    mind's   own 
activity,  and  necessarily  implies  the   existence    of 
a  knowing  permanent  Self.     It  is  really  the   form 
in  which  the  Self  presents  change  to    itself.     The 
unchanged    or   unchangeable    is     the     necessary 
correlate  of  change.     An  object   cannot   be    con- 
ceived  as  changed  and  at  the  same  time  remain- 
ing identical  with  itself  without  something   in    it 
being    thought   of   as  unchanged.     But   form  as 
changing  and  substance  as  remaining   unchanged 
again    imply    an  unchangeable  Consciousness  to 
which    they    are  presented  in  mutual  correlation. 
All  scientific  thought    therefore    involves,    as    its 


A  CONXEPTION    OF    CAUSE  207 

necessary  implication,  the  truth  of  an  eternal 
Consciousness  to  which  nature  is  essentially 
related.  If  men  of  science  doubt  or  profess 
ignorance  of  this  truth,  they  so  far  fall  short  of 
true  scientific  insight  and  prove  themselves  in- 
capable of  working  out  the  principles  of  science 
up  to  their  ultimate  logical  issues. 

This  will  be  seen  even  more  clearly  if  we 
examine  the  conception  of  causality,  the  most 
important  conception  employed  in  scientific  in- 
vestigations. The  causal  law  is,  that  every 
change  is  related  to  something  from  which  it 
follows  necessarily,  that  is,  given  which,  it  must 
follow.  Now,  it  would  be  going  much  beyond 
my  proposed  limits  to  discuss  here  the  various 
theories  of  causation  and  their  bearing  on  the 
problem  before  us  ;  but  a  brief  discussion  of  at 
least  two  of  them  cannot  be  avoided  in  dealing 
with  the  special  subject  in  hand.  You  will  see 
that  as  it  is  not  a  thing  considered  as  permanently 
in  space,  but  a  change,  something  that  takes 
place  in  time,  that  we  are  called  upon  to  account 
for,  the  cause  we  seek  must  be  related  to  the 
effect  in  time;  or  in  other  words  it  must  be 
antecedent  to  the  effect  and  therefore  itself  a 
change.  As  we  have  seen  in  the  fourth  lecture, 
€very  change  must  be    thought    of  as   necessarily 


208  THEISTIC    PRESUPPOSITIONS   OF   SCIENCE  CHAP, 

related  to  another  change  both  before  and  after 
it,  and  time  must  be  conceived  of  as  an  infinite 
series  of  changes  without  any  absolute  beginning 
and  absolute  end.  That  every  change  must  be 
thought  of  as  the  change  of  some  substance 
remaining  identical  with  itself  under  all  changes, 
we  have  already  seen.  That  the  mere  self-identity 
of  a  substance,  though  the  general  condition  of 
all  changes,  cannot  account  for  any  particular 
change,  is  also  clear.  The  self-identity  of  water 
is  the  general  condition  of  its  three  states,  liquid, 
solid  and  gaseous,  but  for  this  very  reason  it 
cannot  account  for  any  one  of  these  states  in 
particular.  Their  explanation  we  must  seek  in 
the  action  of  other  substances  on  water.  The 
cause  ot  a  change  must  therefore  be  another 
change  or  series  of  changes.  The  theory  that 
a  true  cause  must  be  a  power  and  the  meaning 
that  properly  belongs  to  'power,'  we  shall  discuss 
as  we  proceed.  The  current  scientific  view  of 
cause  is  a  change  from  which  the  effect  follows 
necessarily.  Now,  let  us  see,  by  an  example, 
what  this  necessity  is ;  and  let  us  ask  whence  we 
derive  this  idea  of  necessity.  If  I  set  this  book 
on  fire,  you  will  see  it  going  through  a  number 
of  transformations.  These  transformations  will 
follow   one    another   necessarily.     When  one  has 


THE    CAUSAL    NEXUS  20g 

taken  place,  the  second  must  follow,  and 
then  the  third  jnust  come  after  the  second, 
and  so  on.  Can  you  suppose  that  when 
I  have  set  fire  to  one  corner  of  this  leaf,  the  fire 
may  or  may  not  travel  further,  or  that  the  change 
of  colour  in  it,  its  thinning  away  and  the  loose- 
ning of  its  parts  and  the  like  may  or  may  not 
take  place  ?  You  know  that  these  events  must 
follow.  But  this  must,  this  necessity,  this  causal 
nexus  that  binds  one  event  to  another  indissolubly, 
is  just  what  we  do  not  perceive  by  any  of  our 
senses.  What  we  perceive  is  only  one  event 
following  another.  Particular  sequences,  the 
following  of  particular  events  by  particular  other 
events,  we  may  observe  several  times  in  our  life, 
and  we  may  arrive  at  generalisations  from  such 
observation.  But  generalisations,  however  wide, 
do  not  amount  to  or  account  for  necessity.  A 
sequence,  however  constant,  is  not  the  same  as  a 
binding  link  between  two  events.  This  binding 
link  is  supplied  by  the  Self  in  us  and  the  Self  in 
nature.  The  Self,  as  the  conscious,  non-sensuous 
and  timeless  witness  of  events,  binds  them 
together  by  the  necessity  that  essentially  belongs 
to  its  thought.  The  determination  of  event  by 
event  is  really  their  determination  by  the  Cons- 
ciousness   of    which    events    are    manifestations. 


2IO  THEISTIC    PRESUPPOSITIONS    OF    SCIENCE  CHAP. 

In  spite  of  their  apparent  contingency,  events, 
as  manifestations  of  the  one,  self-identical  Self, 
unchangeable  in  character,  are  themselves  neces- 
sary, and  present  this  necessity  in  their  mutual 
relations.  The  necessity  that  we  discover  in  the 
causal  relation  is  really  the  self-identical  un- 
changeable character  of  the  Self  that  manifests 
itself  in  events  and  in  their  relations.  If  the 
Self  be  symbolically  represented  by  S  and  any 
two  events,  causally  related,  by  a  and  b,  then 
the  judgment,  '  b  is  determined  by  a,'  may  be 
said  to  be  really  the  judgment,  'S6  is  determined 
by  Sa,'  or  '  S  is  determined  by  S.'  What,  on  a 
superficial  view,  appears  to  be  the  determination 
of  one  purely  sensuous  event  by  another  of  the 
same  nature,  turns  out,  on  a  deeper  and  closer 
view,  to  be  the  determination  of  the  Self  by  the 
Self.  What  scientific  men  call  the  uniformity  of 
nature,  and  adduce  as  the  reason  why  the 
sequences  observed  by  them  as  so  far  constant  and 
unvaried  must  be  absolutely  constant  and  invari- 
able, is  really  the  self-identical  and  unchangeable 
nature  of  the  Self  and  the  necessity  by  which  the 
fundamental  principles  of  thought  are  charac- 
terised. Nature,  abstracted  from  thought,  cannot 
but  appear  as  contingent,  and  hence  the  failure 
of  mere  physical  science  to  explain  the  necessity 


THE    REAL    MEANING    OF    NECESSITY 

found  in  the  laws  discovered  by  it — a  necessity 
which  nevertheless  it  assumes  and  which  really 
constitutes  the  value  of  these  laws.  The  progress 
of  civilisation — the  progress  made  in  agriculture, 
navigation,  hygiene,  medicine  and  other  depart- 
ments of  life — has  all  proceeded  upon  our  firm 
faith  in  the  fixity  of  the  laws  of  nature ;  and 
yet,  if  we  interrogate  nature  herself  as  a  reality 
independent  of  mind,  she  really  cannot  tell  us 
why  she  should  not  be  to-morrow  quite  different 
from  what  she  has  been  up  to  this  time.  But 
when  we  endeavour  to  understand  her  by  light 
from  within,  when  we  look  upon  her  as  the 
manifestation  of  Spirit,  we  find  that  her  funda- 
mental laws,  which  are  really  the  fundamental 
laws  of  thought,  cannot  but  be  necessary  and 
unchangeable.  We  thus  see  that  the  most  im- 
portant principle  of  Physical  Science,  the  law  of 
universal  causation,  is  really  the  revelation  of 
an  eternal,  unchangeable  and  self-determining 
Spirit  in  nature.  Science,  we  see,  is  agnostic  or 
ignorant  of  God  only  in  its  lower  or  baser  mood, 
when  it  does  not  fully  know  itself,  when  it  does 
not  fully  understand  the  fundamental  principles 
upon  which  it  proceeds.  When  made  to  look 
fully  at  its  own  face  as  reflected  in  the  mirror 
of    true    Philosophy,    it    unavoidably     becomes 


212  THEISTIC    PRESUPPOSITIONS    OF   SCIENCE  CHAP. 

theistic.  Even  Physical  Science,  not  to  speak  of 
the  higher  sciences,  when  thus  made  self-cons- 
cious, becomes  indistinguishable  from  Theology 
or  the  Science  of  God. 

Now,  we  shall  find  a  confirmation  of  what  has 
just  been  said  in  a  particular  theory  of   causation 
which   has   been  made  much  of  by  some  Natural 
Theologians   of   England  during    the   last   forty 
years    or  so,  and  which  has  been  used  with  much 
efEect  in  recent  Brahma  literature.     You  will  find 
this    theory   expounded   with   much     fulness    in 
Babu   Nagendranath    Chatturji's  Dharmajijndsdy 
pt.  I,  and  in  my  Roots  of  Faith.     It  is   expounded 
briefly  and  in  a  popular  form  in    my   little    tract 
named  Chintdkanikd.     The  theory  interprets    the 
scientific    conception    of  force  as  really  will,  and 
holds  that  unconscious  or  non-conscious  force  is  an 
impossibility.       I    have    recently   given    a     brief 
statement  of  the  theory, — brief  and  at   the   same 
time  as  clear  as  I  could  make  it — in  a  little  book 
named    The   Religion   of   Brahman.     I  think  that 
statement  will  serve  our  purpose  as  well   as   any 
fresh    one    that    I  could  give  now.     I  quote  from 
p.  II,  Chapter  II,  of  the   book:   "We   have    seen 
that   self-intuition    is     involved     in     perceiving, 
thinking,    feeling  and  acting.     We  shall  consider 
its  relation  to  acting  somewhat   more   fully   and 


A  ORIGINATING    POWER    OF   WILL  213 

see  what  we  learn  from  it  about  God.  It  will 
be  seen,  when  the  relation  of  our  actions  to  our 
minds  is  thought  upon,  that  our  minds  are  not 
only  their  knowers,  but  also  their  originators. 
When  I  attend,  for  instance,  to  the  book  before 
me,  and  keep  my  attention  fixed  upon  it,  I  find 
that  the  action  owes  its  origin  to  me.  The  same 
thing  happens  when  I  fanc}' — hold  before  my 
mind's  eye — the  image,  say,  of  a  tree  or  a  house, 
change  it  as  I  choose,  and  at  last  dismiss  it  from 
my  thoughts.  A  similar  power  is  exercised  when, 
on  being  oppressed  by  a  train  of  troublesome 
thoughts  or  a  painful  image,  I  draw  away  my 
mind  from  it  and  get  rid  of  the  pain.  When, 
from  purely  internal  actions,  we  come  out  to 
those  in  which  we  come  into  contact  with 
external  objects,  we  see  the  same  thing,  though 
with  a  difference.  When  I  lift  up  one  of  my 
hands,  the  movement  certainly  owes  its  origin, 
at  any  rate  its  initiation,  to  me  ;  but  it  is  only 
my  volition  or  act  of  willing  that  comes  out 
directly  from  me.  For  the  motion  of  my  hand 
to  follow  my  volition,  a  number  of  nerves  and 
muscles  on  which  I  seem  to  have  no  direct  com- 
mand must  be  moved  ;  for  if  they  are  stiffened  by 
paralysis  or  some  other  cause,  as  they  sometimes 
are,  I  see  I  cannot  move  my  limbs.     As,  however. 


214  THEISTIC    PRESUPPOSITIONS    OF    SCIENCE  CHAP. 

under  ordinary  circumstances,  I  find  my  hand 
following  my  wishes,  I  must  think  that  my 
volitions  are,  by  some  mysterious  means,  com- 
municated to  the  motor}'  nerves  and  muscles. 
So,  when  I  act  on  objects  external  to  my  body, 
when,  for  instance,  I  push  aside  the  book  before 
me,  the  change  surely  owes  its  origin  to 
me ;  but  my  power  in  the  case  is  exercised 
through  the  medium  of  my  hand  and  the 
apparatus  by  which  it  is  moved.  Now,  it  should 
be  seen  that,  in  all  such  cases,  something  that 
was  not,  comes  to  be.  The  objects  moved  may 
be  old  ;  the  images  formed  in  the  mind  may  be 
those  of  existing  objects  or  combinations  of  such 
objects ;  but  whether  combinations  or  move- 
ments, or  their  mere  reproduction  and  dismissal, 
— to  whatever  terms  the  changes  are  reduced — 
something  new,  something  original,  is  found  in 
the  phenomena.  Here,  then,  is  a  wonderful 
power  possessed  by  the  human  mind, — it  is  no 
less  a  power  than  that  of  creating, — of  bringing 
existence  out  of  non-existence.  This  power  we 
call  the  will.  It  is  the  mind  itself  in  an  active 
state.  It  depends,  evidently,  on  two  other 
powers — those  of  knowing  and  desiring.  The 
object  to  be  moved  must  be  known  beforehand. 
A  change,  either  on  an  external  object  or  on   the 


A  ALL    CHANGES    DUE    TO    WILL  215 

mind  itself,  must,  previously  to  its  being  pro- 
duced, be  thought  of  and  desired.  Will  there- 
fore is  necessarily  conscious  and  intending. 
An  unconscious  and  unintending  will  is  an 
absurdity. 

"Now  having  in  us  this  power  of  originating 
changes,  we  cannot  but  think  of  such  a  power 
behind  the  changes  that  we  see  taking  place 
around  us.  We  believe  our  fellow-beings  as 
possessing  the  same  power  ;  we  endow  the  lower 
animals  with  it ;  and  we  people  what  we  call 
inanimate  nature  with  innumerable  powers,  and 
trace  all  natural  changes  to  them.  We  conceive 
our  bodies,  with  the  complex  machinery  of 
organs  that  keeps  them  alive,  as  the  seats  of  a 
Power  not  our  own  ;  and  we  can  imagine  no 
department  of  nature, — neither  air,  water,  fire, 
the  vegetable  world,  the  sun,  moon,  nor  stars — 
as  without  some  guiding  power  or  other.  Now, 
it  is  seen  that  in  primitive  men,  and  even  in  the 
children  of  civilized  nations,  the  power  of  origi- 
nating changes  is  invariably  associated  with 
knowledge  and  intention.  To  the  unthinking 
savage,  every  object,  at  any  rate  every  striking 
object,  is  the  seat  of  a  personality.  Even  to  our 
advanced  Vedic  forefathers,  Indra,  Vdyu,  Varuna, 
Agni — the   powers   that  cause  the  phenomena  of 


2l6  THEISTIC    PRESUPPOSITIONS    OF    SCIENCE  CHAP. 

rain,  air,  water  and  fire — were  so  many  persons 
that  could  be  addressed  and  propitiated  by  their 
worshippers.  And  even  our  own  children  kick, 
as  conscious  offenders,  the  objects  that  hurt 
them.  But  we,  who  have  learnt  to  think 
methodically,  have,  by  our  power  of  scientific 
generalisation,  reduced  all  powers  in  nature  to 
one  single  Power.  Further,  by  a  process  of 
abstraction,  we  have  denuded  the  power  of 
originating  changes  of  its  necessary  accompani- 
ments of  knowledge  and  intention,  so  that  it  is  no 
more  will  to  us,  but  only  an  abstract  quality 
lying  at  the  root  of  all  change.  In  coming  to 
this  way  of  thinking,  we  have  both  gained  and 
lost.  We  are  right,  as  the  modern  discoveries 
of  science  and  philosophy  tell  us,  in  so  far  as  we 
trace  all  activities  in  nature  to  one  single  source. 
We  are  also  right  in  seeing  that  it  is  incon- 
venient, if  not  quite  incorrect,  to  call  every 
change  in  nature  a  divine  volition.  But  we  are 
wrong  in  thinking,  if  we  actually  do  so,  that  an 
abstraction  in  thought  is  an  actual  division  or 
separation  in  reality,  that  a  power  of  origination 
is  possible  without  thought  and  intention.  Men 
speak  of  force  as  something  other  than  will  and 
credit  it  with  all  change  in  Nature,  not  thinking 
that   though  we   find   it   convenient  to  speak  of 


A  TWO   ALTERNATIVES   OF   THOUGHT  217 

force  as  an  abstract  quality,  we,  can  form  no 
clear  notion  of  it  in  our  minds  apart  from  know- 
ing and  intending  will. 

"The  fact  is,  that  if  we  were  left  only  with 
our  sensuous  perceptions  and  sensuous  images, 
without  the  power  of  looking  within  and  watch- 
ing the  workings  of  our  minds  (supposing  that  such 
a  state  of  existence  were  possible),  we  should  have 
no  idea  of  originating  power  or  force  ;  and  for  us 
change  would  follow  change  without  any  causal 
link  to  connect  them.  Force  or  the  power  of 
origination  is  neither  visible,  audible,  smellable, 
tasteable  nor  tangible ;  nor  is  it  anything  of 
which  a  sensuous  image  can  be  formed  in  the 
mind.  It  is  a  power  of  the  mind,  and  is  known 
only  by  self-intuition  ;  and  self-intuition  reveals 
it  as  dependent  on  knowledge  and  desire.  If 
therefore  its  existence  in  the  external  world  is 
to  be  believed,  it  must  be  conceived  there  as 
having  essentially  the  same  nature  as  it  possesses 
in  us.  We  may  altogether  dismiss  the  idea  of 
an  originating  power  in  nature,  thinking  it  to  be 
an  illegitimate  projection  in  nature  of  a  purely 
internal  experience — the  experience  of  an  origi- 
nating will, — and  try  to  satisfy  ourselves  with  a 
view  of  nature  as  a  series  of  changes  following 
one    another   without    any    causal  link.     This  is 


2l8  THEISTIC   PRESUPPOSITIONS    OF   SCIENCE  CHAP. 

what  consistent  Sceptics  like  Hume  and  Comte 
tried  to  do,  though  we  do  not  think  they  were 
successful  in  rooting  out  such  a  fundamental 
intuition  as  the  intuition  of  power  from  their 
minds.  But  if  changes  in  nature  are  at  all  to 
be  referred  to  power,  it  must  necessarily  be 
conceived  as  a  Supreme  Will, — a  knowing,  in- 
tending and  acting  Mind.  How  this  thought 
helps  us  in  feeling  the  nearness  of  God — in 
realising  him  as  living  and  acting  incessantly  in 
and  out  of  us,  the  reader  will  think  for  himself." 
Now,  as  to  the  principle  of  reciprocity,  everything 
said  about  causality  applies  so  well  to  it,  that 
I  consider  a  separate  treatment  of  it  as  unneces- 
sary. 

Coming  next,  then,  to  the  biological  sciences, 
we  find  that,  as  in  the  case  of  the  physical,  these 
sciences  are  agnostic  not  in  so  far  as  they  are 
scientific,  but  rather  in  so  far  as  they  stop  short 
of  being  real  sciences.  In  so  far  as  the  objects 
of  these  sciences  are  material  bodies,  they  are 
indeed  perfectly  justified  in  applying  mechanical 
principles,  the  principles  of  substance  and 
causality,  the  laws  of  matter  and  motion,  to 
them.  And  we  have  seen  that  even  these  prin- 
ciples, rightly  understood,  lead  us  much  further 
than  where  ordinary  Physical  Science  stops.     But 


A  CONCEPTION    OF    DESIGN  219 

organic  matter,  as  organic,  requires,  for  its  proper 
explanation,  principles  very  different  from  the 
mechanical.  It  is  the  teleological  principle,  the 
principle  of  final  cause  or  design,  that  alone  can 
explain  organism,  with  its  functions  of  life, 
generation  and  growth.  As  Kant  truly  says,  "No 
Newton,  we  can  say  with  certainty,  will  ever 
rise  to  make  intelligible  to  us,  according  to 
mechanical  causes,  the  germination  of  one  blade 
of  grass."  Life  is  a  mystery  and  will  ever  remain 
a  mystery  to  the  mere  Mechanist,  to  him  who 
carefully  excludes  design  from  the  explanation 
of  the  products  of  nature.  Let  us  take,  for 
instance,  the  most  prominent  characteristic  of 
life,  its  power  of  sustaining  itself.  Inorganic 
products  grow  by  accretion,  by  the  external  addi- 
tion of  one  part  to  another,  by  one  force  acting 
upon  another.  A  vegetable  or  animal  germ, 
on  the  other  hand,  sustains  itself  by  its  ow^n 
power.  External  matter  is  indeed  added  to  it, 
but  this  addition  is  due  to  its  own  internal 
power.  In  its  case,  addition  is  not  mere  accre- 
tion, as  in  inorganic  objects,  but  assimilation^ 
the  turning  of  external  matter  to  its  own  use 
by  the  inherent  power  of  the  germ.  This  assi- 
milation itself  is  a  most  wonderful  process,  and 
is     inexplicable     on   mechanical   principles.      It 


220  THEISTIC    PRESUPPOSITIONS    OF   SCIENCE  CHAP. 

involves  selection,  which  directly  carries  purpose 
with  it.  Every  germ  assimilates  just  those 
materials  which  favour  its  growth  into  the  pro- 
duct to  which  it  tends,  which  is  the  end  of  its 
process  of  growth  ;  and  every  finished  organism 
assimilates  just  what  is  required  for  its  susten- 
ance, and  nothing  else.  And  then,  secondly, 
while  in  the  case  of  inorganic  matter,  the  cause 
determines  the  effect,  the  parts  determine 
the  whole,  the  present  determines  the  future,  in 
the  case  of  organic  matter,  it  is  the  effect  that 
determines  the  cause,  the  whole  that  determines 
the  parts,  and  the  future  that  determines  the 
present.  The  seed  grows  into  the  tree,  with 
trunk,  branches,  leaves,  flowers  and  fruits — 
members  which,  in  their  turn,  sustain  the  life  of 
the  whole  tree  and  contribute  to  the  production 
of  seeds  for  the  perpetuation  of  its  kind.  The 
animal  germ  grows  into  the  finished  animal  body, 
with  its  complex  system  of  organs,  each  devoted 
to  a  particular  function  and  all  contributing  to 
the  life  and  reproduction  of  the  whole.  In  such 
instances,  we  see  that  what  comes  last,  the  com- 
pleted organism  with  its  various  functions,  is 
potentially  contained  in  the  seed  or  the  germ  and 
determines  its  whole  process  of  life  and  growth. 
But    this   potential   or   determinant   existence  of 


A   ORGANISMS  INEXPLICABLE  BY  MECHANICAL  PRINCIPLES    221 


the  effect  in  the  cause  can  mean  nothing  else 
than  this,  that  the  idea  or  design  of  the  effect 
determines  or  works  in  the  cause.  Either  say  this,  or 
your  explanation  of  organic  phenomena  explains 
nothing.  Now,  biological  science  avoids  teleology 
or  design  just  in  so  far  as  it  ignores  this  fact  of  the 
determination  of  the  present  by  the  future,  this 
relation  of  means  and  ends  in  organic  phenomena. 
Its  success  in  doing  without  the  principle  of  final 
causes  is  only  in  so  far  as  it  is  assimilated  to 
Physical  Science,  only  inasmuch  as  it  tries  to 
show  that  the  growth  and  reproduction  of  organ- 
isms can  be  explained  by  principles  employed 
in  the  latter.  But  organic  phenomena  refuse  to 
be  explained  by  mechanical  principles.  The 
unity  of  an  organism,  the  relation  of  its  parts  as 
means  and  ends  to  one  another,  its  power  of 
sustaining  and  reproducing  itself,  are  phenomena 
which,  on  mechanical  principles,  are  accidents. 
Such  principles  fail  to  show  that  an  organism 
is  a  necessity.  Inorganic  nature,  as  it  is,  may 
be  shown  to  be  the  necessary  result  of  the 
fundamental  laws  of  matter  and  motion.  But 
this  necessity  breaks  down  in  the  case  of  organic 
nature.  These  laws  fail  to  show  why  organisms 
are  what  they  are  and  not  otherwise.  So  far  as 
they     are     concerned,     therefore,   organisms   are 


222  THEISTIC    PRESUPPOSITIOXS    OF    SCIENXE  CHAP. 

mere  accidents,  or  in  other  words,  they  are  in- 
explicable by  mechanical  laws  and  demand  a 
different  explanation.  If  one  or  two  organisms 
arose  here  and  there  in  nature,  they  might  be 
set  down  as  accidental  effects  of  mechanical 
laws.  But  as  they  constitute  a  realm  by  them- 
selves, arising  with  a  constancy  and  regularity 
as  steady  at  least  as  the  laws  of  physical  sequence, 
they  clearly  defy  the  power  of  these  laws  to 
explain  them.  The  constant  and  regular  rise 
of  the  most  complex  and  intricate  systems,  in 
which  their  complexity  is  co-ordinated  to  unity, 
in  which  the  parts  exist  for  the  whole  and  the 
whole  for  the  parts,  in  which  the  parts,  organs 
■or  members  are  related  as  means  and  ends  to 
one  another,  can  be  explained  only  by  purpose. 
Exclude  purpose  from  its  explanation,  and  the 
whole  affair  wears  the  aspect  of  an  accident. 
But  the  very  essence  of  accident  is  irregularity. 
When  something  happens  with  an  invariable 
constancy,  it  passess  out  of  the  category  of 
accidents,  and  its  constancy  demands  a  rational 
explanation.  In  the  case  of  organic  phenomena, 
this  rational  explanation  cannot  be  anything 
but  purpose.  The  very  nature  of  organisms,  as 
already  described,  makes  mere  mechanical  ex- 
planation unsatisfactory  and  irrational.     As  mere 


A  SIMILARITY    OF   HUMAN    AND    NATURAL   ACTIONS         223 

phenomena,  mere  events  in  time,  all  phenomena, 
including  human  actions,  are  subject  to  the  laws 
of  universal  causation.  But  in  so  far  as  the  actions 
of  human  beings  are  related  to  one  another,  they 
demand  a  higher  determination,  a  higher  ex- 
planation, than  the  mechanical,  the  merely 
physical.  They  require  further  to  be  ascribed  to 
purpose  and  free-will.  Similar  is  the  case  with 
the  phenomena  of  organic  nature.  Their  very 
nature  proves  a  higher  determination  than  that 
by  merely  physical  causes.  They  have  to  be 
traced  to  the  designing  will  of  a  Being  above 
nature.  The  proof  in  the  latter  case  is  not  a 
bit  less  strong  than  in  the  former.  If  we  know 
the  minds  of  our  fellow-beings  by  examining  the 
nature  of  their  actions,  not  less  surely  do  we 
know  mind  in  nature  by  the  same  method.  You 
will  find  this  point  clearly  put  and  dwelt  on  at 
some  length  in  Babu  Nagendranath  Chatturji's 
Dharmajijndsd,  pt.  I,  where  you  will  also  find 
numerous  illlustrations  of  design  in  nature. 
Dr.  James  Martineau's  Study  of  Religion  is  also 
a  very  helpful  book  on  the  Design  Argument, 
I  content  myself  with  a  brief  statement  of  the 
argument  in  the  way  I  conceive  to  be  the  best 
and  pointing  out  its  place  in  the  system  of 
Theistic  Evidences.     I  think  that,  from  the  stand- 


224  THEISTIC    PRESUPPOSITIONS    OF    SCIENCE  CHAP. 

point  of  science,  it  is  organic  nature  that  directly 
calls  for  the  teleological  principle  as  its  only 
rational  explanation ;  and  I  have  therefore 
exhibited  it  as  the  real  basis  of  the  biological 
sciences.  But  we  have  now  to  see  that  even 
according  to  the  scientific  method  this  principle 
is  applicable  to  inorganic  matter  also.  In  a 
broad  sense,  the  whole  world  is  an  organism, 
its  various  parts  related  to  one  another  as  means 
and  ends  and  all  serving  the  purposes  of  life  and 
mind.  The  teleological  nature  of  what  we  call 
inorganic  matter  becomes  evident  if  we  see  its 
relation  to  organic  beings.  Air  in  itself,  for  in- 
stance, may  seem  to  be  purposeless,  to  be  ex- 
plicable by  mere  chemical  laws ;  but  chemistry 
fails  to  explain  it  when  we  contemplate  its  re- 
lation to  life  and  living  beings.  Is  the  relation 
of  air  to  the  lungs  and  the  vital  functions  of 
animals  merely  fortuitous  ?  Can  any  mechanical 
laws  even  remotely  explain  this  relation  ?  Does 
any  conceivable  explanation  satisfy  Reason  except 
the  one  that  ascribes  the  relation  to  design? 
The  same  remark  applies  to  the  relation  of  light 
to  the  eye,  of  sound  to  the  ear,  of  food  and 
drink  to  the  digestive  organs, — in  fact  to  the 
relation  of  inorganic  nature  as  a  whole  to  organic 
beings.     Is  this  relation,    with   the   various    ends 


A  PRESUPPOSITIONS  OF  PSYCHOLOGY         225 

of  organic  beings  systematically  served  by  it, 
accidental,  purposeless  ?  If  it  cannot  be  explained 
by  the  laws  of  matter  and  motion  with  which 
the  physical  sciences  deal,  it  must  be  either 
accidental  or  purposive  ;  and  as  the  first  of  these 
suppositions  is  excluded  by  the  constant  and 
systematic  nature  of  the  relation  in  question, 
the  only  rational  explanation  of  it  is  that  it  is 
due  to  the  will  of  a  conscious,  intending  Being 
of  transcendent  power  and  wisdom  to  whom 
nature,  both  organic  and  inorganic,  is  subject. 

We  now  come  to  the  third  and  last  group  of 
the  sciences,  the  mental  and  moral.  The  abstrac- 
tion on  which  the  inductive  sciences,  as  at  present 
conceived,  are  based,  is  nowhere  so  patent  as  in 
this  final  group.  The  science  of  mind,  as  at 
present  taught,  takes  for  granted,  if  only  as  a 
supposition,  that  the  individual  mind  can  be 
known  and  made  the  subject  matter  of  science 
apart  from  the  Infinite  Mind.  To  many  writers 
on  Psychology,  this  supposition  is  unfortunately 
not  a  mere  supposition,  but  a  dogma,  an  agnostic 
creed  which  they  undertake  to  defend  with  elabo- 
rate arguments.  To  many  others,  it  is  a  con- 
venient plea  for  avoiding  discussions,  more  or  less 
theological  or  metaphysical,  in  which  they  feel 
no    interest   and    on    which    they    do  not  like  to 

15 


226  THEISTIC   PRESUPPOSITIONS   OF  SCIENCE  CHAP. 

pronounce  any  judgment.  Yet,  the  truth  is  that 
these  writers,  almost  at  every  turn  in  their  treat- 
ment of  their  science,  make  statements  and 
admissions  which  are  nothing  but  disguised 
confessions  of  faith  in  the  Infinite  Mind.  In  my 
fourth  lecture,  I  have  ready  shown,  by  an  analysis 
of  knowledge,  that  we  cannot  know  the  subject 
or  the  object,  the  individual  or  the  universal  soul, 
in  abstraction  from  each  other,  and  that,  in  every 
act  of  knowing  the  concrete  reality  known  is  a 
subject-object,  a  spirit  which  has  both  a  finite 
and  an  infinite  aspect,  and  which  is  both  our  own 
self  and  the  self  of  the  universe.  On  the  present 
occasion,  I  shall  particularly  draw  your  attention 
to  what  may  be  called  the  very  fundamental 
assumption  on  which  Empirical  Psychology  is 
based,  the  assumption,  namely,  that  there  is  a 
sub-conscious  region  in  which  mental  facts, 
sensations,  ideas,  judgments,  etc.,  exist  when 
they  are  absent  from  our  consciousness, — the  con- 
sciousness of  individuals.  You  will  see  that 
Psychology  cannot  do  without  this  assumption. 
In  the  individual,  knowledge  shines  only  inter- 
mittently. Every  moment  we  have  command  of 
only  a  very  small  stock  of  ideas.  The  rest  of 
our  ideas, — even  those  which  we  have  already 
acquired,    remain    behind     in     the    background 


A  ABSTRACTION    IMPLIED    IK    PSYCHOLOGY  227 

of  our   consciousness,    from    which   they  come  to 
light  and    in    which    they    disappear   again    and 
again.     Our  mental  life  resembles  a  basin  erected 
round  a  perpetual  spring,  a   basin    in    which    the 
water    rises    and  collects  awhile,  and  from  which 
it  again  disappears,  repeating  this    process    conti- 
nually.    It    resembles  such  a  basin  rather  than  a 
canvas  on  which  images  are  permanently  painted 
and    are    always  visible.     In  profound  dreamless 
sleep,    as  you  know,  our  conscious  life  becomes  a 
perfect  blank  ;  even  self-consciousness,   the    basis 
of  all  other  forms  of  consciousness,  being  suspend- 
ed.    Now,   here    is  the    difficulty    of   Psychology 
as  a  mere  empirical  science,  as  a  science    of  mere 
phenomena   and   their  laws.     Other  sciences  pro- 
fessedly treat  of  their  objects  without   any   refer- 
ence   to  the  relation  which  they  may  have  to  the 
mind.     Not  so   Psychology.     Its   very    object    is 
consciousness.       It   professes    to    deal    only   with 
conscious     phenomena     and    the    laws    of    their 
combination    and    association.      And   yet     these 
phenomena    are   found    to  be  only  fitful  visitants 
of  the  field  which  Psychology  traverses — the  field 
of  individual  consciousness.     Ever  and  anon  they 
disappear   from    this   field    and   enter  a  region  of 
which  this  science,  as  at  present  conceived,    pro- 
fesses   to  know  nothing.     A  region  beyond  cons- 


228  THEISTIC    PRESUPPOSITIONS   OF   SCIENCE  CHAP. 

ciousness  is  indeed  a  perfect  blank  to  the  science 
of  consciousness.  Conscious  phenomena,  when 
they  cease  to  be  conscious,  are  indeed  nothing 
to  mental  science  properly  so  called,  and  the 
modern  science  of  the  mind,  if  it  were  consistent, 
would  be  speechless  about  conscious  ph'^nomena 
as  soon  as  they  left  the  region  of  individual 
consciousness.  But  in  that  case  it  would  cease 
to  be  a  science,  and  so,  naturally  enough,  it  does 
not  like  to  commit  suicide  in  this  fashion.  Hence 
it  lives,  and  lives  at  the  cost  of  consistency  with 
itself.  It  speaks  of  conscious  phenomena  becom- 
ing unconscious,  existing  in  a  region  of  sub- 
consciousness, and  emerging  from  it  again  as 
self-same  conscious  phenomena.  But  this  is  so 
much  pure  nonsense,  seeming  to  be  sense  because 
it  is  continually  spoken  by  thinkers  and  writers 
who  can  think  clearly  and  write  cleverly  on 
certain  things,  but  who  lack  the  deepest  and  the 
truest  insight  into  things  of  the  mind.  The  fact 
is,  if  you  consider  your  individuality  to  be  the 
only  thing  you  know,  and  think  that  you  know 
nothing  of  a  universal,  ever-waking,  all  knowing 
Mind  in  which  your  individuality  is  contained, 
then,  to  be  consistent,  you  ought  to  say,  as  soon 
as  a  mental  fact  passes  out  of  your  individual 
consciousness,  that  it  has  entirely    ceased    to   be. 


CONTRADICTIOX    INVOLVED    IX    PSYCHOLOGY  229 

and  that  it  is  impossible  for  it  to  revive  or  re- 
appear. When,  for  instance,  you  forget  this 
lecture  hall,  you  should  say  that  the  idea  perishes 
once  for  all  and  any  recurrence  or  return  is  im- 
possible for  it.  In  losing  it,  you  lose,  as  it  were, 
a  part  of  yourself,  a  part  of  your  conscious  life, 
for  it  is  suffused  with  or  constructed  by  your  self- 
consciousness.  As  your  individual  consciousness 
exhausts  your  mental  life,  you  cannot  imagine 
your  lost  idea  as  hidden  in  a  corner  of  your  mind 
for  a  while  and  coming  back  to  light  again. 
The  only  consistent  course  of  thinking  for  you, 
then,  is  to  think,  when  you  forget  your  idea,  that 
it  is  lost  irrecoverably.  Whatever  ideas  may 
enter  your  mind  after  its  loss  can  be  only  fresh, 
new  ideas, — belonging  to  a  different  period  of 
time  and  therefore  numerically  different  pheno- 
mena. But  you  knov^  that  you  cannot  keep  up 
this  consistency.  After  the  lapse  of  a  few 
moments  or  after  a  few  hours'  oblivion,  the  idea 
of  the  hall  re-appears  to  your  mind,  and  you 
know  surely  that  it  is  the  same  idea  that  occurred 
to  your  mind  before.  You  find  that  it  is  suffused, 
pervaded,  or  constructed  through  and  through 
with  your  self — the  self  that  knew  it  before  and 
persists  till  now, — that  it  is  the  lost  part  of  your 
self  that    is   come    back.     But  it  could  not  come 


230  THEISTIC    PRESUPPOSITIONS    OF    SCIEN'CE  CHAP. 

back  unless  it  existed  during  the  time  that  it 
was  absent  from  your  individual  consciousness. 
And  in  what  other  form  could  it  exist  than  in  a 
conscious  form — as  an  idea  ?  An  idea  existing 
unthought  of  is  as  plain  a  contradiction  in  terms 
as  any  can  be.  You  are  therefore  forced  to 
admit  that  your  individuality — your  conscious 
life  moment  after  moment — is  not  sufficient  in 
itself,  is  not  self-subsistent,  but  that  your  ideas, 
your  whole  conscious  life,  must  be  contained  in 
a  Mind  which  indeed  is  essentially  one  with 
what  you  call  your  individual  mind,  but  which 
is  higher  than  your  individuality,  for  it  never 
forgets  anything  and  never  sleeps.  Now,  it  has 
always  seemed  to  me  rather  strange,  ladies  and 
gentlemen,  that  this  plain  fact,  namely,  that  the 
individual  mind  is  not  self-sustained,  but  lives, 
moves  and  has  its  being  in  the  Universal  Mind — 
a  truth  which  was  so  plain  to  the  rishis  of  the 
Upanishads  thousands  of  years  ago,  should  be 
so  obscure  and  incomprehensible  to  modern 
psychologists  of  the  West.  I  rejoice  to  see,  how- 
ever, that  the  great  American  psychologist, 
Professor  James,  has  recognised  this  truth  so  far, 
in  his  recent  lectures  on  Varieties  of  Religious- 
Experience,  as  to  admit  the  existence  of  a  very 
large  and  sleepless  mind  behind  every    individual 


A  RELATION"    OF    PSYCHOLOGY   TO    THEOLOGY  23 1 

mind.  He  seems  yet  incapable  of  feeling  his 
way  to  the  doctrine  of  an  indivisible  Infinite 
Mind  as  the  support  of  all  finite  minds,  though 
he  speaks  of  this  doctrine  with  great  respect. 
I  cannot  but  entertain  the  hope  that  Psychology, 
in  the  near  future,  will  see  its  true  nature  as  a 
science  and  be  again,  as  it  once  was,  the  hand- 
maid of  Theology. 

Now,  the  relation  of  Psychology  to  Theology 
is  a  very  large  subject,  and  what  I  have  said  is, 
as  it  were,  only  a  drop  from  the  ocean.  But  the 
time  allotted  to  me  is  over,  and  I  must  stop  here. 
I  must  forego  the  pleasure  of  speaking,  on  the 
present  occasion,  of  the  religious  implications 
of  the  social  and  ethical  sciences,  specially  as 
I  must  deal,  at  some  length,  with  the  basis  of 
ethics  and  the  nature  of  ethical  judgments  in 
speaking  of  the  moral  perfections  of  God.  May 
the  Holy  Spirit  be  with  us  in  the  arduous  task 
still  before  us  and  lead  us  to  the  truth  as  it  is 
in  him. 


CHAPTER  B 

MR.  BRADLEY  ON  THE  DIVINE 
PERSONALITY* 

Mr.  F.  H.  Bradley  is  perhaps  the  most  eminent 
philosophical  writer  of  England  at  the  present 
time.  His  Ethical  Studies,  Principles  of  Logic 
and  Appearance  and  Reality  are  books  which 
may  be  said  to  have  made  epochs  in  English 
thought.  His  last  book,  Essays  on  Truth  and 
Reality,  which  came  out  last  year  and  a  brief 
mention  of  which  was  made  in  these  columns 
sometime  ago,  fully  sustains  his  reputation  as  a 
great  thinker.  Some  chapters  of  this  book  are 
specially  interesting  to  those  to  whom  religion 
is  not  merely  a  matter  of  conduct  and  sentiment, 
but  also  an  object  of  philosophical  thought.  In 
his  Appearance  and  Reality,  perhaps  the  most 
profound     metaphysical     work    in    English,    Mr. 

*  Reprinted  from  the  Indian  Messenger  of   March   21, 
1915- 


B  MR.    BRADLEY  S   ADVANCE    TOWARDS    THEISM  233 

Bradley  had  pronounced  personal  immortality 
as  having  only  a  slight  probability  in  its  favour. 
His  .lews  on  the  divine  personality  also,  as 
expressed  in  that  book,  were  likely  to  dissatisfy 
and  perhaps  mystify  people  who  look  for  help 
and  guidance  in  religious  thought  from  eminent 
philosophical  writers.  In  the  present  volume 
he  seems  to  make  a  decided  advance  towards 
views  which  are  usually  called  Theistic,  and  the 
writer  himself  admits  this,  so  far  as  to  say, 
"There  are  points  again  where  I  desire  to  lay  a 
different  emphasis  upon  some  aspects  of  the 
question"  (that  is,  the  personality  of  the  Abso- 
lute.) In  another  place  he  says,  "I  will  touch 
briefly  on  two  points  which  I  have  elsewhere 
discussed,  laying  at  that  time  perhaps  an  undue 
emphasis  on  one  aspect  of  the  matter.  I  refer 
to  the  'personality'  of  God  and  the  'immortality' 
of  the  soul."     (P.  438). 

However,  to  understand  Mr.  Bradley's  views 
as  set  forth  in  his  last  work,  it  is  necessary  to 
have  some  idea  of  his  general  views  on  Truth, 
Reality  and  the  nature  of  the  Absolute.  We 
shall  briefly  state  and  explain  these  views  in  our 
own  way, — a  way  which,  we  hope,  will  not  be 
quite  unintelligible  to  the  thoughtful  reader, 
however  unfamiliar  he  may  he    with    the    techni- 


234  MR-    BRADLEY    ON    THE    DIVINE    PERSONALITY       CHAP. 

calities  of  Philosophy.  The  current  view  as  to 
Reality  is,  as  Mr.  Bradley  puts  it,  "that  a  thing 
must  be  real  or  unreal,  that,  whatever  things 
are  real,  are  real  alike  and  equally,  and  that, 
in  short,  with  regard  to  reality  it  is  always  a 
case  of  Yes  or  No.  and  never  of  more  or  less." 
But  according  to  Mr.  Bradley  there  are  degrees 
in  reality.  Things  that  people  ordinarily  believe 
to  be  absolutely  real,  as  for  instance,  material 
objects  and  their  changes,  our  finite  selves,  and 
even  the  personality  of  God,  are  to  him  only 
partially  or  relatively  so,  and  the  x\bsolute,  the 
All,  is  alone  fully  or  absolutely  real.  The 
criterion  by  which  Mr.  Bradley  tests  the  reality, 
relative  or  absolute,  of  a  thing,  is  nothing  more 
recondite  than  the  well-known  logical  law  of 
non-contradiction  or  self-consistency.  Time, 
Space,  Substance,  Self,  Personality,  are  all  found 
to  involve  contradictions  and  are  hence  pro- 
nounced to  be  only  Appearance,  that  is,  partial 
expressions  of  Reality,  and  the  Absolute,  as  the 
only  self-consistent  and  non-contradictory  thing, 
is  alone  held  to  be  fully  or  absolutely  real.  To 
Mr.  Bradley,  the  Absolute  is  Reality,  Experience 
and  Happiness, — Sat,  Chit  and  Ananda,  in  the 
words  of  our  Indian  philosophy.  He  does  not 
use  these  Sanskrit  words  and  never   quotes    from 


B  THE  ABSOLUTE  ALONE  FULLY  REAL         235 

or  refers  to  any  Vedantic  writings.  But  his 
views  have  a  most  striking  similarity  to  those 
set  forth  in  those  writings.  However,  the 
ordinary  reader  will  have  a  clue  to  Mr.  Bradley's 
method  if  we  refer  him  to  the  view  often 
expressed  in  the  philosophical  articles  that 
have  appeared  in  this  paper  from  time  to  time, 
that  an  object  of  knowledge  cannot  be  independ- 
ent of  the  subject, — that  to  think  that  things 
known  can  exist  unknown,  involves  a  contradic- 
tion. When  this  truth  is  clearly  understood,  it 
will  be  seen  that  things  usually  thought  of  as 
fully  real  are  only  partially  or  relatively  so, — 
real  only  in  relation  to  the  knowing  mind.  On 
the  other  hand,  knowing  minds  or  selves,  which 
seem  to  be  independent  of  known  objects,  are 
really  unmeaning  and  inconceivable  without 
them.  Mere  subjects  are  as  self-contradictory  as 
mere  objects  and  therefore  as  much  appearances 
or  partial  realities  as  the  latter.  The  full  or 
absolute  reality,  therefore,  is  that  of  which  subjects 
and  objects  are  only  partial  or  relative  manifest- 
ations. Mr.  Bradley  calls  this  Absolute  Reality 
'Experience'.  He  finds  'knowledge'  and  even  'self 
inadequate  to  express  the  fulness,  the  all-inclu- 
siveness,  of  the  Absolute.  In  every  act  of  know- 
ledge, indeed,  it  is    the    Absolute,    the    All,    that 


236  MR.    BRADLEY   ON    THE    DIVINE    PERSONALITY        CHAP. 

manifests  itself.  But  as  an  act,  a  process,  know- 
ledge is  partial  and  does  not  represent  the 
omnipresence  and  eternality  of  the  Absolute. 
The  Absolute's  'experience'  must  comprehend  all 
things  in  space  and  all  events  in  time  in  one 
undivided  and  timeless  vision.  This  distinction 
of  finite  and  infinite  knowledge  makes  our  sages 
call  Brahman  jndnam  and  hesitate  to  call  him  a 
jndni.  However,  Time  and  Space,  like  Object, 
Subject  and  Knowledge,  are  self-contradictory, 
and  only  partial  and  not  absolute  realities. 
Events  follow  one  another.  But  events  are  not 
real  in  themselves,  they  are  manifestations  of 
Experience,  which  neither  precedes  nor  follows 
anything.  Time,  therefore,  is  only  an  appearance 
and  not  an  absolute  reality,  the  absolutely 
Real  being  timeless.  In  the  same  manner, 
one  portion  of  space  is  external  to  another.  But 
Experience,  to  which  space  is  relative,  is  not 
external  to  anything,  and  'things'  external  to  one 
another  are  all  comprehended  in  it.  It  is  abso- 
lutely one  and  indivisible.  Hence  Space  is  only 
an  appearance  and  not  a  reality,  the  Real  being 
spaceless.  From  all  this  it  follows  that  the 
finite  self,  the  self  which  is  conceived  as  begin- 
ning to  be  or  to  know,  and  to  advance  gradually 
in  its  self-hood,  is  not  absolutely  real,  but  is  real 


B  THE  ABSOLUTE  SUPER-PERSONAL  237 

only  in  the  degree  it  represents  or  manifests  the 
Absolute.  And  there  can  be  no  doubt  that  the 
self  represents  the  Absolute  as  nothing  else  does, 
for  experience,  which  is  the  fundamental  charac- 
teristic of  the  Absolute,  is  also  the  essence  of 
the  self.  Now,  here  comes  in  the  question  of 
personality.  The  self  in  each  of  us  appears  in 
the  form  of  a  person,  a  person  excluding  other 
persons  and  excluding  things  not  included  in  our 
personality.  Now,  if  personality  necessarily 
implies  this  exclusion,  this  finitude,  the  Absolute, 
which  includes  every  person  and  thing,  and 
excludes  none,  cannot  indeed  be  personal.  In 
this  sense,  in  the  sense  of  its  all-inclusiveness, 
Mr.  Bradley  calls  it  super-personal,  that  is,  not 
below%  but  above,  personality.  This  should  not 
lead  the  reader  to  assimilate  Mr.  Bradley's 
Absolute  in  any  sense  to  Mr.  Spencer's,  for  the 
latter  is  neither  Experience  nor  Happiness,  which 
the  former  is.  And  Mr.  Bradley's  Absolute 
is  not  only  Experience  and  Happiness — Chit  and 
Ananda77i, — but  also  Spirit,  Will  and  Love,  as 
the  following  quotations  from  Essays  on  Truth 
and  Reality  will  show  :  "A  God  that  can  say  to 
himself  T  as  against  you  and  me,  is  not  in  my 
judgment  defensible  as  the  last  and  complete 
truth  for  Metaphysics.     But,  that  being  admitted, 


238  MR.    BRADLEY    ON    THE    DIVINE    PERSONALITY       CHAP. 

the  question  remains  as  to  what  God  is  for 
religion.  The  religious  consciousness  must  re- 
present to  itself  the  Good  Will  in  its  relations 
with  mine.  It  must  express  both  our  difference 
and  our  unity.  And  must  not,  it  will  be  asked, 
that  representation  take  the  form  of  a  'personal' 
God?  I  answer  that  to  insist  here  on  'must'  to 
myself  seems  untenable,  but  on  the  other  hand, 
I  am  fully  prepared  to  accept  'may'.  But  there 
is  one  condition  on  which  I  have  to  lay  stress. 
The  real  presence  of  God's  will  in  mine,  our 
actual  and  literal  satisfaction  in  common,  must 
not  in  any  case  be  denied  or  impaired.  This  is 
a  religious  truth  far  more  essential  than  God's 
'personality'  and  hence  that  personality  must  be 
formulated,  no  matter  how  inconsistently,  so  as 
to  agree  with  this  truth  and  to  support  it."  (p. 
433.)  Again,  "The  highest  Reality,  so  far  as  I 
see,  must  be  super-personal.  At  the  same  time 
to  many  minds  practical  religion  seems  to  call 
for  the  belief  in  God  as  a  separate  individual. 
And,  where  truly  that  belief  is  so  required,  I  can 
accept  it  as  justified  and  true,  but  only  if  it  is 
supplemented  by  other  beliefs  which  really  con- 
tradict it.  And  these  other  beliefs,  I  must  add, 
are  more  vital  for  religion.  A  God  who  has  made 
this  strange  and  glorious  nature  outside  of  which 


B  GOD    THE    INinVELLING    SELF    OF    ALL  239 

he  remains,  is  an  idea  at  best  one-sided.  Con- 
fined to  this  idea  we  lose  large  realms  of  what  is 
beautiful  and  sublime,  and  even  for  religion  our 
conception  of  goodness  suffers.  Unless  the  Maker 
and  Sustainer  becomes  also  the  indwelling  Life 
and  Mind  and  the  Inspiring  Love,  how  much  of 
the  Universe  is  impoverished  !" 

It  is  evident  that  in  combating  the  'personality' 
of  God,  Mr.  Bradley  opposes  only  the  popular 
conception  of  an  anthropomorphic  God  supposed 
to  be  outside  of  and  thus  virtually  limited  by 
the  material  world  and  the  soul  of  man,  and 
not  the  Sarvahhutdntardtman,  the  Indwelling  Self 
of  all  creatures,  who  was  worshipped  by  the  rishis 
of  the  Upanishads  and  is  now  worshipped  by  their 
modern  followers  of  various  denominations 


CHAPTER  C 

MONISM,  PLURALISM  AND  THEIR 
RECONCILIATION* 

I 

Beyond  the  din  and  bustle  of  war,  political 
ambition  and  commercial  expansion,  the  reflect- 
ive mind  notices  a  steady  growth  of  higher 
thought — thought  about  God,  Immortality  and 
the  Kingdom  of  the  Spirit — in  the  advanced 
nations  of  the  world.  This  growth  is  the  real 
promise  of  the  lasting  peace  and  happiness  of 
future  humanity.  It  is  most  marked — at  any 
rate  to  those,  like  ourselves,  who  look  at  the 
world  through  English  spectacles — in  England 
and  the  United  States  of  America.  Germany 
perhaps,  as  we  have  been  noticing  for  nearly  half 
a  century,  and  as  appears  from  what  has  been 
and    is   being    written    about  it  recently,  has  not 

*   Reprinted   from  the  Indian  Messenger  of  May  i6  and 
23.  1915- 


C  PRESENT    SITUATION'    IX    PHILOSOPHY  24I 

gone  on  in  the  forward  march   of   higher   philo- 
sophy  after  its  great  contribution  to  the  interest 
under  Leibnitz,  Kant  and  Hegel.     Eucken  indeed 
is   very   popular,    but   beyond    emphasising    the 
practical    aspect   of    philosophy,    he    has    really 
contributed   nothing   new   and  original.     France 
indeed  is  philosophically  awake  in    Bergson,    but 
Bergson's   philosophy   is  still  in  the  making,  and 
it  will  yet  take  some  time  for  the  world  to    learn 
clearly   what  he  has  to  say  on  the  great  problems 
of  mind  and  life.     His  main  attempt  seems  to  be 
directed  to  correcting  the  one-sidedness  of   Ideal- 
istic Absolutism, — to  the  exposition  of  the  reality 
of  time  and  change.     The  chief  interest  of   philo- 
sophy  seems   at   present    to   be   centred   in    the 
subject  which  forms  the  title  of  this   paper.     It  is 
a    refreshing   characteristic  of  present-day  philo- 
sophical thought  and   discussion    that   there    are 
no    great    minds    who    care    to    defend    either 
materialism    or   the  duality  of  matter  and  mind. 
These  doctrines  are  now  confined  to  the  unreflect- 
ive    and  the  unphilosophical.     The  more  reflect- 
ive minds,  specially  those  who  are  in    touch  with 
higher  philosophical  literature,  see  now  the  reality 
of  mind  perhaps  more  clearly  than  was  ever   seen 
in    any    other   age   of   the  world,  and  to  all  who 
have  given  us  systems  of  thought,  mind  is  the  sole 

16 


242     MOKISM,  PLURALISM  AND  THEIR  RECONCILIATION'     CHAP. 

reality,  whether  conceived  in  a  monistic  or 
pluralistic  form.  In  our  articles  on  "Mr.  Bradley 
on  Immortality  and  the  Divine  Personality", 
which  appeared  in  the  Indian  Messenger  in  its 
issues  of  March  21  and  28,  we  ha^^e  seen  that  the 
most  eminent  philosophical  thinker  of  England 
at  the  present  day  is  a  spiritual  monist.  We 
also  saw  in  those  articles  his  method  of  approach- 
ing the  great  problems  of  mind — what  may 
roughly  be  called  the  critical  method — the 
method  of  philosophical  analysis  and  synthesis 
guided  by  the  law  of  non-contradiction.  In  its 
essence  it  is  the  same  as  the  Dialectical  Method 
of  Hegel.  But  though  acknowledging  great  in- 
debtedness to  Hegel,  Mr.  Bradley  does  not  profess 
to  be  a  close  follower  of  his  method.  Professor 
John  McTaggart  of  Cambridge,  an  able  exponent 
of  the  Hegelian  Philosophy,  is  another  leading 
thinker  of  the  day.  He  differs  from  Bradley  and 
the  early  English  Hegelians, — Stirling,  Green,  the 
Cairds,  and  their  younger  followers, — in  represent- 
ing the  Absolute  not  as  a  unitary  Spirit,  but  as 
a  Unity  of  spirits  and  he  thinks  that  his  exposi- 
tion of  Hegel's  meaning  is  a  truer  exposition  than 
that  of  the  writers  just  named.  According  to 
him  every  human  personality  is  a  partial  and 
temporary   reproduction   of    a     distinct     eternal 


C  DR.    MCTAGGAHT  S    VIEWS  243 

person  in  whom  the  whole  of  reality  is  eternally 
particularised  and  who  has  therefore  both  a  finite 
and  an  infinite  aspect,  and  Absolute  Reality  is 
a  unity  of  such  persons, — a  unity  which,  so  far 
as  we  may  know  and  conceive  it,  is  not  personal. 
That  human  personality,  in  the  imperfect  and 
broken  form  which  it  assumes  in  our  lives, 
cannot  be  conceived  except  in  relation  to — except 
as  the  reproduction  of — a  perfect  all-inclusive 
Person,  is  a  thought  which  must  already  be 
familiar  to  our  readers.  What  we  know  moment 
after  moment  must  be  thought  of  as  connected 
with  all  that  we,  as  individuals  subject  to  the 
limitations  of  time  and  space,  do  not  know — 
connected  in  a  Mind  which  is  above  such  limi- 
tations, but  which  is  at  the  same  time  essentially 
one  with  what  we  call  our  own  mind.  But  is  it 
the  same  Mind  that  forms  the  absolute  ground  of 
all  our  minds  ?  Reality  indeed  is  one,  its  unity 
being  implied  in  all  forms  of  knowledge  and  in 
all  our  mutual  relations,  intellectual  and  moral. 
But  is  the  unity  that  of  a  single  Mind  or  Person  ? 
If  so,  what  would  be  the  meaning  of  the 
innumerable  differentiations  of  the  world — of  the 
countless  persons,  distinct  from  and  often  hostile 
to  one  another,  of  whom  human  society  is  com- 
posed ?     If  there  were  no  differentiations   in   the 


244     MONISM,  PLURALISM  AND  THEIR  RECONCILIATION    CHAP. 

Original,  how  could  they  be  found  in  the  repro- 
ductions ?  Besides,  personality  or  self-conscious- 
ness is  such  an  integral,  indivisible  thing,  that 
one  cannot  share  it  with  others,  and  a  single 
Person  including  other  persons  in  himself  cannot 
be  conceived.  Considerations  like  these  lead  Dr. 
McTaggart  to  conclude  that  the  Absolute  is  an 
impersonal  Unity  of  spirits  eternally  distinct  from 
and  yet  related  to  one  another,  who,  as  subjects, 
exclude  one  another,  but,  as  objects,  are  included 
in  one  another.  Dr.  McTaggart  defends  the 
Hegelian  character  of  his  doctrine  by  referring  to 
that  part  of  the  Dialectic  in  which  Hegel  treats 
of  the  category  of  Life.  One  quotation  from 
his  Studies  in  Hegelian  Cosmology  will  make  his 
meaning  clear.  In  distinguishing  Hegel's  view 
of  the  Absolute  from  that  of  Lotze,  he  says  on 
p.  31  of  the  book:  ''But  this  is  not  Hegel's  view. 
He  reaches  in  the  category  of  Life  a  result  from 
which  he  never  departs  in  the  subsequent 
categories — that  the  unity  and  plurality  are  in 
an  absolutely  reciprocal  relation,  so  that  while 
the  plurality  is  nothing  but  the  differentiation  of 
the  unity,  the  unity  is  nothing  but  the  union  of 
the  plurality." 

We   see    then   how    Hegelianism,    though     a 
system  of  Monism,  approaches  Pluralism  in  some 


C  DR.    HALDAR  S   CRITICISM    OF    MCTAGGART  245 

of  its  representations.  Of  real  Pluralism,  how- 
ever, Pluralism  unmodified  by  Monism,  we  shall 
treat  later  on.  Its  chief  representative  is  the 
American  psychologist,  James,  lately  deceased. 
But  before  we  cross  the  Atlantic,  we  may  as  well 
turn  once  to  our  own  country  and  see  what  one 
of  our  own  thinkers — a  deep  and  subtle  thinker 
and  an  able  writer  on  philosophy,  chiefly  in  the 
form  of  articles  in  the  English  and  American 
reviews,  but  who  has  also  given  us  two  little  but 
deeply  thoughtful  books— has  to  say  on  the  recon- 
ciliation of  Monism  and  Pluralism.  Dr.  Hiralal 
Haldar,  in  his  Ph.  D.  thesis  on  Hegelianism  and 
Human  Personality,  accepts  the  doctrine  of  the 
Absolute  as  eternally  differentiated  into  persons, 
having  come  to  the  conclusion  by  independent 
thinking  before  Dr.  McTaggart  wrote  his  Cosmo- 
logy. But  he  ably  and,  as  it  seems  to  us,  very 
successfully  combats  McTaggart's  view  of  the  im- 
personality of  the  Absolute.  One  extract  from 
Dr.  Haldar's  essay  will  show  the  line  of  argu- 
ment taken  by  him.  On  p.  29  he  says :  "Each 
particular  self,  in  so  far  as  it  contains  everything, 
is  identical  with  the  Supreme  Reality  within 
which  everything  falls.  Its  consciousness,  as  all- 
embracing,  must  coincide  with  the  Supreme  Reality, 
and   the   Supreme   Reality,    on   its    part,     must 


246     MONISM,  PLURALISM  AN'D  THEIR  RECON'CILIATIOX     CHAP, 

therefore  coincide  with  its  consciousness  and 
hence  be  conscious.  I  do  not  see  how  it  is 
possible  to  evade  this  conclusion.  A  particular 
differentiation  of  the  Absolute,  as  a  finite  deter- 
minate thing,  excludes  all  others,  but  it  includes 
everything,  not  in  its  own  strength,  but  in  virtue 
of  the  identity  of  its  all-embracing  consciousness 
with  the  Ultimate  Reality,  which  cannot  conse- 
quently be  other  than  consciousness.  The  con- 
ception of  a  particular  self  ideally  including 
everything  becomes  tenable  only  on  the  supposi- 
tion that  the  inclusion  is  also  real,  and  if  the 
ideal  inclusion  is  conscious  inclusion,  so  the  real 
inclusion  must  also  be."  And,  as  Dr.  Haldar 
says  briefly  in  another  place,  "Once  touched 
with  self- consciousness  at  a  particular  point, 
where,  be  it  remembered,  it  (the  Absolute)  is 
completely  personal,  how  can  it  ever  shake  it 
off  ?...So  if  the  Absolute  is  a  person  in  me,  it 
must  itself  have  personality." 

In  the  second  part  of  our  article  we  shall 
speak  of  the  Pluralism,  Humanism  or  Pragmatism, 
as  it  is  variously  called,  of  Professors  James  and 
Ward,  and  of  its  attitude  towards  Theism. 


PLURALISM  247 

II 

The  prevailing  heresy  of  the  day,  the  lineal 
successor  of  Mill's  Scepticism  and  Spencer's 
Agnosticism,  is  Pluralism,  called  also  Humanism, 
because  it  conceives  the  world  as  an  assemblage 
of  human  or  finite  spirits,  and  Pragmatism, 
because  to  it  the  true  is  identical  with  the  useful 
or  practical.  It  professes  to  be  a  system  of 
Empiricism,  "  Radical  Empiricism,"  in  the 
words  of  its  chief  advocate.  Professor  James.  It 
is  almost  as  blind  as  the  elder  Empiricism  to  the 
fact  that  its  opponents — at  any  rate  many  of 
them — also  appeal,  not  to  innate  or  a  priori 
ideas,  but  to  experience  itself,  and  that  the  only 
difference  between  it  and  them  lies  in  the  different 
interpretations  given  of  experience  on  each  side. 
In  still  another  characteristic  it  resembles  its 
elder  sister,  and  that  is  its  impatience  in  studying 
the  literature  of  the  opposite  school.  The  result 
is  an  over-weening  confidence  in  itself  and  an 
exaggerated  idea  of  its  victory  over  enemies 
mostly  the  creatures  of  its  own  imagination.  In 
going  through  James's  Pluralistic  Universe,  one 
is  struck  with  the  author's  superficial  knowledge 
of  the  Absolutist  writers  he  mentions  and  criti- 
cises. There  is  nowhere  any  attempt  to  system- 
atically  state   or   summarise   the   arguments   of 


240     MONISM,  PLURALISM  AND  THEIR  RECONCILIATION     CHAP. 

these  writers,  to  enter  into  the  analysis  of  ex- 
perience given  by  them,  and  then  to  show  its 
insufficiency  or  to  expose  any  unwarrantable 
assumptions  that  may  be  involved  therein.  The 
whole  criticism  resolves  into  the  suggestion  of 
a  number  of  difficulties  which  the  theistic  or 
monistic  theory  of  the  world  cannot  fully  meet. 
On  its  own  part,  Pluralism  undertakes  no  analysis 
of  experience.  Its  assumption  that  the  world 
consists  of  a  plurality  of  distinct  selves  of  all 
grades  of  development,  from  the  lowest  forms  of 
life  to  the  most  highly  refined  souls,  it  takes  as 
a  given  fact — as  the  practical  presupposition  of 
all  knowledge  and  activity.  Having  started 
from  this  assumption,  it  shows  how  the  instinct 
of  self-preservation  and  growth  inherent  in  each 
conscious  unit  of  the  world  leads  it  to  struggle, 
to  act  on  and  be  acted  on  by  its  fellows,  and 
thus  to  gather  experience  and  gain  strength.  To 
the  Monist  or  the  philosophical  Theist,  the  whole 
description  of  this  growth  in  experience  on  the 
part  of  fundamentally  isolated  individuals — for 
instance  the  one  given  in  Professor  Ward's  Realm 
of  Ends, — seems  little  better  than  so  much  my- 
thology. To  him,  the  individual  cannot  be 
conscious  of  himself  without  feeling  himself, 
however  vaguely  at  first,   one    with    a    Universal 


PLURALISTIC    ASSUMPTIONS  249 

which  at  the  same  time  transcends  him  infinitely. 
His  self-consciousness  is  simply  bound  up  with 
the  consciousness  of  a  universal  life.  The  Pluralist 
therefore  starts  with  a  false  assumption — an  as- 
sumption which  is  by  no  means  a  fundamental 
datum  of  experience.  The  individual  does  not — 
he  simply  cannot — start  with  an  idea  of  himself 
as  an  isolated  unit  surrounded  by  other  units 
quite  distinct  from  him.  He  starts  with  an  idea 
of  himself  as  a  part  of  a  whole — a  whole  which 
he  jeels  to  be  conscious,  but  only  gradually  knows 
and  thinks  to  be  so  as  he  grows  more  and  more 
reflective.  When  he  thinks  of  other  units  like 
himself,  he  thinks  of  them  also  as  parts  of  a 
whole — the  same  whole  of  which  he  is  a  part. 
Now,  false  in  his  start,  the  Pluralist  is  false  also 
in  the  account  he  gives  of  the  growth  and  ac- 
cumulation of  experience  in  the  individual. 
Experience  cannot  grow  and  accumulate  in  a  self 
merely  individual — one  whose  consciousness  is 
limited  to  the  immediacy  of  time  and  space. 
Such  a  self,  a  self  subject  to  sleep  and  oblivion, 
is  incapable  of  conserving  its  momentary  ex- 
periences, uniting  them  and  developing  them  into 
the  knowledge,  wisdom  and  strength  which 
•constitute  the  glory  of  humanity.  All  this  im- 
plies in  him    the    presence    of   Something   which 


250     MONISM,  PLURALISM  AND  THEIR  RECOXCILIATION     CHAP. 

transcends  the  limitations  implied  in  individuality. 
Neither  can  a  mere  individual  have  any  com- 
merce or  connection  with  other  individuals.  The 
Pluralist  only  takes  such  connection  for  granted 
and  does  not  see  its  necessary  implications. 
These  implications  are  the  existence  of  a  single 
universal  and  undivided  Experience  and  its  re- 
production or  particularisation  in  the  form  of 
individual  experiences.  If  the  moving  of  the 
water  of  a  single  tank  causes  the  water  of  other 
tanks  to  move,  or  if  the  ringing  of  the  bell 
of  a  single  temple  rings  also  the  bells  of 
other  temples,  the  tanks  and  the  temples 
in  question  must  have  a  bond  of  unity,  some- 
thing which  is  common  to  all  of  them.  Infinitely 
deeper  must  be  the  Unity  which  makes  possible 
the  complex  and  diversified  relations  of  the  social 
and  spiritual  life  of  humanity.  And  the  Unity 
underlying  conscious  beings  must  be  itself  con- 
scious. But  the  Pluralist  thinks  he  can  do 
without  such  a  Unity.  Professor  James  took 
great  interest  in  religion.  For  the  mystical  and 
the  unusual  in  religion  specially,  he  had  a 
theosophist's  passion  and  avidity.  But  in  his 
Varieties  of  Religious  Experience,  though  he  allows 
a  very  large  subliminal  self  behind  every  waking 
human   self,   he   confesses   he   does   not   see  the 


C  PROF.    WARD  S    PLURALISTIC    THEISM  25I 

necessity  of  postulating  a  common  universal  self 
behind  all.  If  there  is  a  God  at  all,  he  thinks, 
that  God  cannot  be  the  Absolute — he  may  only 
be  a  very  great  individual  among  individuals, 
primus  inter  pares.  Professor  Ward,  in  his  book 
named  above,  arrives  at  a  more  satisfactory 
conclusion.  In  the  earlier  parts  of  his  book,  he 
attempts  to  construct  a  purely  pluralistic  universe 
with  the  activities,  individual  and  combined,  of 
its  component  parts.  This  attempt  reminds  one 
of  J.  S.  Mill's  attempt  to  construct  a  purely 
sensationalist  universe  of  mere  "  possibilities  of 
sensation"  and  "  laws  of  association "  without 
any  ontological  principle.  But  as  Professor 
Ward  proceeds,  and  has  done  with  his  criticism 
of  the  ordinary  theistic  conceptions  of  a  world 
governed  by  fixed  laws  under  an  all-seeing  and 
perfectly  good  God,  he  by  and  by  sees, — much 
in  the  same  way  in  which  Mill  latterly  admitted 
an  ontological  basis  of  his  "  possibilities  "  and 
the  probablity  of  a  personal  God, — that,  after 
all,  the  theistic  interpretation  of  the  universe  is 
far  more  reasonable  than  the  pluralistic  one. 
Once,  however,  on  the  high  road  to  'Faith', 
which  he  extols  over  Reason,  he  gradually 
comes  to  attribute  to  God  all  the  perfections 
which     a     devout   Theist    believes    in,    though 


252      MONISM,  PLURALISM  AND  THEIR  RECONCILIATION     CHAP, 

on  grounds  quite  unsatisfactory  to  those  who 
are  not  gifted  with  any  great  "wish  to  be- 
lieve," and  who,  with  Tennyson,  see  "more  faith 
in  honest  doubt  than  in  all  your  creeds."  We 
may  illustrate  the  unsatisfactoriness  of  Professor 
Ward's  procedure  by  an  extract  from  the  con- 
cluding chapter  of  his  book.  He  says  on  p.  436  : 
"Not  content  with  the  admission  that  Pluralism 
on  examination  points  both  theoretically  and 
practically  beyond  itself,  many  advocates  of 
Singularism  (by  which  term  Professor  Ward 
evidently  means  Absolutist  Monism)  have  attempt- 
ed to  show  it  up  as  radically  absurd.  These 
attempts  do  not  appear  successful.  That  an 
absolute  totality  of  individuals  is  self-contradic- 
tory and  that  an  absolute  individual  (by  which 
term  the  Professor  evidently  means  the  Monist's 
Absolute)  is  not,  is  more  than  any  one  has  yet 
proved.  That  a  plurality  of  individuals  in  isola- 
lation  should  ever  come  into  relation,  is  incon- 
ceivable indeed,  but  only  because  a  plurality 
without  unity  is  itself  inconceivable.  That  in- 
dividuals severally  distinct  as  regards  their  ex- 
istence could  not  interact,  is  however  a  mere 
dictimi.  Pluralism  takes  the  world  as  we  find  it, 
as  a  plurality  of  individuals  unified  in  and  through 
their  mutual    intercourse.     'Radically    empirical' 


MR.    BRADLEY   ON    PLURALISM  253 

this  certainly  is,  but  if  it  be  true,  we  are  entitled 
to  ask  the  Singularist  how  he  ever  got  started 
on  the  a  priori  road.  We  approach  Theism  then 
as  promising  to  complete  Pluralism,  not  as 
threatening  to  abolish  it,  as  providing  theoretical- 
ly more  unity  in  the  ground  of  the  world,  and 
practically  a  higher  and  fuller  unity  in  its 
meaning  and  end."  We  need  not  stop  to  point 
out  the  contradictions  and  misconceptions  in- 
volved in  this  extract.  What  we  have  said 
above  will  perhaps  somewhat  help  the  reader  to 
see  them. 

We  shall  close  with  one  or  two  extracts  from 
Mr.  Bradley's  short  criticism  of  Pluralism, 
specially  that  of  Professor  James,  in  his  Essays  on 
Truth  and  Reality.  His  estimate  of  the  system 
is  so  unappreciative,  that  though  he  has  given 
only  about  a  hundred  pages  to  it  in  a  book  of 
nearly  five  hundred,  he  says  in  his  preface  :  "I 
have  been  unwilling  to  include  so  many  pages 
on  Pragmatism.  The  subject  certainly  does  not 
occupy  a  corresponding  space  in  my  mind."  Mr. 
Bradley  refers  in  several  places  of  his  book  to 
Professor  James's  ignorance  of  Absolutism.  We 
extract  only  a  small  footnote :  "Prof.  James's 
idea  as  to  Absolutism,  that  it  is  a  way  of  getting 
what   you    want  without  paying  anything  for  it, 


254      MONISM,  PLURALISM  AND  THEIR  RECONCILIATION     CHAP. 

is  surely  (to  any  one  who  knows)  a  striking 
revelation  of  the  limits  of  his  knowledge."  Of 
the  general  character  of  James's  work,  he  says, 
"Assuredly  I  am  not  alone  in  the  desire  that  he 
would  turn  his  back  for  a  time  on  sporadic 
articles  and  on  popular  lectures,  with  their 
intolerence  and  half-heartedness  and  more  or 
less  plausible  arguments,  and  would  work  in 
the  way  in  which  a  man  who  seriously  aims  at 
a  new  philosophy  is  condemned  to  work,  and 
with  a  result  which  I  at  least  feel  sure  would 
repay  his  labour.  And  perhaps  in  the  mean  time 
he  might  remind  his  followers  on  this  side  of 
the  Atlantic  that,  of  course  without  prejudice 
to  the  future,  it  is  not  yet  true  that  the  crowing 
of  the  cock  brings  the  sun  above  the  horizon." 
The  last  sentence  refers  evidently  to  the  jubilant 
cry  of  James's  admirers  that  the  sun  of  a  new 
system  has  risen  on  the  philosophical  horizon. 
Mr.  Bradley  closes  his  examination  of  Pragma- 
tism with  the  following  words  on  Prof.  James's 
place  as  a  philosopher :  "Judging  so  far  as  I 
can  judge,  I  must  doubt  that  claim,  to  take  high 
rank  as  a  metaphysician,  which  has  been  made 
not  by,  but  on  behalf  of.  Prof.  James.  I  cannot 
find  in  his  metaphysical  views  (as  I  understand 
them)    much    real   originality,    and  what  I  miss, 


C  PROF.   JAMES   AS    A    METAPHYSICIAN  255 

perhaps  even  more,  in  his  metaphysics,  is  the 
necessary  gift  of  patient  labour  and  persistent 
self-criticism.  With  all  his  merits  as  a  philo- 
sopher, and  assuredly  they  are  great,  I  cannot 
think  it  is  as  a  metaphysician  that  Prof.  James's 
name  will  hold  its  place  in  the  history  of 
thought."  "But  Prof.  James's  contribution  to 
Psychology,"  he  says  in  another  place,  "will  re- 
main, I  believe,  indubitable." 


OTHER  WORKS  BY  THE  SAME  AUTHOR 

8.  Hindu  Theism  :  A  Defence  and  Exposition.  Som 
Brothers,  30,  Goabagan  Lane,  Calcutta.     Re.  1-8. 

9.  The  XJpanishads  in  Devanagari  and  English  characters, 
in  t\v  5  volumes.     Som  Brothers.     Rs.  3-8. 

10.  The  Religion  of  Brahman  or  The  Creed  of  Educated 
Hindus.     Elysium  Press,  3,  Fariapukur  Street,  Calcutta.     As.  8. 

11.  Sankaracharya  :  His  Life  and  Teachings.  Elysium 
Press.     As.  S. 

12.  Maitreyi  :  a  Vedic  Stoni'.  Natesan  &  Co.,  4,  Sanku- 
ram  Chetty  Street,  Madras.     As.  4. 

13.  The  Philosophy  of  Sankaracharya  in  Natesan's  "  Sir 
Sankaracharya."     As.   i::. 

14.  Gleams  of  the  New  Light  ;  Essays  in  exposition  of 
some  leading  principles  of  pure  Theism,  doctrinal  and  practical. 
Sadharan  Brahmo  Samaj  Office,  211,  Cornwallis  Street,  Calcutta, 
As.  5. 

15.  The  Roots  of  Faith  :  Essays  on  the  grounds  of  belief 
in  God  and  in  criticism  of  Scepticism  and  Agnosticism.  Sadha- 
ran Brahmo  Samaj  Office.     As.  5. 

16.  Whispers  from  the  Inner  Life  :  Essays  on  Theistic 
Ideals  and  Experiences.     Sadharan  Brahmo  Samaj  Office.    As.  4. 

17.  Thirstinsr  after  God  :  Prayers  offered  in  times  of 
private  devotions.     Sadharan  Brahmo  Samaj  Office.     As.  2. 

18.  JTt«HfH— ^''^'Tt'Rf^W^      itwt^^l        Itft^l      3lWRt^ 

^^Fttrtsira  I    ^  ^f^  ^t^  I 

19.  3t^!rt-f^^1-^t?r¥-^tf^t?[  ^tWt^  I  ft«ft?1  3lWRt^ 
•^^Tt^?I  I     ^  Ftf^  'Sft'll  I 

20.  f^t^R^— *?^t$|<(  ^|%1f  ^   '^^  IW^   -21^^  I     Ttft^t 


BL  Tattvabhushan,    Sitanath 
200  Brahma,]  ijnasa  or  an 

T283  inquiry  into  philosophical 

1916  basis  of  Theism 


PLEASE  DO  NOT  REMOVE 
CARDS  OR  SLIPS  FROM  THIS  POCKET 


UNIVERSITY  OF  TORONTO  LIBRARY